Home

Time Guardian Plus User`s Guide

1. JoscLass EE y 2 46 0 1 1 5 4 6 1 1 1 levers 1 Defout v REESE O 247 D 1 1 Add p To add a labor category select a subcategory from each of the dropdown lists and click on the Add button The selected labor category will appear in the Selected window To remove a labor category select the desired category in the Selected window and click on the Delete button When you have finished click on the button to save your settings and return to the Schedule Rotation window Click on the button The displayed schedule in the Schedule list and labor category in the Labor Reference list will be applied to the cell Copy Cut and Paste Schedules can be assigned to other days in the rotation pattern by using the E m and Copy Cut and Paste buttons once there is at least one schedule assigned to a day in the rotation pattern 8 To add an additional Schedule and Labor Reference to particular day a D C Select the desired day in the rotation Select the desired schedule from the Schedule list Select the desired labor category from the Labor Reference list Click on the button Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 25 Import The Import Module provides a way to import employee and schedule data from delimiter files into Time amp Attendance software If the Advanced Schedule Module is activated the Import Module screen will allow the Import Type selection for
2. esssesrsusrrnerrnerrnerrnnrrnsrrnsrrnrrnerrnnrrnerrrnrrrnrrrerrrerrrerrrerne 21 1 Using the Benefit Time Module sessssssusrrnsrrnsrrnerrnerrnnrrnsrrnsrrnsrrnnrrnnrrnnrrrerrnnrresrreerreerreerree 21 1 Chapter 22 User Group Module sittin 22 1 User Group Module OM CHO Nessin aa 22 1 Using the User Group Module esssessesrsnsrrnsrrnsrrnerrnerrnnrresrrnsrrnerrnnrrnnrrnnrrrnrrenrresrrnerreerreerree 22 2 GIOS SANY aoe a G 1 Time amp Attendance Software Table of Contents jii This page intentionally left blank Time amp Attendance Software Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction W elcome to Amano Time amp Attendance Software Suite Welcome to Time Guardian Time Guardian Plus and Time Guardian Pro the all in one easy to use Time and Attendance software Amano s Time and Attendance software allows you to track and manage your employees time and attendance directly from your PC which makes the collecting reporting and the transferring of employees hours to payroll companies easier and quicker than ever before If this is your first time working with a time and attendance package there may be terms that are new to you such as Salary Hourly Pay Policy Pay Code Wages Unit and Point A detailed Glossary located in the back of this User Guide has been provided to assist you as you navigate through Amano s Time amp Attendance software Should you have any comments on Time Guardian Time Guardi
3. 2005 ET i is id 15 ib 17 19 20 21 24 23 24 2h 28 29 30 E Using the dropdown lists select the Month and Year Click on the desired day in the calendar When you have finished click on the button on the Select Date screen to Save your setting and close the dialog box and return to the Settings tab of the Range Overtime window Range Overtime General Settings Start Date End Date Settings 172 2006 pee Remove 8 In the End Date field enter a start date manually in MMDDYYYY format or click on the button The Select Date dialog box will appear 11 22 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module Select Date oe x ath e 2005 li i i l4 15 1 19 20 Zi oe 25 26 27 28 29 Using the dropdown lists select the Month and Year Click on the desired day in the calendar When you have finished click on the 7 button in the Select Date screen to save your setting and close the dialog box and return to the Settings tab of the Range Overtime window Range Overtime IETT General Settings Start Date End Date Settings 01 02 2006 OB 01 01 2007 2 r3 N emove Note If you wish to duplicate the Range Overtime properties from the General and or Settings tabs select the desired Range Overtime template open it enter in a new name and click on the Save As L Ei button The new Range Overtime template will appear in the
4. ERN ue Labor Analysis Report Labor Analysis Report NJ MFG Bldg Exceptions Re Exceptions Repo Payroll iho Time Card New Report Time Card New Report Tips Report Tips Report a Import a Export AS Auto Process hi 2 Click on the lasd button and the following type of a Reports window General tab will appear 9 2 Time amp Attendance Software Output SEF General Date Range Title Page Footer Sort Exception Paycode Suc Clas Department Employee Name Description Report Historical Hours Report v IV Exception s Per Day IV Display Weekly Total Day of week Output Format PDF Excel In the Name field enter a name for the report required field Enter in a brief description of the report in the Description field In the Report field select the type of report you want to create The choices are Hours Summary Report Employee Report Labor Analysis Report Presence Report Historical Hours Report Exceptions Report Time Card New Audit Report and Tips Report Note Advanced modules can add the following choices Unauthorized Hours Report Timecard Report Schedule Posting Report Schedule vs Actual Report DeAccrual Balance Report and DeAccrual History Report 6 For Hours Summary Report Check the following options to include them on the report e Employee signature line e Supervisor signature line 7 For Time Card and Time Card New Report Check the fol
5. Select Exceptions you would like to track Press the Exceptions button to select from 9 predefined exceptions Exception Setup allows you to select whether or not to track differences in the time that an employee was scheduled and the actual time worked The Time amp Attendance software has nine 9 standard Exceptions which are located in the Selected list that can be moved to the Available list See figure The default is all exceptions selected However activation of advanced modules can add up to an additional 26 Exceptions see figure sy Exceptions Exception Available Break Not Taken Call Back Coffee Break Not Taken Early In Break Early In Grace Early In Meal Early Out Break Early Out Grace Long Coffee Break Late In Break Late In Grace Add All f Late In Meal Late Out Break Remove Late Out Grace Late Out Meal Remove All Multiple Break Multiple Coffee Break Multiple Meal Meal Not Taken Meal Penalty Miscellaneous Break Paid In Previous Pay Period Short Break Short Coffee Break 1 To add an Exception highlight the desired Exception in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all the listed Exceptions click on the Add All button To remove an Exception from an employee s record highlight the desired Exception in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all the listed Exceptions click on the Remove All button Tim
6. ic input access to Human I plements the secure hype ecording using Image Mas ents and properties of files ecurity policy and starts th E files For Faster startup o vice onitors new hard disk driv ard disk drives and volumes nastics on behalf of Lotus e Service pnent Framework for McAF ee On Access scanning pr ling of McAfee scanning a ation trust protection sery send and Alerter service of Microsoft Office Diagno Started Automatic Manual Manual Manual Manual Automatic Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Disabled Manual Manual Started Started Started Started Started Started Started Started Started Started Step 4 On the Properties screen under Startup type select Automatic from the dropdown menu and click on the Apply button Step 5 With Escalation Services TG or Escalation Services TG Plus selected click Start to immediately start the service Step 6 Close Computer Management screen as you are finished configuring and starting the required Apache Tomcat 6 service From now on the service will start automatically 20 2 Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module The Time amp Attendance software sections affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Instant Me
7. Pay Class Assigns a Pay Class to an employee Pay Classes are created in the Pay Class tab in the Setup Wizard Selecta Pay Class from the dropdown list Time Zone Assigns the time zone of the location that the employee works in Select the appropriate time zone from the dropdown list Daily Rule only appears if Advanced Rounding module is activated Assigns a Daily Rule to an employee which can supersede a schedule Supervised By Assigns a supervisor to a employee for filtering and timecard processing Validation Assigns employee to a validation template which defines specific location terminal Note To lookup employees click on the Filter Employee icon on the top of the Employees screen and an Employee Filter screen will appear similar to the following example Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration 5 5 LA i xi Available Selected Standard Add Add All Remove Remove All By default all employees are selected You can filter employees by selecting the Pay Classes and Departments they are assigned to in each of the available Pay Class and Department tabs Employees that are assigned to the selected Pay Classes and or Departments will appear in the Available list From the Employee Filter screen click on the Employee tab to show Available and Selected lists of employees Both the Available and Selected lists of employees can be sorted by typing in the Criteria fields above each lis
8. e The AmanoNet Tag holder must be assigned to a Department e The Department where the AmanoNet Tag holder is assigned should exist as one of the Labor Names for the Department Labor Level in the Time amp Attendance software e The AmanoNet Tag holder must have a Tag where the Tag Code does not equal a Time amp Attendance employee s Badge Synchronize Transactions from AmanoNet to the Time amp Attendance software This is the last step in the synchronization process This process brings in transactions from AmanoNet 7 6 into the Time amp Attendance software as punches There following criteria must be met for the transactions to come in 1 2 The transactions have not been processed Under the Access Control Settings module if the Reason Code is set to the default value 0 then all valid transactions will be processed Otherwise only transactions that have the Reason Code value will be processed 3 The AmanoNet Tag holder that has a transaction must have an Id defined The AmanoNet Tag holder that has the transaction must have a corresponding Time amp Attendance software employee where the Tag holder s Id is equal to the Time amp Attendance software Employee Number If there is an Employee match then a Punch record will be created in Time amp Attendance software assigned to that employee If No employee is found then an Undefined Punch record will be created in the Time amp Attendance software Ev
9. Ba Today Setup n Pay Codes Shifts be Daily Rules 5 1 Pay Class o i weekly Overtime consecutive Ove to Holiday Group fH a Schedule H S Locations L Daily Activities 54 Output 2 Click on the button and the Consecutive Overtime window will appear 11 18 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 3 gt Consecutive Overtime fe fee General Consecutive 1 Consecutive 2 Consecutive 3 Consecutive 4 Count Mame Overtime after 6th consecutive d Description Employee recieves overtime N after the 6th consecutive day No minimum hours required Consecutive O Non Consecutive Number of Overtime E Minimum Worked Hours ootoo EES 2 Enter a name for the overtime template in the name field required field 3 Enter a description of the overtime template in the Description field 4 Click on the Consecutive 1 tab 55 Consecutive Overtime Ea oe _ General Consecutive 1 Consecutive 2 Consecutive 3 Consecutive 4 Count 5 5 From To Base 00 00 09 00 Schedule Levelt 09 00 11 00 REG Level2 11 00 Level 3 Level 4 5 Enter the threshold limits and assign a Pay Code to each level 6 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for Consecutive 2 thru 4 If applicable 7 Click on the Count tab Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 11 19 35 Consecut
10. Move Pay Code Use to filter out Pay Codes you do not want to use Work Hours Awards all work hours in addition Before Schedule Hours worked before scheduled Within Schedule Hours worked in schedule After Schedule Hours worked after schedule Schedule Use this to setup award for schedule Zone Use zone window to award hours Value Used to award hours or dollars Hour Multiplier Get all hours within zone X multiplier Change Rate Used to change rate of pay for both cost amp billable rates Change Billable Rate Change only billable rate Change Cost Rate Change only cost rate Set Zone Number Used to select zones Guaranteed Hours System gives you guaranteed amount across all schedules or single schedule Type Select one of the following options when source Is set to 18 6 Time amp Attendance Software Zone Differential Module e Value and Hour Multiplier select either Hours or Dollars e Change Rate select Fix Value Add To or Percentage Base e Set Zone Number select either Set All or Set in Window e Schedule select either In Zone or All e Guaranteed Hours select either Single Schedule or All Schedule Value Enter in the amount of hours or dollars Pay Code Filter Select either All or Selected If selected is chosen use the a button in the Pay Code Selection column to select the Pay Code hours to count towards the Zone Award Assign Pay Code Select either Single Pay Code or Pay Code
11. actual z Punches Overrides Adjustments Day IN Punch IN Punch Day OUT Punch OUT Punch Total Hours Adjustment Aug 23 2009 Sun EDT Aug 24 2009 Mon Daily Totals Period Totals Cost Tatal Category Hours Dolare cost cont Total El Total 10 00 Pay Code REG 08 00 OT 02 00 X gt PE AIE Illustration of Bill ackson timecard after adjustment Ee Timecard 1002 Jackson Bill KE EI E 2002 Jackson Bin ab 5123703 8729109 Punches Overrides Adjustments 2009 Mon None 5 2009 Tue 5 2009 wed ann ITL T Daily Totals Period Totals El Total 12 00 El Total 12 00 Pay Code Pay Code REG 08 00 fF REG 08 00 OT 04 00 OT 04 00 F El ka 6 6 Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration The Adjustments Tab in the Timecard grid consists of the following displayed columns Column Name Date that punches schedule belong to Day within Payperiod punches hours belong to Assigned Schedule user defined Pay Code user defined to be assigned to hours Hous Tota Hours forassigned Pay Code Dollars Dollars paid to employee Comments Reason Comments reason for employee adjustment applied to timecard Totals The Daily and Pay period Totals for the employee are shown in the Timecard grid at the bottom of the screen to provide a quick view for the employee s Daily and P
12. or Schedule total of hours for each schedule s with all punches ignored An employee Cannot punch for a schedule and hours will be paid for only scheduled days A schedule is a day that has an Individual Schedule or Template Schedule defined for it Comment The place to enter specific comments about an employee Note This function can also be done with Global Apply from the main employee list Load Image Click on the Load Image 5 icon to load an employee s image into the screen and database The following Open dialog type screen will appear Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration 5 3 Valid image formats are PEG J PG GIF TIFF TIF and PNG The employee image will be saved into the Time Guardian database and displayed on the General tab Note Cannot be retained when converting from Firebird to MS SQL and vice versa Personal T ab From the Employees screen click on the Personal tab and the following type of screen will appear a Employees Bit nay 5999 Poulton Alan A __ _ General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Certification Benefit Web Access NexusZ20 Birth Date 1 1 1970 EE Marital Status Not Specified Yi Gender Male or Female Soc Sec No The employee s 9 digit social security number first 5 digits masked Birth Date The employee s birth date MMDDYYYY Marital Status The employee s marital status Singl
13. e Employee Number Select how the Employee Number will be defined The choices are As itis Same as Badge or Manual Increment From If Manual Increment From is selected you must enter the starting number in the field provided Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 33 e Badge Number Select how the Badge Number will be defined The choices are As itis Same as Employee Number or Manual Increment From If Manual Increment From ts selected you must enter the starting number in the field provided e Payroll Number Select how the Payroll Number will be defined The choices are As it is or Same as Employee Number e Default Labor Assign a default category for each Labor Level using the dropdown lists e Default Assignment Assign a default Pay Class Time Zone and Schedule using the dropdown lists Also when Advanced Overtime Module is activated you can assign from a Daily Rule and when Zone Differential Module is active you can assign a Zone Note The defaults will be used if the import file does not contain data for these fields 8 Click on the Import Field Map Settings tab This tab allows you to manually define the elements of the import file you are using ECACC ganara bnper Mle Permak babag ipar balad ganeg mpa Finkel Map Selby Note The data elements in the selected list should match the data fields of the import file The selected data elements should also be in the same orde
14. E E tore Employee Fri Jul 21 Sun Jul 23 Mon Jul 24 Sun 11 00 PM on 07 00 AM EG 08 00 a h Romwell k Ramesh The Individual Scheduler consists of the following components Grid One row for each selected employee s and a column for each day in the profile Template Schedule This dropdown list is used to assign existing Template Schedules to an ign employee for a particular day You may also use the and buttons to move the Date Range of the Individual Schedule Grid Custom schedules based on Template LHe Schedules can be created by clicking on the Template Schedules button and the following screen will appear A Template Schedule OA SO General Name 7 4 Type Fixed Paycode REG Shift Son 2off 7am pm Start Day Current Current Time O7 00 AM 04 00 PM To create a custom schedule from the Template Schedule click on the button and select the following a Name Enter a name for the schedule b Type Select Fixed Open or Off from the dropdown list c Pay Code Select the Pay Code for the schedule from the dropdown list d Shift Select the Shift for the schedule from the dropdown list e Start Select Current Day 1 days before or 1 days after for the Start Day and enter the Start Time in the Time field f End Select Current Day 1 days after 2 days after or 3 days after for the End Day and
15. Pattern Mon 08 01 Mon 05 0 REG ag ot From this window the user can change the employee s schedule They can choose to change the employee s selected schedule by clicking on the box next to Schedule Settings If no checkmark is placed in this box then the Schedule selections will not be applied to the employee s When the Global Apply Wizard is completed all these settings will be applied to all the employees selected on the list Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration 5 11 Labor L evel Global Apply If selected the Labor Level window for the Global Apply W izard see the following figure will be the 4 to appear This corresponds to the Labor Level tab found on the Employees screen see Labor Level Tab Wi Global Apply Labor Level V Labor Level 1 Setting Department fi Default hd 1 Default 2 NJ Engineering From this window the user can choose to apply a specific setting by clicking on the Labor Level 1 Setting and choosing a department from the dropdown list If no checkmark is placed in the box then the selection will not be applied to the employee s In the example figure above the user choose to change the selected employee s home labor levels 1 When the Global Apply Wizard is completed all these settings will be applied to all the employee s selected on the list Cost Rate Global A pply If selected the Cost Rate window for the Global Apply Wizard see th
16. Pay Class f Schedule Locations ch Daily Activities 69 output 2 Click on the ia button and the following Rounding Templates window will appear Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module 14 3 Rounding Templates Open Schedule Transfer Break Meal General Grace First IN Last OUT Name Grace 15 before and after IN OUT 15 7 Description Round IN and OUT to schedule start and end when within 15 minutes of schedule start and end times ALL xg ee ee ee ee ee im T Break Meal Hour Rounding a Rounding Punch Rounding Types Grace First IN Last OUT All IN OUT Open Schedule Transfer Ol ks Enter a name for the Rounding Template in the name field required field Enter a description of the Rounding Template in the Description field Click on Break Meal if rounding template is to be applied a ee Select the desired rounding type and options hour rounding or punch rounding If selecting Punch Rounding the boxes alongside Grace First IN Last OUT All IN OUT Open Schedule and Transfer will become selectable The corresponding tab on the Rounding Templates screen will become configurable depending upon the type s of Punch Rounding selected Note If you wish to duplicate the properties of an existing Rounding Template for another Rounding Template select the desired Rounding Template open it enter in a new name and click on the Laz E button The
17. Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 17 ajaja gaua a General Overtime Rules Rounding Rules Meal Rules Holidays Does overtime apply For this Pay Class C No Yes Hours for payroll require authorization Hours worked before an assigned schedule require authorization T Hours worked beyond an assigned schedule require authorization Hours worked on an unassigned schedule require authorization Basic Overtime Rules Advanced Overtime Rules Daily overtime after neigo IV Weekly overtime after 40 00 Reset on Day of week Sunday v IV Work on a Holiday is considered as overtime wi 2 Select Yes if overtime applies to this Pay Class 3 Select authorization if the company schedules the employees By default the following options are unchecked Hours for payroll require authorization when checked a user with Admin or Payroll privileges See Step 9 Login needs to approve employees hours in the timecard before they can be passed to the payroll However the hours will still be calculated see example timecard and table Note The following three schedule authorizations will not be enabled if no schedule created Hours worked before an assigned schedule require authorization when checked a user with Admin or Payroll privileges see Step 9 Login needs to approve employees hours in the timecard that occur before a schedule before they can be calculated see example table Hours worked b
18. Time Zone GMT 1 1 00 West Samoa Summer Time Parking Support k Integration Daily Rule None x zone ZONE1 yv re Employee Number Select how the Employee Number will be defined The choices are As itis Same as Badge or Manual Increment From If Manual Increment From is selected you must enter the starting number in the field provided Badge Number Select how the Badge Number will be defined The choices are As It is Same as Employee Number or Manual Increment From If Manual Increment From is selected you must enter the starting number in the field provided Payroll Number Select how the Payroll Number will be defined The choices are As it is or Same as Employee Number Default Labor Assign a default category for each Department using the dropdown list Default Assignment Assign a default Pay Class Daily Rule Time Zone Schedule and Zone using the dropdown lists Daily Rule and Zone require advanced modules The defaults will be used if the import file does not contain data for these fields 9 Click on the Import Field Map Settings tab This tab allows you to manually define the elements of the import file you are using See figure for example 9 46 Time amp Attendance Software Output 10 4 Import T 44 T g g Employee Records z General Import File Format Settings Import Default Settings Import Field Map Settings Conversion Report Created by DWG TrueView DWG Co
19. Main View 9 From the Settings tab within Range Overtime module screen click on the Browse button within the Settings column and the following type of screen will appear l Range Overtime Level Count Base 00 10 08 00 Schedule Level 08 00 10 00 OT Levelz 10 00 12 00 DT sv Level 3 Level 4 ja Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 11 23 10 From the Level tab up to 4 levels of Range Overtime can be created with each level assigned its own threshold limit to move the hours from one Pay Code to another See the following table for a settings example Range Overtime From To Pay Code oi ao oe T a a 11 Click on the Count tab and the following type of screen will appear al Range Overtime Ss a E N ow ye HOOOsEES ooosoooooos OoosoooccosS JOOOe000ONsS s Ipaoooooooooo s iooo 12 On the Count table check the Pay Codes in each column that you want to be combined to achieve each level s threshold For example if you checked REG and HOL in the Level 1 column then the hours for REG and HOL Pay Codes will be combined to reach Level 1 s threshold value Note You can select all the Pay Codes in a given column by clicking on the column heading You can also deselect any checked Pay Codes in a column by clicking on the column heading To select all Pay Codes in t
20. New Year s Day President s Day Washington Birthday Memorial Day Add Independence Day Columbus Day Rosh Hashanah Labor Day Sukkot Add All Shemini Atzeret Thanksgiving Day Day After Thanksgiving Day Remove Christmas Day Remove All Islamic New Year Ramadhan Id Ad Fitr eee The Holidays assigned to a Pay Class can be displayed in calendar format by clicking on the Calendar ca button This button is activated when at least one Holiday is assigned to the Pay Class The Year view see figure is used to see the current previous or following year s scheduled holidays amit Wwitlels S MiTiWwitiFlsl sim Twi ties SiHiTJWI T E 1 F 5 a 7 2 8 6 fF a 4 4 la Mee wi amp 4667 amp eww 17 1 44 4 r 7 E it 44 4 rd wa 17 4 iz a 14 t Bar an qi dt fa fF i I 4 D 21 a aM 2 a Hm M2 P naya ae oth g Si T sm ef a oe Gh Oe d Click on the icon too print the displayed Holiday calendar and to close the calendar click on the kad button 2 After completing the entry selection of information for Step 5 Pay Class Setup click on the Next lal button to advance to Step 6 Exception Setup 3 28 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Step 6 Exception Setup Wizard Optional Wizard Setup Step D Setup Wizard Step 6 Exceptions Setup Select Exceptions you would like to track Note Exceptions are used to track and correct employee attendance g Exceptions
21. Selected 1001 Smith John i e Selec 1005 Johnson Susan Comment Remove Remove All Show Active Employees Only Show Active Employees Only e To add an employee to the payroll file highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the Add button e To add all employees to the report click on the Add All button e To remove an employee from the payroll file highlight the desired employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e To remove all selected employees click on the Remove All button e Filter employees shown in the Available and Selected lists by selecting a sort category in the dropdown list in the Sort field Then enter data in the Criteria field s above either or both lists Only employees matching the data entered will appear in both lists Step 11 Save the Payroll Settings you just created and then select the Run Payroll to generate the payroll export file from the Time amp Attendance software Step 12 Once the export file has been created from the Amano Time amp Attendance software it can now be imported by QuickBooks From QuickBooks select File from the main menu See figure 9 38 Time amp Attendance Software Output gt AMANO Quickibooks Pro 2010 Home Explore Workflow aele Edt Viy Lati Favorites Company Customers vendors Empkyees Daning Reports nine Services Window Hap FX New Company Open or Restore Company
22. Setup Wizard This pattern will repeat itself throughout the entire day M eal Rules Note If the Advanced modules are activated the Meal Rules tab will be non accessible 1 Click on the Meal Rules tab and the Meal Rules screen will appear see figure This tab is used to define the basic meal rules for this Pay Class Pay Cl sa __ HHHOH Dihari Chevtine Ruler Rounding hes Mea aia Dey ra reat Fit kki z iana Fie Vee Pal kekelon Sed regs Minimum oure Fo rear before d mad deduction G Da ipiyle bare Mea Bamia Se Fer Mai Has Roureing Roure Dy maa oha Kieran C Fad Puech Roundy Pure each eel pret Difi yoi ure is Define your port 7 held ered Sere Hours En Rr helen A reel rani Fiai ai Larghe imha wari Meal pini The Meal Rules tab will allow you to define the Meal rules for a Pay Class of employees Start by selecting Yes to the question Do you want time deducted for a meal Next enter the Minimum hours that an employee must work before the Meal rule will be applied followed by the length of the Meal deduction Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 25 Once a meal deduction is defined you have the option of whether the employee will punch out during the meal period If so you must define whether rounding will apply to these meal period punches When an employee punches IN and OUT for their meal the window that these punches occur in must be defined so that the meal will no
23. Used to indicate an assigned Username and Password to provide access to the software Meal A designated period of break time for an employee Maximum Shift Length Determines the period of time that all punches occurring after Day Change Time will be associated with the last IN Punch before the Day Change Time Meal Grace A Free period of time that is allocated to an employee who returns late from a meal Time amp Attendance Software Glossary G 5 Memory Dump A command sent to the terminal that will erase all data currently stored in its memory Military Time Based on a 24 hour clock military time is one of two standard forms of recording time Miscellaneous Used to denote information that falls into no specific category Missing Punch MP An exception used to identify missing punches for an employee Next Indicating that the punch occurred after midnight and is applied to the Next day No Schedule Indicates that no specific schedule has been assigned to an employee Not Scheduled NS An exception used to identify an employee who works on a day where they have no assigned schedule On Line Used in the Help menu on line indicates that the information is contained within the software Overtime Hours worked that extend beyond an assigned schedule Overtime Authorization Requires manager approval before overtime hours are awarded Overtime Reset Day The day or date on which overtime calculations are
24. When the Action field is set to Stop any overtime types that are listed in the table where this occurs will not be executed if employee qualifies for that overtime To proceed you must change the Action field from Continue to Stop in the selected overtime type To do so click on the Action field for the desired overtime type and select the Action from the dropdown list See the previous illustration for an example Click on the Overtime Authorization tab Pay Class CER General Day Change Schedule Rounding Overtime Definition Overtime Execution Overtime Authorization Holiday Benefit Execution Hours worked before an assigned schedule require authorization C Hours worked beyond an assigned schedule require authorization Hours worked on an unassigned schedule require authorization al If your company s policy requires overtime authorization check any one of the 3 possible scenarios where employees may work overtime The scenarios are Hours worked before an assigned schedule start Hours worked after an assigned schedule Hours worked on an unassigned schedule When checked the employee will only be awarded overtime for each of the above if a check is placed in the corresponding column of the Timecard grid B Sch A A Sch TW mii Shifts All setup rules will fall into 3 categories shift rules daily rules or multiple day rules Shif
25. amp Attendance Software Output 9 39 QuickBooks Auto Integration Note For auto synchronization to work QuickBooks Pro version 7 or higher must be installed Also QuickBooks Pro must be started up first and running before starting up the Amano Time amp Attendance software The following procedure describes how to setup the Amano Time amp Attendance software for QuickBooks Pro auto integration synchronization Step 1 During installation of the Amano Time amp Attendance software the Setup Wizard in Step 1 General Setup will ask Do you want to send employee hours to your payroll software Select Yes Step 2 Select Direct integration from the dropdown menu for How do you want to export QuickBooks Step 3 Select Yes for Is QuickBooks installed on the current PC It is recommended to have QuickBooks installed on the current PC and open for successful direct integration Note You can select No and integrate with QuickBooks on a server remotely but the QuickBooks still has to be open for successful integration synchronization Step 1 General Setup Define your Company profile Jh Company Do you want to integrate Access Control No Do you want to send employee hours to your payroll software O No Yes Quickbooks Pra v How do you want to export QuickBooks Is QuickBooks installed on the current PC O No Yes Step 1 From Setup Wizard in Step7 Employee Setup check the box to Sync Employee
26. corresponding Hours Auth column see the figure Schedule Hours Auth 6 Sch Auth A Sch Auth U Sch Auth T Tue 09 00 AM Tue 0 Wed OS 00AM Wed w Thu 08 00 AM Thu 0 Fri 0S00 AM Fri 00e 17 26 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module Chapter 18 Zone Differential Module Zone Differential Premium Rules M odule Introduction The activation of the Zone Differential Module provides a way to increase an employee s pay for working during certain times of the day Premiums are broken into three sections of zone window qualifications and awards The Premiums module falls under the daily rules section of the tree view Premiums will be assigned to a daily rule Then the daily rule can be applied to either an employee or Pay Class Below is a sample of the new daily rule module The sections of Time amp Attendance Software affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Daily Rules Zone Differential Template v Zone Codes definition v Zone Qualification definition v Zone Award definition Zone Award definition Main Application Tree view Note Due to the complexity of the Zone Differential rules Amano recommends using Support to assist in defining your Zone Differentials See also the Zone Windows examples document Using the Zone Differential Premium Rules Module Note The Zone Differentials Module with Zone Codes node Qualification Rules node and Zone Award node
27. e Schedule end before e Schedule end before e Schedule end after e Schedule end after e FirstIn punch after zone start e Last Out punch before zone end Pay Code Filter Select either All or Selected If selected is chosen use the button in the Pay Code Selection column to select the Pay Code hours to count towards the Zone Award Comp This field will compare the value in the Value column to the Condition The options are e lt Less than e lt Less than or equal to e Equal to e gt Greater than e gt Greater than or equal to e lt gt Not equal to 18 4 Time amp Attendance Software Zone Differential Module Value and Value Type Enter in the amount of hours or dollars in the Value column and select Hours or Dollars in the Value Type column Labor Level Filter Select either All or Selected If selected use the oe button in the Labor Level Selection column to select the Labor Levels to count towards the Zone Award Connector This field is used to connect the next line or rule to the condition The options are AND OR 8 To add another Qualification Rule click on the Add button A new Qualification Rule line will appear beneath the line just created To delete a Qualification Rule click on the Remove button To move a Qualification Rule up in the sequence select the desired line and click on the Move Up button To move a Qualification Rule down in the sequence select the des
28. eanin Tt aR lan ann x gt 455 LEMONDALE LN FFLORISSANT KIRKWOOD ELLISVILLE ST LOUIS ROBERTSYILLE ST LOUIS ADKIALD 110 VEGA DR To set the row number of the import file that the import operation will begin at enter a number in the Start Import At Row field Each data element in the import file must be defined in the order that it appears Data elements can be separated by commas tabs and semicolons To assign a field select a data element in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all the fields click on the Add All button The field s will then be displayed in the Selected list Add additional fields until all data elements have been properly defined Use the Remove Fields button to un assign fields To skip a data element click on the button A character will appear in the Selected list to indicate that a data element was skipped To re order fields in the Assignments Window use the Move Up and Down buttons 12 28 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module Reports A bout Scheduling The Schedule Posting and Schedule vs Actual Reports are available if the Advanced Schedule Module is activated The general format of each report type is fixed but some content can be hidden Report Name A landscape type calendar like grid report that can be grouped Schedule Posting Report by one of the labor levels to post for the employees to see when
29. estart the service Device Manager sy Alerter Notifies sel Disabled Local Service Sy Storage Sa Apache Tomcat 5 Manual Local System Removable Storage Apache Tomcat Automatic Local System Disk Defragmenter 8 amp 5 Application Layer 6 Provides s Started Manual Local Service Disk Management Sa Application Manage Provides s Manual Local System PSE TE a Services and Applications Sa ASA License AMANO ASA Licens Started Automatic Local System z services SRy ASP NET State Serv Provides s Manual Network 5 mi WMI Control Sa Atomic Time Synchr Started Automatic Local System s 2 Extended 4 Standard Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 1 Step 3 Find Apache Tomcat 6 and select it Then double click on it to display properties Compiiendanogement Fie Action view Window Help a Hn SER e em m Computer Management Local W System Tools i m aes Phe Apache Tomcat 6 Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As led x Local Users and Groups Sy NET Runtime Optim Microsoft n Manual Local System Perfoimance Logs end Alerts stop ane Sy Adobe LM Service AdobeLM 5 Manual Local System Device Manager et a Sy Alerter Notifies sel Disabled Local Service Storage Sy Apache Tomcat 5 Manual Local System Removable Storage 4 Apache Tomcat Started Automatic Local System Disk Defragmenter Yim Ui he s Started Manual L
30. t Anup AT Anna br cnr T Daily Totals Period Totals Category Hours Dollars Cost Cost Total Category Hours Dollars Cost cost t Total El Total 10 00 Pay Code REG F OT DIE gt E ka Illustration of Bill ackson timecard after override Fe Timecard 1002 Jackson Bill F 1002 Jackson Bil AA l a 23 09 8 29709 v E amp actual T Punches Overrides Adjustments De Day Schedule Department Pay Code Comments Reason ae 08 00 AM Mon 05 00 PM Mon 08 00 AM Mon 05 00 PM t t Daily Totals Period Totals Category Hours Dollars Cost Cost Total Category Cost Ti Total El Total 12 00 Pay Code REG 10 00 OT 02 00 gt i E ka Note The Period Totals on the bottom of the timecard show the before and after amount of hours Adjustments T ab This function allows pre calculation Timecard adjustments to be made to Labor Levels Pay Codes Hours not for BONUS Pay Code and Dollars only for BONUS Pay Code A Comments Reasons column is provided to make notes i e reason for the adjustment For all other Timecard modifications see Punches and Overrides tabs 1 To perform an employee Timecard adjustment click on the Adjustments tab then click in Pay Code column in the date row you wish to edit From the dropdown list select the desired Pay Code This action must be done first 2 Click in the Department column to select
31. ts Delete Ctrl D ena 1001 Paxton Jeffrey New 1200 ri 08 00 AM T Sun 08 00 AM ri 05 00 PM Sun 05 00 PM Brady EG 09 00 REG 09 00 Robert __ _ zee 4 ie opre E H Manalo EG 03 00 Romwell 4 _ _ ef S 1207 Dominico David Edit User Defined New The New command from the submenu enables you to create a custom Advanced Schedule Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 19 A Advanced Schedule General Paycode OT Zone Code 2 Not Qualify Zone 2 Hours 04 00 Allocation O Normal Pay in advance 7 24 2006 O Remainder Labor C Home labor Cost Center 55 1 CC1 w Department 4 Cc4 JOBCLASS 6 6 CC6 w Select the following e Pay Code Selectthe Pay Code that the schedule will be in e Zone Code Select the Zone Code that the schedule will be in e Hours Enter the amount of hours for the day e Allocation Select Normal Pay in advance or Remainder If Pay in Advance is selected you must enter the date that the employee will be paid for the schedule using the S button The Select Date window will appear Note The Hours for the Pay in Advance will be put into the Payroll Export file on the Pay in Advance date The hours on the Timecard will indicate the date they occur 20 21 ee 4 25 26 27 28 29 31 FA E When you have finished click on the click on the button e L
32. 4 Enter a time in 24 hour format of the day in the Time column that the desired bell signal will be activated 5 Enter the duration in seconds in the Duration column that the bell circuit will be activated for 6 Check the appropriate day s of the week and or Holiday Holidays only work with HandPunch terminals that the bell circuit will be activated Do you want to configure your terminals If Yes is selected click the Location Terminal L J button and the Locations screen will appear see figure Answer Yes to this question if you are using terminals such as a Hand Punch FPT 40 Fingerprint and or MTX 15 terminal via a serial Ethernet or modem connection 3 48 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard TE fal T m E o m Edison Location gt Genera l Connec tion Terminals Name Edison Location Description j Door 15 Term Type ms o TZ Offset o H Output Path aupa xa S I Secondary Output file Output Path DLS Settings IV Override DLS Start Date 3 8 2009 Start Time 02 00AM Reset EndDate 11 1 2009 EndTime 02 00 AM E Before a Location can be created a Bell Schedule and Terminal Validation must be set You must create a Location to communicate with your terminals A Location enables the Time amp Attendance software to distinguish and interact with the desired terminal s Only one terminal type can be used per Location If you have more than one termi
33. 6 15 and 30 minutes The Unit is used in conjunction with the Point A Point determines if the punch will be rounded backward or forward The Units and Points to be set are e Early IN The first punch of the day before the start of the schedule and not inside the grace window e Late IN The first punch of the day after the start of the schedule and not inside the grace window e Early OUT The last punch of the day before the end of the schedule and not inside the grace window e Late OUT The last punch of the day before the end of the schedule and not inside the grace window Example Unit 15 minutes Point 7 minutes 52 minutes or greater fo wilvrounet 6 M 7 minutes or greater will round to 15 45 15 37 minutes or greater will round to 45 30 a minutes or greater will round to 30 The example above shows how the rounding occurs for the punches This same rounding procedure is done for the rest of the rounding discussed in this section For example it shows that if a punch occurs between 0 and 6 minutes it will be rounded to 0 so that a 9 06 AM will be rounded to 9 00 AM It then shows that if a punch occurs between 7 and 15 minutes it will be rounded to 15 so that 9 07 AM will be rounded to 9 15 AM 14 6 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module Late IN Early OUT Ci Rounding Start Rounding Start Rounding End Rounding End Interval 1 Interval 2 Interval 1 Interval 2 Schedu
34. Assigns the time zone of the location that the employee works in Daily Rule Assigns a daily rule to the employee if the Advanced Overtime module is active Supervised by Assigns a supervisor field to employee Can be used to filter employees Employees Pay Class NI MFG Time Zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time us amp Canada DLS Daily Rule 555 daily _rules Supervised By None Validation Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard E A a 3 39 Employees Schedule Use this tab to schedule employees A Empioyees lador Level Certification Groce Before Schedule Start 15 00 Grate After Schedule Ind 15 00 Override Gchedu e Riot aber Weebly Patten Rat Date ind Date Option ind Date E E TES Assign employees to Schedule Assigns a Schedule to an employee Schedules can be created in the Setup Wizard Define a Grace period for before and after time for Lock in Schedule at the terminal Select to use and define an override with Schedule Rotation or Weekly template Employees L abor L evel Use this tab as to assign Labor Levels Home Department to employees see figure Tempore HER HE a DogA ioo smith hn v ob General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Certification Benefit Web Access Nexus220_ Home Labor Level Assignments Parking Support _ Integration Warehouse BHGA O This tab allows you to
35. Department window that will appear W Global Edit x Department Sort Labor Number Criteria haa Criteria Labor Number ne Nan gt Available Selected 1 Default Add NJ Engineering Add All Engineering Remove Remove All T EmA To add a department highlight the department in the Available list and click on the Add button To add all departments from the Available list click on the Add All button To remove a department highlight the desired department in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected departments click on the Remove All button Use the Criteria field above the Available and Selected lists to filter sort departments in the respective list The choices are Number Badge Payroll Last Name First Name or Comment e Click on the Next Mal button and the following is an example of the Employees Global Edit window that will appear 6 16 Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration Employees Sort Last Name Criteria umber Selected Add All Remove Show Active Employees Only Show Active Employees Only e Toadd an employee highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the Add button e To add all employees from the Available list click on the Add All button e Toremove an employee highlight the desired employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e Toremove all select
36. Edit view Lists Favorites Company Customers Vendors Employees Banking Reports Online Services Window Help 5 x New Company Open or Restore Company Open Previous Company Save Copy or Backup Close Company vendor Center Employee Center Online Banking Lowifeny Switch to Multi user Mode Remote Access Utilities Import b Synchronize Contacts Convert Copy Company File for QuickBooks Mac Copy Company File For QuickBooks Online Accountant s Copy Print THF Jave as PEF Print Forms Printer Setup Send Forms Shipping ET ANU wpm Convert Accountant s Copy to Company File QBW Host Multi User Access g anbho Update Web Services verify Data Exit Alt F4 Rebuild Data oy Clean Up Company Data i eae ot ce 2h Restore Backup For Earlier QuickBooks Version Parme WE Rose u rnas u ene Doc Center Lists to IIF Files Addresses to Text File Timer Lists ae amp Report Center 4pp Center User Licenses Setup and Training X Ustune i Wenaas Mariine options Accept credit cards amp eCchecks Order Checks amp Business Cards 7 ferace cuickarmer inka M Enter the name for the payroll file in the File name field see figure It is recommended to use an iif file extension Components convertos Data HelpResources ivpay iif NUCOA 1040 iif NUCOA 1065 iif NUCO
37. Employees if granted View Edit Employees Time Card if granted Run Reports Using the W eb Interface M odule Login Web To login to the Time amp Attendance software Web Interface there are two paths 1 Open any Web browser 2 Fornon secure login type http localhost 8080 tg Replace localhost with the IP address of the Time amp Attendance software server The standard port is 8080 May need to obtain the IP address from the network administrator For secure SSL login type http localhost 8443 tg Replace localhost with the IP address of the Time amp Attendance software server The standard port for SSL is 8443 May need to obtain the IP address from the network administrator Note All SSL certificates are the responsibility of the customer network 3 Log In Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help vx x 2 fi P Search STe Favorites E D 4y http flocalhost 8080 tgpro Google v G search O gO Bhoblocked F check gt Time Guardian 0 Username Password LogIn Reset S Local intranet Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 3 3 Enter Username For employees this is his or her badge number For supervisors this is the user login name 4 Enter password For employees it is the password setup in the web access of the employee module For supervisors this is the user password for the username 5 Press the butto
38. Fil Edit Help Bar 7 Gi Today KETA re E L Daily Activities Jimber Badge Number Payroll Last Name First Marne oo 5 1006 64692760216 20 Poulton Alan oa Table E9 Timecard 4 1007 1240 jl Smith Susan z Bes 1004 Mi Manalo prt Tree DE Recalculate 503 R Bodjona Finiti View E A output 502 Patel Keyur jf Reports S05 Patel Raj o E 501 601 Brady Bob 4 ayralls TET a ee PEY EE Eo E Impor i Pl S3 Auto Process Add Edit Delete Help Output Modules Global Apply Edit The above screenshot displays the Table View of Time Guardian Plus and identifies its various sections The item windows contained in the main screen can be resized by dragging the double arrow pointer to the right or left up or down depending on the section you are working in The tree view for Time Guardian Pro would contain additional modules Title Bar Located across the top of the screen the Title Bar contains the software name username and the Windows screen buttons that will allow you to minimize resize or close the software Time Guardian Plus John _ Smith 4 2 Time amp Attendance Software How To Use M enu Bar The Menu Bar contains three 3 drop down menus File Edit and Help each with submenus to provide additional options that will assist you in the administration and use of Time amp Attendance software a Time Guardian Plus John _ Smith File Edit Help File M enu File Edit Help Log OF
39. Group General Seniority Eligibility Schedule Eligibility Holiday Selection Name btandard Description Work on holiday automatically qualifies employee For holiday hours Eligibility Requirement Must Satisfy Seniority Eligibility 3 If you want the employee to be awarded holiday hours for working on a Holiday place a check in the checkbox If a check is placed in the checkbox you must meet the Eligibility Requirement The choices are Always or Must Satisfy Seniority Eligibility The Eligibility Requirement is set in the Seniority and Schedule Eligibility tabs 4 Click on the Seniority Eligibility tab G Holiday Group General Seniority Eligibility Schedule Eligibility Holiday Selection Seniority Meet Seniority Date Eligibility or Hours Requirement Employee is eligible after 90 days From Selected Date 1213 2007 Employee must accumulate 00 00 Hours worked From Hire Date ma Paycode Selection Selected Paycodes tti orked hours 5 In the Seniority field select the requirement from the dropdown list for the employee to be awarded Holiday hours e None No requirement e Meet Seniority Date Eligibility The employee must work the required amount of days from the date set Hire or Selected Date to be awarded holiday hours e Meet Hours Requirement The employee must work a required amount of hours from the date set Hire or
40. HH MM that will enable punches to be grouped together for one shift 12 to 13 hours is a recommended number for this field thus allowing all lunch or break punches to be applied to the correct schedule 9 Enter the number of punches allowed that cross the day change time to be calculated for the schedule in the Maximum number of punches field If 0 is entered the Maximum shift length will be used to override the Day Change Time 10 If you are using both Maximum shift length and number of punches to override the Day Change Time you must select how punches will be applied to the schedule in the Shift Requirement field The choices are e AND The punches are brought back to the same shift until both the maximum number of punches and maximum shift length conditions are satisfied e OR The punches are brought back to the same shift until either the maximum number of punches or maximum shift length conditions are satisfied Example Max Number of Punches Max Shift Length relation with Shift Requirement x A punch gt Maxium shift length Max Shift Length is as follows How many punches the shift can have How many hours minuts the shift can have Max Number of Punches 4 Max Shift Length Shown below If Shift Requirement ts AND Punches P1 through P6 qualify OR Punches P1 through P4 qualify Max Number of Punches 6 Max Shift Length Shown below Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module 10
41. Inactive Rate Peroentade Base Selected Selected Change Cost Rate g Set All All Home Labor Single Schedule All All Home Labor i puarntees Hours All Schedule Selected Selected Fixed AN Paycodas Time amp Attendance Software Zone Differential Module 18 7 Creating a Zone Differential 1 Click on the Zone Differential node within the Daily Rules module in the Tree View 2 Click on the kaa button and the Zone Differential window will appear amp Zone Differential Seles General Settings Name one Differential NI Description Zone Differential NJ Assigned Day EET Remove Enter a name for the Zone Differential in the Name field required field 4 Enter a description for the Zone Differential in the Description field 5 The Assigned Day field is read only and set in the Day s of the W eek Holiday field of the Settings tab To do so click on the Settings tab and the following type of screen will appear amp Zone Differential General Settings Day of week Holiday s Default x Type Day From Day To Punch Type Qualification Add Fixed Times Current Day 10 00PM _ 1 days after 02 00AM Actual Time Set zone code For all windows to First In Punch 6 In the Day of the Week Holiday s field select the Day of the Week or Holiday s that the Zone Differential will be in effect The choices are Default Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat or St
42. J ackson is displayed in the following table using the Same rounding formula of Unit 15 and Point 7 for 2 different scenarios Daily and Punch Rounding with 2 different times for punching put The following example illustrates the difference for an employee who normally works from 08 00 to 17 00 with no time off for lunch each day having his time being calculated with Daily Rounding which rounds by total time versus Punch Rounding which rounds by each punch punch pairs Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 23 Rounding Rule Actual Actual Rounded Rounded y Type Used In Punch OUT Punch In Out H dee y Unit 15 i Mo punch No punch Point BEN mMm in rounding Out rounding Daily MESI orai vep 9 st a Unit 15 a el O45 Unit 15 Punch Point 7 07 50 V7 07 45 17 15 9 The following example table is provided to give you a visual example similar to the Rounding Simulator of where a defined Unit starts and ends The Time amp Attendance software only allows the Unitto be one of the following numbers 1 3 6 15 or 30 Selecting 1 would be minute to minute thus no example is shown 3 Unit C Gunit SSS Unit 300m 00 00 First Unit Start 00 01 00 02 00 03 Next Unit Start 00 04 00 05 00 06 Next Unit Start 00 06 Next Unit Start 00 07 00 08 00 09 Next Unit Start 00 10 00 11 00 12 Next Unit Start 00 13 00 14 00 15 Next Unit Start 3 24 Time amp Attendance Software
43. Level 2 will be disabled 14 From the Pay Class Advanced Overtime Rules click on the Consecutive Day Overtime tab to define the Consecutive Day Weekend Overtime see figure Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 21 Rt xt ES 000 0 wers O a General Overtime Rules Rounding Rules Meal Rules Holidays Does overtime apply for this Pay Class C No Yes Hours for payroll require authorization 7 Hours worked before an assigned schedule require authorization Hours worked beyond an assigned schedule require authorization F Hours worked on an unassigned schedule require authorization Basic Overtime Rules Advanced Overtime Rules Daily Overtime Weekly Overtime Weekend Overtime Consecutive Day Overtime V Apply Consecutive Overtime rules Reseton Specific Day of Week Day of week Sunday v Specific Day of Week Level 1 Pay Period Day OF Week Start Pay Period Auto Reset reset on missed consecutive day ve Worked days belore ove Number oF Conseco vertime apply Overtime Level 1 08 00 assign to Overtime Level 2 10 00 assign to Consecutive Day Overtime awards overtime based on the qualifying number of consecutive days worked If an employee fails to work the number of consecutive days needed to qualify no overtime is awarded Up to two levels of overtime can be set for Consecutive Day Overtime calculations Each level consists of two settings Consecutive Day Overtime 1 and 2 To
44. Mapping Labor Level Filter Select either All or Selected If selected is chosen use the a button in the Labor Level Selection column to select the labor categories to count towards the Zone Award Labor Award Select either Labor working in Home labor or Fixed labor If Fixed labor is selected use the oe f button in the Labor Award Selection column to select the Labor Level that will be included in the Zone Award Zone Codes Select the zone code to set the awarded hours to The following table displays the options for the Zone Award based on the Source selected Paycode Labor Award All All f Labor All All Working In Work Hours Inactive Selected Selected Home Labor Inactive Inactive All Paycodes Active Fixed Labor R All All Working In Before Schedule Inactive Selected Salectad Homa Labor Inactive Inactive All Paycodes Active Fixed Labor H All Al Working In Within Schedule Inactive Selected Selected nme Labor Inactive Inactive All Paycodes Active Fixed Labor All All Working In After Schedule Inactive Selected Selected kame Labor Inactive Inactive All Paycodes Active Fixed Value Haus Inactive Inactive Pome Ennor Active All Paycades Inactive Active Dollars Fixe Labor Hours All All Working In Hour Multiple Dollars Selected Selected Home Labor Active Inactive All Paycodes Active Fixed Change Rate Change Billable Fixed value All All l Add to Inactive Active Inactive Inactive
45. Module 11 15 Note The 4 buttons at the top right of the Level tab allow you to Select or De select all copy cut and paste the Overtime Pay Codes into different days or holidays The buttons are as follows Pay Class Weekly Overtime Weekly Overtime rewards employees overtime hours for working more hours than a set hour value for that particular week or Pay period The hours that exceed the set hour value are normally paid at a higher wage than regular REG Pay Code hours Weekly Overtime Is set in the Weekly Overtime window which is accessed by selecting the Weekly Overtime node within the Pay Class module in the Tree View Up to 4 levels of Weekly Overtime can be used Each level can be assigned its own threshold limit that move the hours from one Pay Code to another See the following table for an example Weekly Overtime From To Pay Code O iee eo o o E PP Oaia o S Additionally you can setthe Pay Codes that will count toward weekly overtime level Creating a W eekly Overtime T emplate 1 Click on the Weekly Overtime node within the Pay Class module in the Tree View g Time Guardian John_Smith Fie Edit Help 3 Today S 3 Setup E Company 48 Users God Pay Codes Sp Shifts b Daily Rules 03 Consecutive Overtime Sj Range Overtime gy Holiday Group fa Schedule Locations L Daily Activities 9 output 2 Click on the button and the Weekly Overtime wind
46. Name Alan Hire Date 419 2010 Ss Type Inactive Inactive Date Hourly C Salary Pay Type Supervisor Authority Level None Gre Reject Threshold Default j v Hours Comment Management Type Access Control amp Time Attendance v ccess Control amp Time Attendance 1 E A ead bed Number Employee Number required field this must be unique since it is the primary sorting key Badge The employee badge number required field Note If you are using Access Control Nexus 220 or AmanoNet 7 6 use the Registration Reader RR Badge Reader m icon to the right of the Badge field to enter the Badge number from the Registration Reader Payroll The Payroll ID Number of the employee required field Last Name A mandatory field for each employee containing his or her last name Middle Name An optional field containing the employee s middle name First Name A required field for each employee containing his or her first name Hire Date The date thatthe employee was hired and can be set by clicking on the calendar icon Double click on the desired date to close the box and populate the required field Inactive When checked the employee will be considered inactive and will no longer be displayed on reports or count toward your employee total 5 2 Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration Inactive Date The date that the employee was put on Inactive status Supervisor Check this bo
47. Name field and a brief description of the report in the Description field 4 Select the Maximum of employee s to be included in the report Select the Employee Interval y axis of the report see the following example Schedule Coverage 2 xj Legend a Template B Auto E Individual EMPLOYEE INTERVAL COVERAGE INTERVAL RANGE DAY INTERVAL 6 Enter the Day Interval hours of the day interval in HH MM format Enter the Coverage Interval hours of the day that will have schedule coverage in HH MM format 8 Select the Range of the report e For Single Day Select Specific of day s and enter 1 and then select the desired day in the from field 12 8 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module Range C Day of week Specific of devs 1 from won Range of Days Select Specific of day s and enter the desired amount and then select the desired day in the From field Weekly Range Select Day of the Week and select the desired Day in the Start Day field Range ie Day of week start Day Mon hi Specific of dayta 9 Click on the Pay Class tab El Schedule Coverage M m E General Payclass Cost Center 55 Department JOBCLASS LEVEL4 Employee Available Selected STD J 1st 5hift mano corporate Ag Remove Remove All To include employees from a given Pay Class in the report highlight the desired Pay Class in the Available list and cl
48. Password NJ Flex 4on Soff new a n Flex 10h nday 12 17 2007 4 winter MFG Schedule 8 5 M F Schedule 12772008 ls Add KIKIKI 3 rows viewing 3 rows rows 1 to 3 page 1 of 1 me ae E Schedule Rotation E Se PRO Setup Daily Activities Output Preferences Welcome SYSDBA Schedule Rotation Name NJ Flex 4on 3off new Description Ng Flex 10hr day Relative Start Date 12 17 2007 Length in Days css Er Pattern 74 0 34 14 11 8 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu O o o O Mon 07 00 AM Tue 07 00 AM Wed 07 00AM Thu 07 00 AM Mon 07 00 PM iit Tue 07 00 PM fir Wed 07 00 PM iit Thu 07 00 PM fii REG 12 00 REG 12 00 REG 12 00 REG 12 00 em Enter a name for the Schedule Rotation template in the Name field required field 4 Inthe Description field enter a brief description of the template In the Relative Start Date field enter in the start date of the pattern in DDMMYYYY format or click on the button and the following Select Date dialog box will appear Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 9 a ae PRO Setup Daily Activities Output Preferences Welcome SYSDBA Schedule Rotation Name NJ Flex 4on 3off new Description Ng Flex 10hr day Relative Start Date 12 17 2007 E Length In Days 14 Pattern Sun Mon o is O Mon 07 00 AM 22 Thu 07 00 AM Mon 07 00 PM ii 29 Thu 07 00 PM fi REG 12 00 2009 REG 12 00 Using the
49. Patel Ramesh E Cost Center 55 3 CC3 Department l Default JOBCLASS 1 Default LEVEL4 1 Default Delete 2 10 Click on the button in the Date field to enter the date that the rate increase will be in effect and enter the percentage increase of the rate in the Increase field When you have finished click on the 7 button to save your settings and return to the Combined Billable Rates window 11 Click on the button to save your settings The Combined Billable Rate will be added to the Main View Rate Templates A Rate Template allows you to create a rate to assign to employees or labor levels Rate Templates are assigned to employees in the Wages tab of the Employee window To create a Rate Template 1 Select the Rate Template module within the Company module in the Setup group in the Tree View 2 Click on the a button and the Rate Template window will appear Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module 15 13 a Rate Template General Number g Marnie Description Cu E nter a number for the Rate Template in the Number field required field Enter a name for the Rate Template in the Name field required field In the Description field enter a brief description of the Rate Template E To add a rate click on the Add button and a row will appear on the Rates box o Rate Template DER i Number 15 5 Name Standard R
50. Pay Code Setup click on the Next lej button to advance to Step 4 Schedule Setup Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 13 Step 4 Schedule Setup Wizard O ptional Wizard Setup Step E Setup Wizard Step 4 Schedule Setup Do You want to create Schedules far your employees Schedule Do you want to create schedules for your employees Click Yes and press the Schedule button to define at least 1 Schedule if you are scheduling employees The default is No Schedule which is automatically assigned to all employees when the company schedules employees When you press the Schedule button the following screen will appear i501 x m iw 44 g gt gt gt EE shift Mon Sat Schedule StS YHK Sat Schect e General Current Day 08 00 Note Employees can only be assigned to 1 schedule day and schedules cannot overlap 1 Create a new Schedule You will be required to enter a Name 2 Click on the Add button and a row will appear to define the new schedule Select the Start Day from the dropdown choices of Current Day 1 days before or 1 days after Click in the End Day field and select from the End Day choices of Current Day 1 day after 2 days after or 3 days after The Start and End Days define when a schedule will run start to end 3 Enter a Start Time and End Time in the appropriate fields of the Week for the Start and End times of the schedule If a schedule crosses midnight you will a
51. Pre Installation Summary Time Guardian Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Set Choose Install Folder Get User Input Choose Database Option Microsoft SQL information Choose the Time Guardi DJ Pre Installation Summary Le Cilanse Fi lila gt lrrstalling b gt Install Complete Product Name Time Guardian Install Folder CA Time Guardian Shortcut Folder CADocuments and Settings All Users Start Menu Time Guardian re G Disk Space Information for Installation Target Required 367 407 756 bytes Available 121 792 876 544 bytes Cancel Previous JE instal py Time amp Attendance Software Installation 10 The QuickBooks Direct Integration screen will appear Please review the displayed information on the screen and click on the Next button to proceed S TimeGuardian E x QuickBooks Direct Integration Introduction Check QuickBooks Integration if you use QuickBooks for Payroll License Agreement This will install drivers to exchange data between TimeGuardian Choose Install Set PR Choose Install Folder Get User Input Fi Choose Database Option Microsoft SQL information a Choose the Time Guardi he A b gt install Coriglaie ia C ER enous Mone 11 The Installing screen will appear The status bar on the bottom of the screen will display the installation status d Time Guardian a x Installing Time Guardian Intr
52. Punch h e Hours to Work The starting point of the break window The number of hours the employee must work after the From field setting before the break window begins e Length Length of window in which the employee must punch to be awarded the break e From Select the Schedule Start or 1st IN Punch e Penalty Select this box to apply the penalty This applies when an employee is not able to take their assigned break for the day The employer is penalized e Penalty Length Enter the penalty window length If an employee takes their break during this window the penalty is the amount of time assigned the penalty window minus the lunch taken at the penalty Pay Code e Pay Code Select appropriate Pay Code from the dropdown list e Apply Short Penalty Select this box to apply the short penalty To delete a break window select the desired row and click on the Delete button 12 Click on the Coffee Breaks tab Repeat steps 10 through 12 for the Coffee Breaks 13 Click on the Meals tab Repeat steps 10 through 12 for the Meals Break Credit Break Credit is used to apply the left over or remaining time that an employee has from a meal or break to other meals or breaks where the employee exceeded the time allowed For example the Break Credit is setup to allow break time to be credited to meals for the Maximum Amount of 15 minutes The break time allocated for the employee is 20 minutes and the meal time allocated is 45 minutes Th
53. See Adding Employees However Certification Benefitand Web Access will only appear if the appropriate module is activated 3 After choosing the sections by clicking in the boxes click on the Apply ka button to apply your choices Click on the Next appear in order button and the first selection will appear sections will General Global Apply If selected the General window for the Global Apply W izard see the following figure will be the 1 to appear This corresponds to the General tab found on the Employees screen see General Tab H Global Apply General Inactive Settings y V Inactive Inactive Date Supervisor Setting m IV Supervisor Authority Level Setting Authority Level Management r Reject Threshold Setting Reject Threshold Default hd Type Pay Type Settings C Hourly Pay Type Hours Schedule Hours 00 00 gt RIC From this window the user can choose to apply a specific setting by clicking on the box next to the selection If no checkmark Is placed in the box then the selection will not be applied to the employee s In the example figure above the user choose to apply all the selections to the employee s When the Global Apply Wizard Is completed all these settings will be applied to all the employees selected on the list Assignments Global Apply If selected the Assignments window for the Global Apply Wizard see
54. Select either Cost Rate or Billable Rate Order in the Type field 9 To add a selection highlight the desired item in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all the listed items click on the Add All button To remove an item highlight the desired item in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all the listed items click on the Remove All button 10 Click on the button to save your settings C ombined C ost Rates This module enables you to create Combined Cost Rates and is enabled when at least one item is assigned to the Cost Rate Order in the Combined tab of the Rate Setup window and at least one employee has been added in the Employees module The rate templates created here are assigned to employees in the Wage tab of the Employees module Note There must first be combined cost rates setup in the Rate Setup module under Company before using this module To create a Combined Cost Rate 1 Select the Combined Cost Rates module within the Company group in the Tree View 2 Click on the isa button to create a new Cost Rate To edit a Combined Cost Rates template select the desired template within the Combined Cost Rates module in the Tree View and click on the button or double click on the template row and the following type of screen will appear Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module 15 7 A Combined Cost Rates f General Employee 1 Smith Mike JOBCLASS
55. T IM Profile General Pay Code Threshold Exception Pay Class Department Employee Available Selected MJ MFG Add Add All Remove Remove All ht he To select a Pay Class highlight the desired Pay Class in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all Pay Classes from the Available list click on the Add All button To remove a Pay Class from the Selected list highlight the desired Pay Class in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected Pay Classes click on the Remove All button 10 Click on the Department or Labor Level tabs These tabs allow you to receive an IM notification when the selected department Labor Levels are used IM Profile General Pay Code Threshold Exception Pay Class Department Employee Sort Labor Number Criteria a Labor Number Criteria Name Selected 1 Default im Engineering TEST Finance Remove 8 Parking 9 QA Department Remove All 10 RBD b lt gt wid fl 4 Parking Support Add All Integration Labor categories can be sorted by Labor Number or Name using the Sort field Labor categories can be filtered in both the Available and Selected lists by entering data into the Criteria field above each list Only Labor categories matching the data entered will appear in both lists To select a labor category highlight the desired labor category in
56. The time at which hours worked are applied to the Overtime Pay Code G 2 Time amp Attendance Software Glossary Daily Rounding Used to round an employee s recorded punches based on a defined Unit and Point in the Pay Policy Day Change Time The time at which the next work day begins By default this setting is 2 00 a m Department Report Provides data based on the Department that the employee is assigned to Departments Used to group employees for reporting purposes only DOB Abbreviation used for Date of Birth Dollar Pay Codes Used to assign Tips and Bonuses in the system Door One of two types of relay schedules Door is used to assign the duration of time when access is permitted Duration Used to specify the amount of time for a Relay Schedule El Early IN An exception used to identify early IN punches for an employee Employee Number The unique number assigned to each employee Employee Report Provides a list of all employees in the system Employee Setup An option located on the Main menu that allows the administration of employees in the system Time amp Attendance Software Glossary G 3 Early Out EO An exception used to identify early OUT punches for an employee Example Simulation A tool that tests the results of certain rounding rules Exception Codes Flags used to track employee schedule deviations Exception Report A report used to track deviations Grid View Allows you to s
57. Time 0 gt 00 Tag Options Type Normal v APB Override V Report Always Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module 16 7 Note For Tag 1 the Badge number Tag Code Is disabled as itis Read only but it is enabled in the other tags It will be Read only and the same as the Badge number Enter the following for Tag s TAG Code The number of the tag or badge you wish to use Use the Read Badge icon to the right of the TAG Code field to enter the number from the Registration Reader RR TAG Type The choices from the dropdown menu are Slim Tag 5 bytes ISO Animal WriTag 2048 Wrilag 128 ASCII Barcode Magstripe Sagem Biometric Personal Access Code RF InfraRed Tag Mifare Tag HID Tag Felicia Tag General 13 56 MHz Tag and Any Tag Type For AmanoNet only Group 1 to 3 for 4 Tag systems and 1 to 6 for 8 Tag systems Access groups that will be assigned to the tag Start Date The date when the tag will be activated YYYYMMDD End Date Displays the date when the tag will expire YYYYMMDD If left blank the tag will never expire End Time The actual hour 1 23 on the date when the tag will expire HH Type Tag Options Assigns one of the following functions to the badge or tag a Normal Normal employee b Suspend All access for a particular tag is suspended c Blacklist The tag holder will be denied access to the site d Special Events 1 and 2 Button Tag holders a
58. Time amp Attendance software that do not exist in Nexus 220 Department will be brought into Nexus 220 The link between the two is the Labor Name Number in the Time amp Attendance software and the Department No in Nexus 220 2 Synchronize Employees Tag holders in the Time amp Attendance software and Nexus 220 In this process the Nexus 220 Tag holders and the Time amp Attendance employees will be created in both systems Synchronize Time amp Attendance Employee to Nexus 220 Tag holder The following criteria must be met to import a Time amp Attendance employee into the Nexus 220 e The Time amp Attendance employee cannot have the same Employee Number as the INexus 220 s Tag holder Id No e The Time amp Attendance employee must be an Active employee e The Time amp Attendance employee s Management Type must be Access Control or Access Control and Time Attendance Synchronize Nexus 220 Tag holder to Time amp Attendance Employee The following criteria must be met to import a Nexus 220 Tag holder into Time amp Attendance e The Nexus 220 Tag holder s Master Type should be Access and Time e The Nexus 220 Tag holder must have the Id No defined e The Nexus 220 Tag holder s Id No cannot be the same value as any Employee Number in Time amp Attendance software e The number of employees cannot exceed the maximum of active employees allowed by the Time amp Attendance software 100 standard 250 to unlimited
59. View see the following A ee figure The IM Profile node will only be visible in the tree view after the Events Notification Module has been activated See Software Activation Guide for software activation procedure Fy Time Guardian John_Doe Seles File Edit Help E J Today MW Name v 4 setup Name Description Active i Daily Activities NJ Corporate HO Abserit IM 69 Output E4 Reports U Payrolls B a Import e Export Auto Process IM Profile SEs General Pay Code Threshold Exception Pay Class Department Employee Name NIHQ Description NJ Corporate HQ Absent IM Send absent message if not in after Active In the Name field enter a name for the IM Profile required field Enter a brief description of the IM Profile in the Description field Check Active to enable the IM Profile The Send absent message if not in after option is used to send am IM notification to a Supervisor if employees are absent or late beyond a specified time after their start time To enable this option place a check in the checkbox and enter the amount of time HH MM that will trigger the notification in the field provided Click on the Pay Code Threshold tab This tab enables you to set an IM notification based on certain Pay Code conditions 20 4 Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module IM Profile m ER Se r i i General Pay Code Threshald Exception
60. _ General DateRange Payclass Available Selected STD fJ 1sk Shift Payclass Add All Remove Remove All e Toselecta Pay Class highlight the desired Pay Class in the Available list and click on the button e To select all Pay Classes click on the button e To remove a Pay Class from the Selected list highlight the desired Pay Class in the Selected list and click on the button f F All e To remove all selected Pay Classes click on the button 7 Click on any of the Labor Level tabs These tabs allow you to select those employees that belong to particular category of a Labor Level By default all categories are selected Individual Schedule Seles enera Date Range Payclass ci hats gag Department JOBCLASS LEVEL4 Employee Available Selected Add Add All Remove All e To select a labor category highlight the desired labor category in the Available list and click on the button e To select all labor categories click on the button e To remove a labor category from the Selected list highlight the desired labor category in the Selected list and click on the button 12 14 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module F ail e To remove all selected labor categories click on the button 8 Click on the Employee tab This tab allows you to select employees By default all employees are selected Individual Schedule General I Date Range Co
61. and 30 minutes This would give the employee a daily total of 7 hours and 30 minutes Schedule 08 00 AM Sa 05 00 PM 12 32 PM 11 00 AM Total hours for the interval 4 28 Total hours for the interval 2 53 After rounding 4 30 After rounding 3 00 Example Schedule Rounding The first schedule is from 8 00 AM to 12 00 PM The four punches within the schedule calculate to 3 hours and 21 minutes of time If the Unit is setto 15 and the Point is 7 this time would be rounded to 3 hours and 15 minutes Note The minus 6 minutes will be taken away from the last interval hours in Schedule 1 The second schedule is from 1 00 PM to 5 00 PM The four punches within the schedule calculate to 3 hours and 20 minutes of time This time would be rounded to 3 hours and 15 minutes Note The minus 5 minutes will be taken away from the last interval hours in Schedule 2 This would give the employee a daily total of 6 hours and 30 minutes Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module 14 9 Schedule 1 Schedule 2 08 00 AM 7 12 00 PM 01 00 PM 777777777 05 00 PM 10 00 AM 10 32 PM 01 08 PM 03 00 PM 03 32 PM Total hours for Total hours for Total hours for Total ours for i i i the interval the interval the interval the interval 1 28 1 53 1 28 1 55 f Total hours for the Total hours for the 321 schedule 2 3 20 schedule 1 2 Total hours for Baye sae After rounding 3 1
62. and Point will enter the rounding rules This presents a real time visual display of actual time versus rounded time The following example illustrates how the Meal Rules tab from Pay Class can provide control of time utilized for meals by providing such items as e Auto meal deduction e Normal meal time e Meal rounding settings e Meal punching with grace time A Time Simulation tool has been included on the Meal Rules screen to test your settings For example hourly employee Bill J ackson is displayed in the following table using the same rounding formula of Unit 15 and Point 7 with various scenarios for meal rules For this example a normal meal time 45 minutes 3 26 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Note In the following example the Hours to work before a meal 3 00 hours and the meal window length is set to 2 00 hours with a schedule of 08 15 to 17 00 with 45 minutes for lunch So employee Bill J ackson has met the window requirements for punching Out and In for lunch of 11 15 to 13 15 This will prevent meal punches from being deducted twice because he was within the meal window With Meal Grace meal window length meal starts Schedule Meal Meal Starts Window Window Grace Time Starts Ends x dence Hoursto work before No Meal Grace meal window Schedule meal starts Meal length Meal Starts Window Window Starts Hoursto work before 3 Hours For the following example the emp
63. and clicking on the Remove button All the modules can be removed from the Selected list by clicking on the Remove All button Note For example if you move Pay periods from the Selected list to the Available list click on the button to save when someone from that Group logs in they will not be able to access the Pay periods module User Accounts To create a User account 1 Click on the a button with the Users module selected in the tree view and the User s window will appear The User s window can consist of up to 5 tabs General Password Pay Class Department and Employee 22 4 Time amp Attendance Software User Group Module sers General Password Pay Class Department Employee Name John_Smith Group Supervisor Account Settings Disabled 3 10 i 15 16 1 21 22 23 24 28 GE 30 Expires On Read Rates V Write Rates 2 Inthe General tab enter the name of the individual or account you are adding in the Name field Select the Group that this user will belong to In the Account Settings section select the following e Disabled If checked the user will be disabled Enabled is default e Expires When checked the password will expire on a given date When the date arrives a check will automatically be placed in the disabled option Read Rates When checked the user will have read only access to the Rates modules THIS MUST BE CHECKED to have access to t
64. assign default Home Labor Level Assignments for Departments to each employee from the user defined dropdown lists Only predefined Departments will appear under Home Labor Level Assignments Note This function can also be done with Global Assign from the main employee list 3 40 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Employees C ertification From the Employees screen click on the Certification tab and the following type of screen will appear ee a aix E EE ED SE wiison karl 1009 a Pe m lH SS Ia p a SE e General Personal Contact l Assignments Scheduling Labor Level Certification Wages Benefit Web Access l Available Selected ear lacc Level 1 Add All ME 3 10 4i PRE 16 17 18 23 24 25 30 31 Remove All SS SS 3 PMT 1 CHE Date Achieved nn f SOnRBEEE A Add Edit Certifications Java Developer I Name ACC Level 1 PMI 1 To s Se n PMI 2 Description Amano Access Control Level 1 CNE New I lt Delete To add a Certification click on the New button Enter in a name and description for the Certification in the Name and Description fields Click on the v button when finished To add a Certification when first entering the Add Edit Certifications screen enter in a name and description for the Certification in the Name and Description fields and then click on the but
65. authorized to from Advanced Pay Class go to the payroll export file Timecard Report Lists daily employee punches hours exceptions and from Advanced Pay Class schedules in a portrait style report format Schedule Posting Report A landscape type calendar like grid report that can be From Advanced Schedule grouped by one of the labor levels to post for the employees to see when they are scheduled to work Schedule vs Actual Report A landscape format analysis report of scheduled time with From Advanced Schedule wages versus actual hours with variance DeAccrual Balance Report Employee list showing balance of remaining yearly benefits From Benefit Time i e vacation sick time holidays etc DeAccrual History Report Employee list showing history of benefit use i e vacation From Benefit Time Sick time holidays etc Reports are generated from Report Profiles which are created in the Reports module of the Output group Report format can be either PDF or Excel Creating a Report Profile 1 Click on the Reports module of the Output group in the Tree View see figure W Time Guardian Plus John_Smith File Edit Help _ Today LY Daily Activities amp Employees a Fa Timecard h Employee Report Exceptions Report Exceptions Report for NJ Bldg 1 1 Historical Hours Re eport Historical Hours Report Hours Summary Report Hours Summary Report p Communications H Recalculate
66. be the same number as on the badge Should an employee forget their badge the PIN to be entered is the same as the employee s badge number e PIN Only If Badges are NOT used in the system then ANY number may be entered in the Badge PIN section of the Employee Setup The MTX 15 terminal can use up to 12 digits Note Please keep a record of the employee PIN Number as the software automatically masks this information when entered This number must be unique Enter the employee Pay Type Examples of both are described below e By Hour When selected a Salary employee will be awarded the number of hours entered here on each day scheduled For example if the number entered is 8 and the employee is scheduled to work from Monday through Friday then they will be awarded 8 hours for each of those days The total amount will be 40 hours for the week e By Schedule When selected a Salary employee will be awarded the number of hours defined for each scheduled day minus their mealtime For example if the employee is assigned to work from 8 00 AM to 5 00 PM with no mealtime the employee will be given 9 hours for each of those days for a total of 45 hours for the week If a 30 minute mealtime is included then the time awarded for each day would change to 8 hours and 30 minutes The total amount will be 42 30 hours for the week Information contained in the General tab can be printed out for each employee when the Employee Report is selected f
67. been created H ow to Create a Holiday 1 Click on the Holiday node within the Holiday Group in the Pay Class module from the tree view see the following figure g Time Guardian John_Smith File Edit Help 4 Today name mel S Setup Name Description E ph Company New Year s Day iNew Year s Day AA Users Martin Luther King Birthday Martin Luther King Birthday President s Day Washington President s Day Washington Birthday Memorial Day Memorial Day Flag Day Flag Day Be Daily Rules Independence Day Independence Day R Pay Class Columbus Day Columbus Day Bry Weekly Overtime Labor Day paba Day veterans Day veterans Day Thanksgiving Day Thanksgiving Day zi Range Overtime Day After Thanksaiving Day Day After Thanksuiving Day oy Holiday Group Christmas Day Christmas Day jar Good Friday paved Friday i Rosh Hashanah Rosh Hashanah H Schedule Sukkot iSukkeot HSD Locations Yom Kippur Kom Kippur Lf Daily Activities H 69 output 04 Pay Codes Sy Shifts 8 Consecutive Overtime Holiday General Setting Mame Christmas Day Description Christmas Day Group Standard Faycode Type Hours o 0800 3 Entera name for the Holiday in the Name field required field 10 2 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module 4 a E nter a description of the Holiday in the Description field Using the dropdown list select the H
68. by selecting the Weekly Overtime within the Setup Wizard Pay Class step Up to 2 levels of Weekly Overtime can be used Each level can be assigned its own threshold limit that move the hours from one Pay Code to another See the following table for an example Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 19 Weekly Hours Hours Pay Code Default Overtime From To Multiplier w e o i or a 6 Select the Reset Options for Weekly overtime after for Specific Day of Week by selecting the day of the week from the dropdown select Pay Period Day of Week Start to auto reset on every week on the pay period start day or select Pay Period to auto reset every pay on Start date 2 This is especially useful if an employee is assigned to a BLWeekly Semit Monthly or Monthly Pay Period and the Overtime rules are based on a seven day cycle starting on a specific day a This setting is most common when an employee is assigned to a Weekly Pay Policy 7 Select if Worked on Holiday is considered as overtime else any holiday dates will not be counted towards overtime based on the other overtime rules Note This selection will be disabled if you selected that your company does not pay for Holidays see Step 3 Pay Code 8 Select the Advanced Overtime Rules tab only active if Basic Daily Overtime Is checked to select advanced daily overtime rules See figure SPE Ea el om en a z General Overtime Rules Rounding Rules
69. click on the button The defined labor category will appear in the Labor References window e When you have finished click on the button to finish and return to the Schedule Rotation window 9 Click on the button to apply selected schedules and labor to the selected cells cal Note Any schedule conflicts will be flagged with error message and marked with a red cell at this time see figure Time Guardian Setup Daily Activites Output Preferences Welcome SYSD8A The current echedule gettinge are i conflict with one of More t T Schedule Rotation Name Winter MEG Schedule Desoripbon son sort winte Rolatve Start Dote 1 7 2008 p Langihin Days 4 Pattern 5 g 74 lt pa a n Apply Cancel 10 When you have finished click on the button to finish and return to the Schedule Rotation main window which lists all defined schedule rotations Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 11 Removing an Assigned Schedule Assigned schedules are removed from days in the rotation pattern by selecting the desired day and clicking on the button in the cell To delete a Schedule Rotation select a Schedule Rotation from the main list and click on the icon E diting a Schedule R otation T emplate To edit a Schedule Rotation template select the desired Schedule Rotation from the main list and click on the icon To edit a specific schedule for a day click on the icon within that cell Timecard G
70. close the open window without saving Using the Setup W izard From the Setup W izard Steps Summary screen click on the Next loj button to continue with Step1 The Wizard Help will guide you through the Wizard Steps The Setup Wizard has 9 Steps see figure however as a minimum only Steps 4 7 and 9 are required with at least 1 Pay Class 1 employee and 1 user login defined These steps will have Red X s alongside them until they are completed at which point Green checkmarks will appear Steps Summary Step 1 34 General Optional Company rule and payroll interface Step 2 w Department Optional Step 3 Ga Pay Code Optional Step 4 fs Schedule Optional Step 5 Pay Class Required Pay Period Overtime Rounding and Meal rules Step 6 s Exception Optional Use the Previous and Next navigation X Step7 4 Employee Required nieuws to nieve Step 8 Clock Optional backwards and forwards in the X Step 9 A Login Required Setup Wizard User rights login options and employee selection ENE Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 3 Amano recommends that you have the appropriate information before you begin the Setup Wizard Should you need to exit the Setup Wizard before completion your settings will be Saved Once the Setup Wizard is finished the Wizard Complete ai button will become active At this point all settings will be applied including the time synchronization betw
71. configure how much time will be deducted from the employee when an employee takes a longer period of time than they were allocated in the break a Enterin the amount of Threshold time HH MM before the action Is to be taken b Setthe conditions if the time taken for the break is both less and more than the threshold in the fields provided The choices are Allowed break Which is the amount of time the employee Is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break Amount taken Which is the amount of time the employee actually punched out for the Regular break or Coffee break Amount under or over This is the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break Nothing This is to deduct no time from the employee Allowed and taken time Which will deduct the time allocated for Regular break or Coffee break plus the time taken for Regular break or Coffee break 13 14 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module Allowed break and amount under or over Which is the amount of time the employee is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break and which is the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break 11 Click on the Add button to create a Break window and enter the following Windows Hours To Work Length From Penalty Penalty Length Paycode Apply Short Penalty 00 00 Mane Schedul 00 00 REG Schedule Start ist IN
72. d To selecta terminal highlight the desired terminal in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all terminals from the Available list click on the Add All button To remove a terminal from the Selected list highlight the desired terminal in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected terminals click on the Remove All button 10 If Import or Export is selected for the process type select the name from the dropdown list 11 Select Synchronize Access Control to run auto process of synchronization upon startup and or settings defined on the Recurrence tab 12 Click on the Recurrence tab The following is an example of the Recurrence tab window that will appear auto Process T General Settings Recurrence Daily Every 1 day s Starting C Weekly Start Time C Monthly Yearly Daily The service for the auto process can be run every day or every number of days or every number of hours Enter the following q Every Enter the number of days that the process will run For example if you want to run the process every 2 days enter 2 Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 51 b Starting Enter a start date manually in MMDDYYYY format or click on the button The Select Date dialog box will appear Select Date xi ee month RX Year 2009 5 Siesta 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 GM 2s 29 30 31 c Sta
73. desired cell in the grid that already has a schedule assigned to it Select the desired template schedule using the dropdown list or create a custom template schedule using the button Select the desired labor category and click on the button and the schedule will appear in the cell 12 18 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module Schedule I cons When an Individual Schedule is applied to an employee an indicator will appear alongside the scheduled hours in the cell Below is a list of the indicators that may appear in the cell EE Advance Schedule Advance Schedule with Pay in Advance Schedule Rotation Labor transfer exist for this row Note By putting the mouse over the icon you can see the information that the icon represents Assigning Advanced Schedules Advanced Schedules allow you to schedule an employee for the time off in the future To assign a Advanced Schedule to an individual click on the desired cell in the grid and right click once A menu will appear Scroll down the menu to Advanced Schedule A submenu will appear Select either New or Edit User Defined A individual Scheduler D lt gt 5AA M F ist Shift E NE Home Labor p Employee Fri Jul 21 Sat Jul 22 Sun Jul 23 Mon Jul 24 1 Sat 11 00 PM Sun 11 00 PM 4 un C yi Smith pe ne Cut Ctrlex Mike Alc Ctrl C et E trl ri 08 00 AM Sat 12 ay ORY j ri 05 00 PM an c Paste Ctrl y EG 09 00 EG dae
74. e Process Type Select either Stop or Next nth Stop will process the qualification rule if the qualification is met and Stop disregarding any subsequent rules Next nth will process the qualification rule if the qualification is met and move to the Next or nth Qualification Rule e Process Number Required when Next nth is setas the Process Type It designates which Qualification Rule will be processed when the qualification is met in the current rule If the qualification is met then the Next or nth number rule is processed in relation to the current rule s position and not order of appearance e Not Qualified Zone Code Select the Zone Code from the list that will be applied to the qualification e Zone Award Click on the Zone Award button and the following window will appear Time amp Attendance Software Zone Differential Module 18 9 H Zone Awards Available Selected MI Summer GT Zone Award Move Payt Add ddd all Remove ll E Fae To add a Zone Award to the Qualification select the desired Zone Award from the Available list and click on the Add button To add all the Zone Awards click on the Add All button To remove a Zone Award from a Qualification select the desired Zone Award from the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all the Zone Awards click on the Remove All button c To add more Qualification Rules repeat the previous steps To chan
75. emplate 1 Click on the Range Overtime node within the Pay Class module in the tree view see the following figure 11 20 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module A Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA File Edit Help SJ Today A S Setup Description Ei Company J MFG Overtime NJ MFG Overtime GB Users ped Paycodes GSS Shifts fae Daily Rules ie f Payclass oF Weekly Overtime 2 3 Consecutive Overtim ge Range Overtime A Holiday Group 1 Range Overtime General Settings Name Ni MFG Overtime Description NJ MFG Overtime 3 Entera name for the Range Overtime template in the Name field 4 Enter a description of the Range Overtime template in the Description field 5 Click on the Settings tab Range Overtime SEES End Date Settings Add 01 02 2006 312 12 29 2006 Remove 6 Click on the Add button to create a date range or period A row will appear with the Start and End Date fields enabled Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 11 21 Range Overtime General Settings P l Start Date End Date add p n 0102 2006 DAi2 29 2006 la n Remove Select Date F 1 3 13 i4 1E 1 20 21 22 23 zy 28 o Ale 7 Inthe Start Date field enter a start date manually in MMDDYYYY format or click on the button The Select Date dialog box will appear Select Date ES
76. enable this option click on the Consecutive Day Overtime checkbox For Level 1 select the number of consecutive days up to 7 then enter the number of hours that must be worked and assign the pay code to be awarded for each setting Consecutive Day Overtime 1 and 2 If Consecutive Day Overtime 1 is to be used for all hours worked 00 00 must be entered in the hour s field for the corresponding day and the overtime hours awarded must be assigned to the OT or OT2 pay code For Level 2 select the number of consecutive days up to 7 then enter the number of hours that must be worked and assign the pay code to be awarded for each setting Consecutive Day Overtime 1 and 2 If Consecutive Day Overtime 1 is to be used for all hours worked 00 00 must be entered in the hour s field for the corresponding day and the overtime hours awarded must be assigned to the OT or OT2 pay code 15 Select Yes to Apply Consecutive Overtime rules to enable rules Then select when to reset Weekly Overtime 16 Enter the Saturday amp Sunday hour amount to work before applying and assign to a Pay Code of OT or DT If DT is selected for Overtime Level 1 OT Level 2 will be disabled 3 22 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Rounding Rules Note If the Advanced modules are activated the Rounding Rules tab will be non accessible 1 Click on the Rounding Rules tab and the Rounding Rules screen will appear see figure This tab is used to define t
77. end The choices for End Day are Current Day 1 days after 2 days after or 3 days after 9 When you have finished configuring the template schedule click on the button to save your settings 10 Click on the button to exit without saving your settings and return to the main Individual Template screen Auto Schedules W eb The Auto schedule is used when an employee can work any one of many different schedules The schedule that is used for the employee can be based upon the employee s IN punch OUT punch or both The auto schedule uses the template schedules A template schedule is assigned to an auto schedule with its own start before and after setting and end before and after setting To create an Auto Schedule L 2 Click on the Auto Schedules menu selection from the Setup menu see figure w cg a Auto Schedules Time Guardian y Setup Daily Activities Output Preferences Welcome SYSDBA E Template Schedules W Auto Schedules N Auto Schedule M Schedules i a z pes san san End End Schedule Jn IN and OUT nah 15 00 2320 00 10 00 15 00 8 5 A Reset Password 1 rows viewing 1 rows rows 1 to 1 page 1 of 1 Click on the button and the Auto Schedule window will appear see figure 17 6 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module Aula Schedule Microsel Internet Explorer Fie Feat Were Farii Toh Help ge z x p F Samih Fy Fori E T aa i hitmi Ue 1 1
78. exist in AmanoNet Department will be brought into AmanoNet The link between the two is the Labor Name Number in the Time amp Attendance software and the Department No in AmanoNet 2 Synchronize Employees Tag holders on both the Time amp Attendance software and AmanoNet In this process AmanoNet Tag holders and TGP Employees will be created in both systems Time amp Attendance Employee to AmanoNet Tag holder The following criteria that must be met to importa Time amp Attendance employee into AmanoNet e The Time amp Attendance employee cannot have the same Employee Number value as the AmanoNet s Tag holder Id e The Time amp Attendance employee must be an Active employee e The Time amp Attendance employee s Management Type must be Access Control or Access Control and Time Attendance Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module 16 9 oe AmanoNet Tag holder to Time amp Attendance Employee The following criteria must be met to import an AmanoNet Tag holder into the Time amp Attendance software e The AmanoNet s Tag holder Type should be Access and Time e The AmanoNetTag holder must have a defined Id e The AmanoNet Tag holder s Id cannot have the same value as any Employee Number in the Time amp Attendance software e Cannot exceed the maximum of active employees allowed activated for Time amp Attendance software 100 standard with optional expansion from 250 up to unlimited
79. field 5 Enter a description of the rule in the Description field 6 Click on the Settings tab and the following settings view will appear gt Qualification Rules Paycode Filter Paycode Selection Comp Value Value Type Labor Level Filter Labor Level Selection 7 Click on the Add button to add a Qualification Rule and enter the following information Type Select one of the following options e Work Looks at all work hours for the day e All Schedule The hours worked by the employee will be compared to all shifts and the employee must qualify on all shifts to get the Zone Award e Single Schedule The hours worked by the employee will be compared to a particular shift and the employee must qualify on any of these shifts to get the Zone Award Each Single schedule has to pass the rule to get this Zone Looks at the time in the window Time amp Attendance Software Zone Differential Module 18 3 Condition Select one of the following options For Type set to All Schedule Single Schedule and Zone the options are e Work before e Work within e Work after e Work before e Work within e Work after e Punch before e Punch after e Punch before e Punch after e Schedule type For Type set to Zone the options include all the above and e Schedule within e Schedule within e Schedule start before e Schedule start before e Schedule start after e Schedule start after
80. generate any exceptions on the punches for the day Note this function is only available when Advanced Schedule Module is activated To create a Template Schedule 1 Click on the Template Schedules menu selection from the Setup menu see figure Welcome Sr SOBA 7 k E Auto Schedules Template Schedule Schedule Potation ype Start Day start End Day End Snitt Payeode t Password cod ji dayi belgia jor 00 AM Ciaran Cay PERT PMN Comorile HO Sandd MFJ Shift REG z balaire atadi AM Curren Day Ce leah Res le a cad eso p a Day oeoo Pulat 4 mi lesa ill ear Day anai BM Sine Ja Tarmip Gumeni Gay orig AM Cure Day Orion Pithart Ade me Le Lee Ll 5 ToWE VANE S POWs Powe 1 to 5 paga 1 of 1 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 5 Enter a name for the template schedule in the Name field In the Type field select either Fixed Open or Off If Open is selected Start and End Times will be disabled Assign a Pay Code to the schedule using the dropdown list in the Pay Code field Assign a Shift to the schedule using the dropdown list in the Shift field In the Start box select the Day that the schedule will start and the time of the day that the schedule is to begin The choices for Start Day are Current Day 1 days before or 1 days after AM is default for Start Time field 8 In the End box select the Day that the schedule will end and the time of the day that the schedule is to
81. if you checked REG and HOL in the Level 1 column then the hours for REG and HOL Pay Codes will be combined to reach Level 1 s threshold value Note You can select all the Pay Codes in a given column by clicking on the column heading You can also deselect any checked Pay Codes in a column by clicking on the column heading Also you can select unselect all the Pay Codes by clicking on the Check Uncheck All Icon 10 Click on the After Shift tab Outside Shift Overtime General Before Shift After Shift Level Count From To Base 00 00 02 00 Schedule tevali o200 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 11 In the Level table enter the threshold limits and assign a Pay Code to each level of overtime 12 Click on the Count tab 11 10 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module Level oun en N ww rc Peal ie i he D Dooopr000ra s L e oooooooooms OOooooooOsEI N pocoooormEE s I 13 In the Count table check the Pay Codes in each column that you want to be combined to achieve each level s threshold For example if you checked REG and HOL in the Levell column then the hours for REG and HOL Pay Codes will be combined to reach Levell s threshold value Note You can select all the Pay Codes in a given column by clicking on the column heading You can also deselect any checked Pay Codes in a c
82. links between NTFS files withi Sy Distributed Transac Coordinates transactions that span mult Sa DNS Client Resolves and caches Domain Name Syst Sy Error Reporting Ser Allows error reporting For services and a Sa Escalation Server TG Escalation Server Time Guardian ss i log messages issued by Me agement for applications t er Guardian www Firebird pase Server www firebird erforms licensing functions and Support Center to run Startup Type A Automatic Manual Automatic Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Automatic Manual Manual Automatic Escalation Server TG Start the service Started Started Device Manager Sa Storage Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management Bs Services and Applications Services z WMI Control 3 Indexing Service Description Escalation Server Time Guardian Started Escalation Server 1G Properties Local Computer Started General Log On Recovery Dependencies Started Service name Escalation Server TG Started Displayname Escalation Server TG Description Escalation Server Time Guardian Path to executable gos d i F C TimeGuardian bin wrapper exe s C TimeGuardian conf wrapper conf Manual Automatic Disabled Service status oppen Start You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service from here Startup type Start parameters
83. new Rounding Template will appear in the Main View Note If you wish to visualize the properties of a Rounding Template view the Rounding Demo by clicking on the O button on the bottom of the Rounding Templates screen The following Rounding Demo view will appear Rounding Demo Hour 5 Minute 7 Unit 15 Point 72 Actual Clicking in the dropdown boxes for Hour and Minute will set the actual time clock display while clicking in the dropdown boxes in Unit and Point will enter the rounding rules This presents a real time visual display of actual time versus rounded time 14 4 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module Grace Rounding In grace rounding a window of time is setup around the start and end times of a schedule If the IN punch falls within the window for the scheduled start time it is rounded changed for calculation to the start of the schedule If the OUT punch falls within window for the scheduled end time it is rounded changed for calculation to the end of the schedule Rounding Templates Break i Meal aAIINjOUT Ope ur Rounding General First IN Last OUT First IN Punch between 10 00 before and 10 00 after schedule round to schedule start Last OUT Punch betweer 05 00 before and 1500 after schedule round to schedule end To create a grace zone enter the desired number of hours and minutes HH MM before and after the sc
84. s with QuickBooks and select the method of synchronization from the dropdown choices of Import from QuickBooks Export to QuickBooks or Both ways bi directional 9 40 Time amp Attendance Software Output Setup Wizard Step 7 Employee Setup Do you want to import employee s information from a specific file No Yes 8 Employee Import Would you like to create employees at this time O No Sync Employee s with QuickBooks Both ways Import From QuickBooks Export to QuickBooks Both ways Step 2 The selection of Direct Integration for QuickBooks will auto create the QuickBooks Pro payroll template From the tree view select the Payrolls module and double click on the created QuickBooks Pro payroll template to define the Name Description Payroll and or Payroll ID fields or just use the default entries File Edit Help Time Guardian John Smith KBX Ei Today Iname 2 Setup i e B j Daily Activities Employees Ec Timecard P Individual Schedule pe Communications A Recalculate f Payperiods 3 61 output Name Description Payroll This payroll was automatically created during the Initial Wizard Quickbooks Pro Payrolls gor ENET ETE jj i General Date Range Breaks Pay Class Department Employee TEK p Name Quickbooks Pro Export N N Description This payroll was automatically created Auto Proces
85. schedule hours and verify that you have adequate coverage for peak times during the day This feature can only be used after you assigned Schedules to employees in the Employee Module amp Schedule Coverage Legend amp Template ry Auto fa Individual Mon 12 00 Tue 1200 Wed 12 00 Tho 12 00 Fri 12 00 Sat 12 00 Sun 12 00 Mon To create a Schedule Coverage Report 1 Click on the Schedule Coverage node within the Schedule module in the Tree View see the following figure A Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA File Edit Help name Name Description fh Company Bam 12pm x mas schedule 2007 Holiday schedule 8 Users gt Paycodes 6 Shifts B Daily Rules E g Payclass fat Schedule if Template Schedules fad Auto Schedules i 34 ele Coverage Schedule Rotation 2 Click on the isa button and the Schedule Coverage window will appear Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 7 EA Schedule Coverage DEAR General Payclass Cost Center 55 Department JOBCLASS LEVEL4 Employee Bam 1 2pm x mas schedule Description 2007 Holiday schedule Max of employee s 30 ail Employee interval R 2 Day interval 08 00 Coverage interval 08 00 Show time Range Day of week Specific of day s FY From Mon Individual Schedule Only Start 12 7 2007 E End 122572007 3 Entera name for the Coverage Schedule report in the
86. see the following figure E Time Guardian John_Smith BR Fie Edit Help Ea Today 2 Setup Daily Activities Employees E Timecard EP Individual Schedule fase Communications Payroll cally created during the Initial Wizard Quickbooks Pro E Recalculate E Payperiods 5 69 output amp Reports B IM Profile Import Export To Auto Process 2 To create a new Payroll Profile click on the lad button and the following Payrolls Profile window will appear Payrolls General Date Range Breaks il Pay Class Department Employee Name Quickbooks Pro Description This payroll was automatically created during the Initial Wizard Payroll Quickbooks Pro Payroll ID Payroll Number 3 Inthe Name field enter a name for the payroll profile required field This field automatically filled out during setup wizard with QuickBooks Pro selection 9 16 Time amp Attendance Software Output 4 Enter a brief description of the payroll profile in the Description field This field automatically filled out during setup wizard with QuickBooks Pro selection In the Payroll field select the type of Payroll Export file you want to create The choices are ADP DOS ADP PC Payroll for Windows CBS Payroll Ceridian Power Pay EasyPay Excel Gevity HR PayChex Paylink PayChex Preview PayDay PayWeb PeachTree Win and QuickBooks Pro Note The Payroll profile with name des
87. started for Time Guardian and Time Guardian Plus Time Guardian Pro automatically has this service configured to start To configure and or start the Escalation Server service Step 1 Open Computer Management and select Services and Applications Computer Management PBR m Fie Action wiew Window Help toe E 2 m Computer Management Local Name Type Description E Bh System Tools fy Services Starts stops and configures Windows services ES Gal Event Viewer amp WMI Control Extension Snap in Configures and controls the Windows Management Instrumentation WwW oe shared Folders Indexing Service Extension Snap in Provides fast and flexible searching on file contents and properties 87 Local Users and Groups gi Performance Logs and Alerts a Device Manager Siy Storage E Removable Storage gt Disk Defragmenter ee Disk Management a eegoervices and Applications Services z WMI Conetol 3 Indexing Service Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module 20 1 Step 2 Click on Services and the following type of Service screen which lists currently installed services will appear DER la m Computer Management E Fie Action view Window Help vad A ee 2 r it i Computer Management Local ms System Tools E Event viewer Shared Folders Local Users and Groups a Performance Logs and Ah Escalation Server TG Name Description Status S
88. the button and the following Labor References window will appear nay he Setup Daily Activities Output Preferences Welcome SYSDBA Labor References Cost Center SS 3 CC3 Department 1 Default JOBCLASS 1 Default LEVEL4 1 Default LEVELS LEVEL6 cant Serene Department LEVEL4 LEVELS LEVELS ea be 1 Default Default 1 Default 1 Default ccs Defa sult e JOBCLASS eae r Category fo Sta a rd Rate for MFG NJ 1 Defa ult 1 Defa ult gt G HE 1 Default 1 Default i 1 Default 3 Default 1 Default cc2 4 Department Labor Category 4 6 JOBCLASS Labor Category 6 0 Standard Rate for MFG NJ Ro Default 1 Default os 4 D Depa rtment Labor Category 4 6 JOBCLASS L Labor Category 6 b _1i Defa ult Sh Defa ult 1 Defau isaks Department Labor Category 4 i Defa ult z Defa ult Defa ult 1 4 Department Labor Category 4 6 JOBCLASS Labor Category 6 0 Standard Rate for MFG na 1 Default 1 Default j4 Department Labor Category 4 i Default z Defa ult Ei Defa ult 1 Default j Department Labor Category lt 4 7 JOBCLASS Labor r Category 7 E Standar rd Rate for MFG NJ f iaa Defa sult i 4 Department La bor Ca ategory 4 i Defa ult 0 Sta nda rd Rate for MFG N i Default 1 wiw fw fw fr fo Hh i en ed V i Bay AMANO d To define a labor category select a subcategory from each of the dropdown lists and
89. the desired labor level from the dropdown list This action is optional 3 Click in the hour s column to enter the value for Hours or click in the Dollars column to enter value for dollars Bonus Pay Code only This action must be done before you can enter comments Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration 6 5 4 f desired enter a information in the Comments Reason field Step 3 must be completed for this field to be open for entry Note Use the Add Row button to insert a row in the Timecard grid at the appropriate location for an adjustment such as using more than one Pay Code i e OT for overtime E hours Press the Delete Row button to remove a row For example Bill J ackson worked 10 hours on Monday His Pay Class awards Daily Overtime after he has worked 8 hours and his boss scheduled him to work 10 hours on Monday to finish a rush project He used the adjustments feature to add 2 REG hours and give him a total of 12 hours for a pre calculation after adjustment of REG 8 and OT 4 Note the Daily Overtime rule is utilized because adjustments are made to precalculated hours Day Hours Daily Overtime Overrides After Worked After 8 Hours Hours Adjustment Mon 10 Hours REG 8 Add 2 hours regular REG 8 OT 2 OT 4 Illustration of Bill ackson timecard before adjustment Fe Timecard 1002 Jackson Bill F Z E FF 1002 Jackson Bil z A 5723709 8 29709 z l
90. the dropdown list The choices are all non work hours type Pay Codes SCK VAC PER HOL JURY and BRV To adjust the benefit time for an employee click on the Add button Setup gt Company gt Settings Tracking Type must be set to DeAccruals for Add to be enabled Click on the calendar icon to enter the date Click in the Amount field and enter the amount To reset the available amount to the entered value check the Reset box The benefit balance for an employee will appear under the Benefit Balance column if the Tracking Type has been previously set to DeAccruals or Import Balance Note This function can also be done with Global Assign I from the main employee list 21 2 Time amp Attendance Software Benefit Time Module Chapter 22 User Group Module User Group M odule Introduction This optional module allows the creation of user groups that can define rights Read Write Add and Delete for user selected Modules For example a Payroll Supervisor Group could be the only group allowed to see Wages The Time amp Attendance software sections affected and or features added from the activation of this module include Software Feature Software Configuration Location Setup Wizard Main Application Tree view Main Application Tree View User creation View Group creation view General Modules Name Administrator 3 Description Administrators can access any module in the system Note This
91. the sort criteria in the report is accomplished by selecting a row and using the up or down arrow buttons to move the row to the desired position 22 Click on the Exception tab See the following illustration for an example TIES General Date Range Title Page Footer Sort SAI ais Depart Employee Exception Paycode Available Selected Missing Punch Remove Short Meal UNSCH Not Scheduled Remove All Minute Requirement 00 00 e Toadd an Exception to the report highlight the desired Exception in the Available list and click on the Add button e To add all Exceptions to the report click on the Add All button e To remove an Exception from the report highlight the desired Exception in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e Toremove all selected Exceptions click on the Remove All button e To define a Minute Requirement for a selected Exception click on the Minute Requirement field and enter a time in HH MM format 23 Click on the Pay Codes tab The Pay Code TT for triple time will appear if advanced module is activated See the following illustration for an example amp Reports C Add All Remove BONUS Remove All JURY BRY e Toadda Pay Code to the report highlight the desired Pay Code in the Available list and click on the Add button e To add all Pay Codes to the report click on the Add All button e Toremove a Pay Code from the report highlight t
92. the steps involved in setting up the Nexus 220 Access Control System during Employee Setup with the Setup Wizard see Step 7 Employee Setup Wizard for additional Wizard information Employees Setup for Nexus220 The Access Control Module must be activated for the Nexus 220 tab not to be grayed out Once this module is activated Nexus 220 tab will be active during employees Step 7 Wizard Setup if you selected to integrate the Nexus 220 for Access Control from the General tab of the Setup Wizard When Nexus 220 Access Control software is connected to an AC or EC controller 4 tags are available see the following figure for an example with 4 Tags Tag1 can be used to assign access levels sites and tag options to the badge or tag number entered in the General tab Tag2 thru Tag4 can be used to add and configure additional tag s or badge s for the employee to use Click on the Nexus 220 tab and the following type of screen will appear Ea a mm m la General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Wages Nexus 220 PIN 5 numbers 1035 N Tag 2 Tag 3 Tag 4 Bodau el For Nexus 220 Access Control use Enter PIN The 5 digit number that an employee may have to enter at an access control device Click on Tag 1 through Tag 4 and the following type of screen will appear Note For Tag 1 the Badge number Tag Code is disabled as itis Read only but It is enabled in the other tags It will be Read only and the sa
93. the week The assigned template or auto schedule will appear in the schedule list with a under the chosen day 5 When you have finished configuring the schedule click on the button to save your settings and return back to the main Schedules view 6 Click onthe button to exit without saving your settings and return to the main Schedules screen showing a list of created schedules Note The Time amp Attendance software checks for a schedule in the following order 1 Schedule Override 2 Template Schedule 3 Auto Schedule Note Ifa schedule does not meet the schedule assignment rules set in the Pay Class of the employee the employee will be unscheduled for this shift 17 8 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module Schedule R otation W eb A Schedule Rotation is used to setup repeating schedule patterns For example some employees work a schedule with a 7 day rotation which consists of 4 days on and 3 days off Rotating schedules are assigned to employees in the Assignments tab of the Employees module To create a Rotating Schedule Template 1 Click on the Schedule Rotation menu selection from the Setup menu see figure fn gt A deh ip Page Tools A Bare D Daily Activities Ap Preferences Welcome SYSDBA 2 Auto Scheaules Schedule Rotation Schedules 5on zoff weekly schedule for Bam Spm 12 4 2006 Is Description __ Relative Start Date Length In Days aa Reset
94. they are scheduled to work A landscape format analysis report of scheduled time with PEES wages versus actual hours with variance Reports are generated from Report Profiles which are created in the Reports module of the Output group The Report format can be PDF or Excel Creating a Report Profile 1 Click on the Reports node of the Output module in the Tree View Click on the button and the Reports window General tab will appear In the Name field enter a name for the report required field E nter in a brief description of the report in the Description field U A W N In the Report field select the type of report you want to create The choices will have added Schedule Posting Report and Schedule vs Actual R eport 6 For Schedule Posting Report Check the following options to include them on the report e Print advance schedules e Advance schedules override regular schedules e Print employee phone number 7 For Schedule vs Actual Report Check the following options to include them on the report e Report type of Summary or Detail e Punch time of Actual Punches and Rounded Punches 8 Continue to follow the procedure as outlined in Reports in the output section Shifts All setup rules will fall into 3 categories shift rules daily rules or multiple day rules Shift rules apply to a given shift or schedule They include punch rounding shift rounding punch pair rounding meals exceptions etc These rules are assigned
95. this example the user wanted to add Vacation and Sick benefit time to the employee s The user wanted not to Override the existing settings but add instead When the Global Apply Wizard is completed all these settings will be applied to all the employee s selected on the list W eb Access Global Apply If selected the Web Access window for the Global Apply Wizard see the following figure will be the 8 to appear This corresponds to the Web Access tab found on the Employees screen E Global Apply Web Access Assign Password Override Password Confirm Password Available Modules Module Override Punch Previous Punch Time Sheet Adjustments Reset Password Schedule Posting Report Note This global apply function will only be available when Web Interface module is activated From this window the user can choose to apply Web Access settings by clicking on the box next to the selection If no checkmark is placed in the box then the selection will not be applied to the employee s In the example figure above the user is choosing to override the employee s password with the specified setting and to grant the Punch Previous Punch and Reset Password privilege to the employee s The Override setting for the password determines if employees that already have a password are affected If selected then the password is changed but if not selected then only the employees that do not have passwords
96. to the shift in the Shifts module see the following figure Daily rules apply to a day and may cover multiple shifts and schedules Daily rules are created in the Daily Rules module Multiple day rules apply to a period that extends greater than one day They include weekly overtime weekly rounding Pay period rounding etc Multiple day rules are created in the Pay Class module Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 29 A Shift is the set of rules for a given shift or schedule A Shift consists of the following elements e Rounding Template Determines how an employee s punches will be rounded e Exceptions Codes used to track employee s time deviations from assigned schedules Note Meal Penalty has been added to provide feature to penalize a company when an employee does not take lunch break or takes the lunch break late In this instance penalty hours are generated in the Pay Code plus the MPNT exception code will be generated e Meal Templates Defines employee breaks and meal breaks e Shift Overtime Defines the overtime rules for the schedule Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA File Edit Help hi Name a E M x cn i Setup Name Description gh Company Son Zoff 7am 4pm Monday Friday standard NJ shift dB Users Holiday Shift Holiday shift na NJ Corporate HQ Standard NJ Corporate HQ Standard MFG Shift shift shift G a Today Ql Paycodes 2 53 Sallis P R h ding Templ
97. will be active if you selected to integrate Access Control and selected AmanoNet during the setup on the General tab from the Setup Wizard When AmanoNet Access Control software is connected to an AC or EC controller 4 tags are available while 8 tags or 10 tags will appear when AmanoNet Is connected to an EC2 controller see the following figure for an example with 4 Tags Tagl can be used to assign access levels sites and tag options to the badge or tag number entered in the General tab Tag2 thru Tag8 can be used to add and configure additional tag s or badge s for the employee to use Click on the AmanoNet tab and the following type of screen will appear Stuge BAT Eag sce ster keyur A General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Wages AmanoNet PIN 5S numbers Employee Type Employee Hosted By Tags Tag 1 Tag2 Tag 4 TPE For AmanoNet Access Control use 1 Enter PIN The 5 digit number that an employee may have to enter at an access control device 2 Select the site from the dropdown list to assign relevant site number that the employee will have access to Select employee type from the dropdown list choices of Employee or Visitor 4 Click on Tag 1 through Tag 4 and the following type of screen will appear TAG Code Tag Type Standar 125kHz2 Tag Group 1 None Group 2 None Group 3 None Start Date 0 E End Date 0 End
98. will not be visible in the tree view located under Daily Rules until the optional Zone Differentials Module is activated Zone Differentials are a way to increase an employee s pay for working during certain times or Zones of the day Zone Differentials consist of Zone Codes Qualification Rules and Zone Awards The Zone Differential module is located within the Daily Rules module in the Tree View Zone Differentials are assigned to a Daily Rule Zone Differentials can be initially filtered in ascending order by using a field with a dropdown list located on the top of the zone differential window see the following figure The choices in this list are Name or Description Time amp Attendance Software Zone Differential Module 18 1 Additional filtering in ascending order can be accomplished by entering characters in a case sensitive field located to the right of the dropdown list see above illustration Click in the column headings anywhere to further sort both columns Each click toggles between ascending and descending order a Time Guardian John Doe File Edit Help Today SQ Setup Description ph Company NJ Summer Work Schedule 48 Users Zone3 NJ Summer Work Schedule He Groups Pay Codes Shifts G bf Daily Rules i Daily Overtime Mg Period Overtime Zone Differential Zone Codes Qualification Rules g Zone Award f Pay Class Zone C odes The Zone Code is used to name or re
99. 09 sid Forward 4 Day s C Backward E Day s e Inthe Date Selection field select the date range for the report The choices are Today Y esterday Last Open Period Previous Open Period Current Week Previous Week Current Month Previous Month Last 2 Weeks Date Range Current Pay period and Previous Pay period Note When Current Pay period and Previous Pay period are selected the first Pay Class in the Selected List on the Pay Class tab will be used as the date range for the report e If Date Range was chosen as the Date Selection you must enter the From Date and Until Date using the Calendar icon You also have the option of going forward or backward as many days weeks months or years from the From Date using the Forward and Backward options e Click in the Excludes Today box to exclude today from preference marking Click on the button when finished Employees that have the Exceptions selected in the Date Range selected will be highlighted in yellow The following is an example of an employee timecard with exceptions flagged in yellow W Time Guardian Plus SYSDBA File Edit Help El Today fF Daily Activities Employees imecard 6 2 Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration Punches Tab From the Timecard module double click on an employee or highlight an employee on the list and click on the Timecard icon to view the Timecard grid screen with the Punches tab as show
100. 15 Click on the Next button to start the InstallShield for QuickBooks FC or Cancel if you are not using QuickBooks payroll software i QBFC 8 0 InstallShield Wizard an Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for QBFC 8 0 The InstallShield R Wizard will allow you to modify repair or remove QBFC 8 0 To continue click Next 16 Click on the Finish button to complete installing the QuickBooks InstallS hield Wizard for QBFC 2 6 Time amp Attendance Software Installation i QBFC 8 0 InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed QBFC 8 0 Click Finish to exit the wizard 17 Next click on the Install button to begin installing the QuickBooks Remote Data Sharing Client or Cancel if you are not using QuickBooks payroll software i QuickBooks Remote Data Sharing Client InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation IF you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard 18 Click on the Next button to start the InstallShield Wizard for QuickBooks Remote Data Sharing Client and execute the Data Share Client utility or Cancel if you are not using QuickBooks payroll software is QuickBooks Remote Data Sharing Client InstallShield Wizard R Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for QuickBooks Remote Data Sharing
101. 2 To generate a Schedule Coverage report select a profile from the list in the Table View and click on the d button The report will be generated on screen 12 10 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module amp Schedule Coverage Legend G Template Auto B Individual Mon 12 00 Tue 12 00 Wed 12 00 Thu 12 00 Fri 12 00 Sat 12 00 Sun 12 00 Mon Page Setup Letter Automatically Select be Margins inches Left fi Right fi Top fi Bottom fi The Coverage Report will print to your system s default printer To change the printer click on the Printer button A print dialog similar to the following will appear Printer Name ACIHG CRicoh Sales Properties Status Error 8 documents waiting Type RICOH Aficio MP C2500 PCL 6 Where NJ Sales Comment Ricoh C2500 PCL6 I Print to file Print range Copies e All Number of copies f 4i C Pages from f to 9999 C Cancel Make your selection and click OK to print the Coverage Report To close the report on the button Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 11 Individual Schedule The individual schedule is a schedule that an employee has for a particular date For example employee number 1 will have schedule setup for 08 00 am to 05 00 pm on 06 25 06 This employee may have a different schedule on another date The schedule might be from 09 00 am to 6 00 pm on 6 26 03 The indivi
102. 5 the day 6 30 Ser rounding s Break M eal Rounding Break Meal is used on punches that are designated as break or meal punches as in the Meal Templates module within the Shift module Rounding Templates General Hour Rounding Break Meal Hour Rounding Punch Rounding Unit D 2 Break OUT 15 4 Break IN Meal OUT A e A v A x Meal IN You must select either Hour or Punch Rounding for the break or meal Hour Rounding will round the total time taken and Punch Rounding will round the punches to the unit If Hour Rounding is selected you must set the Unit and Point for the entire Break and Lunch Meal If Punch Rounding is selected you must set the Unit and Point for the Break OUT Break IN Lunch Meal OUT and Lunch Meal IN punches 14 10 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module These punches are not assigned to either a These punches are break or lunch consider break Therefore are consider punches by the just IN OUT punches software 05 00 P M Schedule OC 00 AM en ee ee eee 08 10 AM 11 02 AM 12 08 PM 10 52 AM 11 07 AM 11 22 AM 11 37 AM 11 52 AM 12 07 PM 10 45 AM 11 00 AM 11 15 AM 11 30 AM 11 45 AM 12 00 PM 12 15 PM 03 09 PM 04 10 PM 04 10 PM 02 45 PM 03 00 PM 03 15 PM 03 30 PM 03 45 PM 04 00 PM 04 15 PM lt Indicates what Unit the punch rounds to In the exam
103. 6 6 CC6 The items assigned to the Cost Rate Order in the General tab of the Rate Setup window will appear in the Combined Cost Rates window Using the dropdown lists provided select the A or the Labor Level subcategory you wish to track To save your changes click on the button To add a rate based on a Rate Template check the Use Rate Template option and select a Rate Template using the dropdown list in the Rate field as illustrated in the following example General Combined Cost Rates DER OS Rate Template Employee 1001 Ryan Robert Cost Center 55 3 CC3 Department 4 Department Labor Category 4 JOBCLASS 1 Default LEVEL4 l lt Default r Rate Standard Rate Standard Rate If you do not wish to use a Rate Template click on the Add button A row will appear in the Rates box as shown in the following example 15 8 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module Combined Cost Rates ER General Employee 1001 Ryan Robert v Cost Center 55 3 CC3 v Department i4 Department Labor Category 4 v JOBCLASS 1 Default v LEVEL4 1 Default 10 2 2006 5 Click on the button in the Date field to enter the effective date for the rate will be in effect When you have finished click on the button to save your settings and return to the Rate Template window A Combined Cost Gates General _ Use
104. 6 Timecard Administration sssssssssussnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 6 1 TOMA SIC AT MOGUC rssi te av tha gerbe A E EO TAEAE Ea 6 1 ROCKOS a TE 6 10 Adding Editing and Deleting Employee PUNCHES ccccceececeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesneseraeeersnesenaes 6 10 Adding Editing and Deleting Employee Tips ccccccsescesseerseeerseseeeesserseeeesessesaaeetssersess 6 11 Overtime Authorization cccccceeecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeaeeeesaeeetaeesesaeeeeanesesaeeeraeeteas 6 11 RuUtnonziNo Payrol EXODO essene E EENE EE E E ENE O AE EAA 6 12 Global TimMecard BE GUE pe sressincer nncsananeonte n s a E EE ERT ETET E 6 12 Chapter 7 Communications sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 7 1 communications OCU G aia cee icnmnnnatiwertinminnonstinich evens suadninciavanioiaincainamunreunetunaanonantemintiai 7 1 Chapter 6 Recalculate innit 8 1 PC aC UNS IO GUNG aictaaercavereauannitasnsute aca E E E E sane ais 8 1 Time amp Attendance Software Table of Contents i Table of Contents Chapter 9 OUUTE Group iittntitinic aa EEEa 9 1 REDO MOGU ar A T indore nnereoe nitinee euerereuebtumeca anata 9 1 Payrol MOGUC isere A E EEE EEE E E 9 16 Generating the Payroll File esssssesssesssessennrennrennrenrnnnrnsnrnsrrnsrrnsnnnsrnnsnrnsnnnsnnnsnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 9 33 OUICKBOOKS Manual INtegra tOn sicisivivsinssevseisisivenie
105. 8 29 E nter the following a Day Enter the day of the month b Month s Enter the number of months that the process will repeat Start Date Enter a start date manually in MMDDYYYY format or click on the button The Select Date dialog box will appear d Start Time Enter the time of day HH MM that you want the process to run Y early The process can be set to run once every year on the date specified i i ox General Settings Recurrence C Daly Every January r 1 C Weekly Start Time an C Monthly Yearly Enter the following a Every Select the desired Month from the dropdown list and enter in the day of the month in the field provided b Start Time Enter the time of day HH MM that you want the process to run Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 53 This page intentionally left blank 9 54 Time amp Attendance Software Output Chapter 10 Advanced Pay Class Module Introduction to Advanced Pay Class M odule Pay Class contains rules that affect more than one day of the week The activation of the Advanced Pay Class Module provides the user with additional uncommon rules The sections of the Time amp Attendance Software affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Pay Class tree view general tab show Custom Pay Period Shift Auto Punch Out Day Change Override Shift Length and or Maximum Number of punches e Company setu
106. 9 If Shift Requirement is AND Punches P 1 through P 6 qualify OR Punches P1 through P4 qualify because of shift length 11 Click on the Holiday tab Payc lass EBR General Day Change Schedule Rounding Overtime Definition Overtime Execution Overtime Authorization Holiday Benefit Execution Available Selected New Year s Day 1169 Wizard New Year s Day A 1173 Wizard Martin Luther King Birtk 11175 Wizard President s Day Washingt 7 Wigard Memorisz ay Add all 1179 Wizard Flag Day 1183 Wizard Independence Day Remove 1187 Wizard Columbus Day eterans 1189 Wizard Labor Day Thanksgiving Day 1191 Wizard Veterans Day Day After Thanksgiving Day 11195 Wizard Thanksgiving Day s Christmas Day x gi L gt a To add a Holiday to the Pay Class highlight the desired Holiday in the Available list and click on the Add button To add all Holidays to the Pay Class click on the Add All button To remove a Holiday from the Pay Class highlight the desired Holiday in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected Holidays click on the Remove All button ie Click on the Calendar Ka icon to display a Calendar of Holidays From the Calendar of Holidays click on the icon too printa Holiday calendar 12 Click on Benefit Execution tab This tab determines the order in which benefits will be calculated Payclass E 5 K General Day Chang
107. A1120 iif NUCOA1 120s iif NUCOA_US iif My Recent Documents 9 nuitems iif My Documents NUUCOS IIF UCO4 TIF My Computer File name Fishmarket Paproll IIF Save as type My Network Time amp Attendance Software Output IIF Files 1IF J feed Hep x 9 35 Step 4 Click Save button and if successful a message will appear Your data has been exported successfully After the file has been saved open the file using Notepad see figure Information from this file will be used to create the export file from the Amano Time amp Attendance software E Fishmarket payroll nf Notepad DBR Fie Edit Format view Help TIMERHDR VER REL COMPANY NAME IMPORTEDBEFORE FROMTIMER COMPANYCREATETIME Q Gi ann Test ry fd 12 3 B2 PROD VER REL IIFVER DATE TIME ACCNTNT SPONSE TIRE HD GutecBenks Pro FOF windows version 6 0D Release RGP 1 2008 04 29 1209490160 0 BEENIM TIMESTAMP HIDDEN DELCOUNT REFNUM TIMESTAMP BADDRIL BADDR2 BADDRS BADDR4A BADDR5S SADDRIL SADDR2 SADDR3 PHONEL PHONE2 FAXNUM EMAIL CONTL CONT2 CTYPE TERMS TAXABLE LIMIT REP TAXITEM SALUTATION COMPANY NAME FIRSTNAME MIDINIT LASTNAME JOBSTATUS JOBSTART JOBPROJEND JOBEND HIDDEN DELCOUNT REFNUM TIMESTAMP ADDRL ADDR2 ADDRS ADDR4 ADDR5 VTYPE CONTL PHONE2 FAXNUM EMAIL TAXID LIMIT TERMS SALUTATION COMPANY NAME MIDINIT LASTNAME 1099 HIDDEN DELCOUNT REFNUM TIMESTAMP FIRSTNAME MIDINIT LASTNAME SALUTATION HIDDEN DELCOUNT EMP
108. AMANO Time amp Attendance Software Installation and User Guide Thank you For purchasing another fine product from Amano Cincinnati Inc This User Guide covers the following Amano Time amp Attendance software e Time Guardian v5 0 and higher e Time Guardian Plus v2 0 and higher e Time Guardian Pro v4 0 and higher Proprietary Notice This document contains proprietary information and such information may not be reproduced in whole or in part without written permission from Amano Cincinnati Inc 140 Harrison Avenue Roseland New J ersey 07068 1239 Amano Cincinnati Inc reserves the right to make equipment changes and improvements that may not be reflected in this document Portions of this document may have been updated to include the latest software hardware or firmware version if applicable We recommend that this document be read in its entirety before any attempt is made to operate the equipment For more information about Amano s complete line of products visit our web site at www amano com time Licenses and Trademarks Amano and Time Guardian are registered trademarks of Amano Cincinnati Inc Adobe Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated InstallAnywhere and InstallShield are registered trademarks of Acresso Software Microsoft SQL Server Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows 7 are trademarks or registered trademarks of Micros
109. AT bapa eau e Ti es RG Hi Setup Daily Activities Dutput Preferences Wiel tir STSOBA Auto Schedule Ane Anio San Soi ype GesedendN and OUT punch Template Schedule Standard donat felore Schedule Start 103 Before Sehodule Cni 60 30 After Schedule Start 1030 after Sehwdale ena of 30 Apply Cancel AMANO Amani Gimcmnail ing 140 Harneon Ave Roseland Mf CT OET1 740 G0 52 7559 Copyrigh 2006 Amapa Gincana Inc All nghi resered 3 Entera name for the auto schedule in the Name field Suggest typing auto in the beginning of the name to indicate that it is an auto schedule 4 Select the punch that the schedule will be based on e Based on IN Punch If selected only the Schedule Start Before and After times need to be entered e Based on OUT Punch If selected only the Schedule End Before and After times need to be entered e Based on IN and OUT Punch If selected both the Before and After Schedule Start and End times have to be assigned 5 Assign a template schedule using the dropdown list in the Template Schedule field 6 When you have finished configuring the template schedule click on the button to save your settings 7 Click on the button to exit without saving your settings and return to the main Auto Schedule screen Creating A Schedule W eb When creating a schedule the user defines schedules that are made up of template schedules and auto schedules Together these schedule
110. Attendance box is not selected the Absence flag will not be removed even though hours have been added for that day The Pay Codes you select during this setup will be displayed in the Hours Grid of the Main View You must also decide whether hours assigned to a Pay Code will count towards daily attendance by checking the box This is important if you choose to track the Absences or Exceptions which will be set up in Step 6 Note The BONUS Pay Code for Hours type cannot count towards Split Hours Attendance and Overtime Overtime Overtime is the time an employee works that extends beyond a certain level of time set by the company policy Daily overtime is based on hours worked and is a way of rewarding the employee for working more hours than a set hour value in one day The hours that exceed the set hour value are normally paid at a higher wage or rate If the Counts Towards Overtime box is not selected then hours assigned to that Pay Code will not be counted towards the Overtime qualification If the Counts Towards Overtime box is selected then those hours will be included when processing an employee s Overtime qualification by checking the box Overtime setup is defined during Step 4 Pay Class Setup Also the Pay Codes you select during Step 4 Pay Class Setup will be displayed in the Timecard Grid Note The SCK VAC PER HOL JURY and or BRV Pay Codes for Hours type can count towards attendance and
111. Attendance system The Wizard will automatically open up to the Welcome screen until it is completed Step 2 Department Setup Wizard Optional Wizard Setup Step g Setup Wizard Step 2 Department Setup Would you like to setup Departments Department _ Would you like to setup Departments All employees are assigned to No Department as the default setting If you wish to create Departments select Yes and click on the Department button The Labor Names Department screen see figure will appear Labor Names Department El Ge oo m m 0 0 o z General Name Default Number fi Maximum of 4 digits For MTX 15 terminal Description pefault Create a new Department and enter the required unique number yellow field and Department name yellow field You can also enter a description if desired Although departments are not used in the calculation of hours they can be used to filter the employees displayed in the Employee List Box on the Main View This information will also be displayed in the Department Report If no departments are created this report will be disabled After completing the Department information entry for Step 2 Department Setup click on the Next lial button to advance to Step 3 Pay Code Setup 3 8 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Step 3 Pay Code Setup Wizard O ptional Wizard Setup Step EI Setup Wizard Step 3 Pay Code Setup Configure your company Pay Co
112. Bill Hollay 3 1209483706 Bill eee N EMP Frank Mateo 1 1207923353 Frank ateo Mr N 0 OTHERNAME MAME REFNUM TIMESTAMP BADDR1L BADDR2 BADDR3 Sree BADDRS PHONEL PHONE FAXNUM EMAIL CONTL SALUTATION COMPANY NAME FIRSTNAME MIBDINIT LASTNAME HIDDEN DELCOUNT Step 1 From the tree view in the Time amp Attendance software select the Payrolls module and double click on the created QuickBooks Pro payroll profile to define the Name Description Payroll and or Payroll ID fields or just use the default QuickBooks entries If necessary browse to define the Output Path for the iif file DER Time Guardian John_Smith File Edit Help El Today Name v H Setup Name Description Payroll Daily Activities Quickbooks Pro This payroll was automatically created during the Initial Wizard Quickbooks Pro Employees Ec Timecard fg Individual Schedule fase Communications E Recalculate f Payperiods G9 output rye Reports 8 i Payrolls General Date Range Breaks Pay Class Department Employee Name Quickbooks Pr Pro Description this payroll was automatically created during the Initial Wizard B IM Profile a Import A Export E gt Auto Process Payroll Quickbooks Pro v Payroll ID Payroll Number v Output Path le TimeGuardian output payrallf Quickbooks i T Specific Payroll Settings f Step 2 In the Payroll ID field
113. C VAC Dollars corresponds to monetary amounts given to an employee Bonus Tip Select the Hours Type Non worked SIC VAC etc or Worked REG OT In the Cost Multiplier field enter in the cost multiplier for the Pay Code For example TT 3 0 in the example shown above In the Billable Multiplier field enter in the billable multiplier for the Pay Code For example TT 1 0 in the example shown above For example this field could be used to markup the cost of labor charges that are billable for rendered services Check Split Hours if you want the Pay Code to be used for Split Hours Split hours allow the system to move hours from one Pay Code to another Check Counts Towards Attendance if you want the Pay Code to override the Absence exception or not 10 12 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module Chapter 11 Advanced Overtime Module Advanced Overtime M odule I ntroduction Overtime is the time an employee works that extends beyond a certain amount of time that is set by the Administrator of the Time amp Attendance software Daily overtime is based on hours worked and Is a way of awarding the employee for working more hours than a set hour value in a day The hours that exceed the set hour value are paid ata high wage The sections of the Time amp Attendance Software affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Advanced Pay Class Overtime Definition Custom over
114. Client The InstallShield R Wizard will install QuickBooks Remote Data Sharing Client on your computer To continue click Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Time Guardian wd Executing QuickBooks Remote Data Share Client utility LRLAABABRABRABRARAAALA Time amp Attendance Software Installation 2 7 19 Click on the Done button to finish the initial Time amp Attendance software installation The system will briefly prompt Please wait Time Guardian is being configured for your system SEE Install Complete SS Time Guardian TA Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Set A Choose Install Folder Press Done to quit the installer 4 Get User Input Choose Database Option Microsoft SQL information f2 Choose the Time Guardi 2 Pre Installation Summary Choo insta Congratulations Time Guardian has been successfully installed to CATime Guardian Prevous JE 20 The Amano Software Activation ASA screen will appear after the initial software installation see Figure Enter the 9 digit Serial Number supplied on the Amano software CD and click on the Activate button Upon successful activation the dialog Your Software has been activated Proceed to product registration dialog will appear skip to register However if you choose not to activate the software by canceling the ASA procedure the following error message
115. Configuring the IM Client First Time Setup 1 Select IM Client de from the Start Menu or your Desktop from the Time Guardian folder and the following screen will appear Profile Editor Profile Editor Profile Name Time Guardian Escalation Server Set As Default i Account l Options GnuPG K Prow i Username woarikh Save Password v Password eocece Resource tgpro Server 192 168 3197 Create Account a Cancel JRE 2 Enter in the Username and Password you wish to login as Click Save Password if you want to save the Password on the computer In the Server field enter the IP Address of the IM Server 4 Click Save Restart the IM Client and login Editing an IM Profile 1 Select IM Client amp from the Start Menu or your Desktop 20 10 Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module 2 Click on the T button in the lower left hand corner and select Profile Edit Account from the menu soother EBR Blank Message Join Group Chat Profile Switch Profile Options b EditAccount 7 Help H Edit information 3 The Profile Editor screen will appear Profile Editor Profile Editor Profile Name Time Guardian Escalation Server Set As Default i Account Options GnuPG Prow Username lvparikh Save Password j Password 000000 Resource ltgpro Serv
116. DO Doo ooo 8 On the Count table check the Pay Codes in each column that you want to be combined to achieve each level s threshold For example if you checked REG and HOL in the Levell column then the hours for REG and HOL Pay Codes will be combined to reach Levell1 s threshold value Note The 4 buttons at the top right of the Level tab allow you to Select or De select all copy cut and paste the Overtime Pay Codes into different days or holidays The Period Overtime Period Overtime is a method of awarding an employee for working more hours than a set hour value in a given period of time Multiple periods can be set in a given day Each period begins with an IN punch and expires the number of hours set from that punch The setup for this overtime is similar to that of Daily Overtime The levels and counts can be setup for each day of the week Default any day not explicitly set and Holidays The day for which levels and count will be used is based on the calculation day and the IN punch that begins the period Up to 4 levels of Period Overtime can be used Each level can be assigned its own threshold limit that move the hours from one Pay Code to another For example 2 24 hour periods Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 11 13 Mand oy Tie ay 00 Sde 5000 p a 1st 24 hour period 2nd 24 hour period To create a Period Overtime templat
117. Enter in the required number of hours to work before the deduction is applied and select the Punch Position amount of time to deduct start or end of the shift to deduct from 8 Click on the Breaks tab Meal Templates General Breaks Coffee Breaks Meals Assignments Break Credit Base size on Default Size Number of breaks 1 a Default break size 15 00 Combine multiple employee breaks to one Deduction for short break Threshold i 00 00 Less than or equal to threshold Nothing gt More than threshold Nothing Deduction for long break Threshold 00 00 Less than or equal to threshold Nothing More than threshold Nothing Amount under or over Nothing Allowed break and taken time Allowed break and amount under or over 9 Select the Break size based on Default Size or Shift Break Size For breaks based on default size enter the number of breaks and the default break size in the fields provided 13 6 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module Base size on Number of breaks Base size on For breaks based on Shift break size click on the Si button and the following Define Breaks window will appear Define Breaks Mumber of breaks based on shift length From To Break Break size based on shift length From To To enter the Number of breaks based on shift length click on the Add button A row will appear Enter the From and To time
118. F Synchronize Access Control Edit Help Log OFF Synchronize Emplovyeets with Payroll The features of the File Menu are Log Off Log off current user Synchronize Access Control Provides the ability to synchronize both the Amano Time amp Attendance software database with the AmanoNet 7 6 or Nexus 220 databases This Submenu item will only appear after Access Control integration has been selected by selecting Yes in the Setup Wizard Step 1 General Setup pressing the Access Control button and configuring Access Control When the Synchronize Access Control submenu is selected all new transactions are transferred to the Time amp Attendance software The Access Control module must be activated for this feature to work See Access Control section for more details Synchronize Employee s with Payroll Provides the ability to synchronize both the Amano Time amp Attendance employees with QuickBooks employees This submenu item will only appear after Sync Employee s with QuickBooks by selecting in the Setup Wizard Step 7 Employee Setup When the Synchronize Employee s with Payroll submenu is selected employee data are export to QuickBooks Imported from QuickBooks or Both depending on the selection on the Wizard Employee Setup Exit Exit the application E dit M enu Edit Help Change Password The features of the Edit Menu are Time amp Attendance Software How To Use 4 3 e Setup Wizard Provides the a
119. File To generate a payroll file from the Payroll Profile select the desired Payroll Profile from the list ae in the Table View and click on the Run Payroll button and the following message will appear Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 33 Generating payroll interface Note An error message may appear if the Payroll interface cannot be created Please check the Payroll Settings and or consult Amano support if necessary QuickBooks Manual Integration The setup process to create a QuickBooks export iif file manually is as follows Step 1 During installation of the Amano Time amp Attendance software the Setup Wizard in Step 1 General Setup will ask Do you want to send employee hours to your payroll software Select Yes Step 2 Select iif file from the dropdown menu for How do you want to export QuickBooks A Setup Wizard General Department Pay Code Schedule Pay Class Exception Employee Clock Login Define your Company profile J Company Do you want to integrate Access Control No Yes Do you want to send employee hours to your payroll software C No Yes Quickbooks Pro al How do you want to export QuickBooks iif File iif File Direct integration he Step 1 From the main menu of QuickBooks select File see figure 9 34 Time amp Attendance Software Output Step 2 Step 3 AMANO QuickBooks Pro 2010 Home Explore Workflow Sea mcm
120. G Grand Total Hours 55 00 Total Mins Total Dollars 53 00 02 00 Note When Zone Differential module is activated the report will include Zone information Unauthorized H ours Report This report displays employee list with date and hors that are not authorized to go to payroll export file Unauthorized Hours Date range Apr 19 2010 May 2 2010 Schedule Name Alan Poulton Mon 08 00 AM Mon 05 00 PM Tue 08 00 AM Tue 05 00 PM Apr 21 2070 Wed 08 00 AM Wed 05 00 PM Labor Analysis Report As seen in the following example the Labor Analysis Report provides a complete and detailed account of employees labor for a specified period of time Information will vary based on your company s Setup Wizard selections 9 12 Time amp Attendance Software Output Labor Analysis Report Date range Aug 9 2009 Aug 15 2009 Date Pay Code Department 1 Employee 1002 Aug 10 2009 Mon REG Aug 11 2009 Tue REG Aug 12 2009 Wed REG Aug 13 2009 Thu REG Aug 14 2009 Fri REG REG Total Total for Employee 1002 Department Total 1 Department 4 Employee 1002 Aug 10 2009 Mon OT OT Total Total for Employee 1002 Department Total 4 Department 2 Employee 1002 Aug 11 2009 Tue REG REG Total Total for Employee 1002 Department Total 2 Default Badge ID 1235 Name Bill Jackson Default Marketing Badge ID 1235 Name Bill Jackson Marketing NJ Engineering Badge ID 1235 Name Bill Jackson N
121. In the Deduction for Long Break box configure how much time will be deducted from the employee when an employee takes a longer period of time than they were allocated for in the break a Enter in the amount of time HH MM that the action is to be taken b Setthe conditions if the time taken for the break is either less or more than the threshold in the fields provided The choices are Allowed break Which is the amount of time the employee is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module 13 11 Amount taken Which is the amount of time the employee actually punched out for the Regular break or Coffee break Amount under or over This is the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break Nothing This is to deduct no time from the employee Allowed and taken time Which will deduct the time allocated for Regular break or Coffee break plus the time taken for Regular break or Coffee break Allowed break and amount under or over Which is the amount of time the employee is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break and which is the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break 12 Click on the Coffee Breaks tab Repeat steps 10 through 12 for the Coffee Breaks 13 Click on the Meals tab Repeat steps 10 through 12 for the Meals 14 Click on the Assignments tab Meal Te
122. Individual Schedule and or Advanced Schedule The selection of Benefit will be possible if the Benefit Module is Activated Creating a Import Profile 1 Click on the Import node within the Output module in the Tree View 2 Click on the kaa button and the following Import window will appear Name NJ Emplyee Records Description Employee records for FY0S File Name C Documents and Settings ipaxton Desktop Jeff se Import Type Override Existing Benefit Note In Setup Company Settings the Tracking Type must be set to Import Balances for Benefit to appear on the Import General screen In the Name field enter a name for the Import profile 4 Enter a brief description of the Import profile in the Description field 5 Enter the name and path of the import file in the File Name field or click on the button to the right of the field to browse for the file you wish to import 6 Inthe Import Type area select the type of import you wish to perform The choices are Employee Individual Schedule or Advanced Schedule 7 Check Benefit if you want to import employee benefits from another database Note Benefit will only appear when Tracking Type in Company module is set to Import Balances 11 Check Override Existing if you want to replace existing database with imported information 12 Click on the Import File Format Settings tab This tab defines the format of your import file Select the fo
123. J Engineering Presence Report As seen in the following example the Presence Report provides a list of employees currently punched IN at the terminal This report will only be accurate if the terminal is polled regularly Presence Report Date range Jun 1 2009 Aug 13 2009 Date Day Number Badge Name Type Time Description Bill Jackson Bill Jackson Bill Jackson Bill Jackson Jul 1 2009 Wed 1002 1235 Jul 2 2009 Thu 1002 1235 Jul 3 2009 Fri 1002 1235 Jul 4 2009 Sat 1002 1235 No Activity No Activity No Activity No Activity Absent Absent Absent Absent Time Card and Time Card New Reports As seen in the following examples the Time Card New Report and Time Card Report provides a complete and detailed account of employees punch times totals wages and exceptions for a specified period of time Information will vary based on your company s Setup selections Wages will only be displayed if enabled to be displayed on reports on the Pay Code tab from the Setup Wizard When the Zone Differentials module is activated the Zone information will be shown on these reports Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 13 Date 4 Employee Jul 1 2009 Jul 2 2009 Jul 3 2009 Jul 4 2009 Jul 6 2009 Spri 2010 Apr H 2040 Tips Report In Out Default 1002 Badge 1235 Wed Thu Fri Time Card New Report Date range Jun 1 2009 Aug 17 2009 in Out Pay Code Schedule Bill Jackson Mo
124. L Adjustments T ab W eb This function allows Timecard adjustments to be made to Labor Levels Zone Codes Pay Codes Hours and Dollars A Comments Reasons column is provided to make notes For all other Timecard modifications see Punches and Overrides tabs To perform an employee Timecard adjustment click on the Adjustments tab then select the desired column in the date row you wish to edit Click to enter the value for Hours Dollars Bonus Pay Code only and Comments Reason Use the dropdown lists for Labor Levels Zone Codes and Pay Codes Note Use the Insert button to insert a row in the Timecard grid at the appropriate location for an adjustment such using more than one Pay Code i e hours defined as overtime When you have finished performing a Timecard adjustment click on the Save button to save your changes Time Guardian gt Setup Daily Activities Output Preferences Welcome SYSOBA Timecard Sav Cancel Delete inser Benefit balances ancel De inser oneft balance l4 wW 123457 Smith John v Paypertods V7 1012 Adjustments Duy Schedule CostCenter 8 Department JORCLASS LEVEL4 Jone Ce Paycode Hours Dofsre Home 3 00 Y biome 1 fiom v hom Y Zo R Otome I O ome 1 Home I COC Home 1 Heme 3 CO Home 1 Heme 3 C vo Mome 7 fore t Hom w Ze wv Home t v Home Zor v Horm v le v Hom v Zov PEG Home v fax 0 Hom w iv m Heme 3 OC Heme 7
125. Meal Rules Holidays Does overtime apply for this Pay Class i No Yes 7 Hours for payroll require authorization Hours worked before an assigned schedule require authorization T Hours worked beyond an assigned schedule require authorization T Hours worked on an unassigned schedule require authorization Basic Overtime Rules Advanced Overtime Rules Daily Overtime Weekly Overtime Weekend Overtime Consecutive Day Overtime IV Apply advanced Daily Overtime rules Overtime Level 1 08 00 assign to for y Overtime Level 2 10 00 assign to or v ds Apply 9 Click the Apply advanced Daily Overtime rules box enter the hour amount to work before applying and assign to a Pay Code of OT or DT If DT is selected for Overtime Level 1 OT Level 2 will be disabled 10 From the Pay Class Advanced Overtime Rules click on the Weekly Overtime tab to define the Weekly Overtime see figure 3 20 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard ox sialaimigjoio a General Overtime Rules Rounding Rules Meal Rules Holidays Does overtime apply for this Pay Class C No Yes 7 Hours for payroll require authorization F Hours worked before an assigned schedule require authorization 7 Hours worked beyond an assigned schedule require authorization Hours worked on an unassigned schedule require authorization Basic Overtime Rules Advanced Overtime Rules Daily Overtime Weekly Overtime Weekend Over
126. Move Down To add a Pay Code highlight the desired Pay Code in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all Pay Codes click on the Add All button To remove a Pay Code highlight the desired Pay Code in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all the listed Pay Codes click on the Remove All button 9 Click on the Schedule Eligibility tab Holiday Group General Seniority Eligibility Schedule Eligibility Holiday Selection Schedule Shifts Must work next and previous scheduled day v Minimum hours required on previous schedule day 04 00 Worked Hours 10 2 Max Days Minimum hours required on next schedule day 04 00 Worked Hours v 10 Max Days Work on previous unscheduled day automatically qualifies the employee for previous schedule day requirement Work on next unscheduled day automatically qualifies the employee For next schedule day requirement 10 In the Schedule Shifts field select the requirement from the dropdown list for the employee to be awarded Holiday hours e None No requirement e Must work previous scheduled day To be awarded holiday hours the employee must work a required minimum amount of hours in the designated Pay Code s on the previously scheduled day before the holiday e Must work next scheduled day To be awarded holiday hours the employee must work a required minimum amount of hours in the designated Pay Code s on the next scheduled da
127. Nothing Deduction for long break Threshold 90 00 Less than or equal to threshold Nothing More than threshold Nothing Amount under or over Nothing Allowed break and taken time Allowed break and amount under or over 10 In the Deduction for Short Break box configure how much time will be deducted from the employee when an employee punches out for a shorter period of time than they were allocated for in the break a Enter in the amount of time HH MM that the action is to be taken b Setthe conditions if the time taken for the break is either less or more than the threshold in the fields provided The choices are Allowed break Which is the amount of time the employee Is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break Amount taken Which is the amount of time the employee actually punched out for the Regular break or Coffee break Amount under or over This is the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break Nothing This is to deduct no time from the employee Allowed and taken time Which will deduct the time allocated for Regular break or Coffee break plus the time taken for Regular break or Coffee break Allowed break and amount under or over Which is the amount of time the employee is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break and which is the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break 11
128. OT CLICK YES PREVENTING ACCESS TO THE SOFTWARE UNTIL YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BY CLICKING YES OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AMANO CINCINNATI INC SOFTWARE LICENSE l LICENSE GRANT This Amano Cincinnati Inc product contains software that provides services on a computer Amano Cincinnati M x Con S e E x end 4 Prevos nerh 4 The Choose Install Set screen will appear Select one of the following options e Standalone Installs both the Time amp Attendance Software Server database and Client portion on the same PC This is the default Press next to accept and continue e Server Installs the Time amp Attendance Software database on a server machine You will be prompted to enter the IP Address of the server e Client Installs the Time amp Attendance Software on a client PC to connect to the server database 2 2 Time amp Attendance Software Installation oF 6 After you have made your selection click on the Next button Time Guardian Introduction License Agreement D Choose Install Set cove EER Choose Install Set EE Standalone i This option will install Time Guardian ServerClient and all application files on the same PC Server n p This option will install Time Guardian on Server machine with databasefiles and server configuration files You will be prompted to enter the IP Address of the Server Cli
129. Open Previn Company Save Copy of Becup Close Company Switch to Mabuser Mode Remote Access Accourtert s Copy Pret Forres Printer Setup Send Forms Sun Step 13 From QuickBooks Pro select Utilities gt Import A Copy Company Fis for QuachGncks Mar Copy Company File for QuickBooks Orina Convert Accourtert s Copy to Company FiejQEw Most Matter Acuess Very Octe Rebubd Osta Clean Up Company Data Restore Bachup For Larder Quacidiooks Vernon QuickBooks screen will appear Ba aan erate eae Cacia atte een eee ae teeter one You will be importing activity data created by the Timer rv Veeder Center Emgikyoo Center r ne Barking Dor Corker Report Center App Corte Liser Licenses Step 14 Select OK to continue and select the file to be imported see figure This is the file name that was defined in Time Guardian Highlight the file as illustrated in the example figure and select open Import Look in My Recent Documents My Network QuickBooks 2007 components convertos Sata ivpay iif NUCOA1040 iif NUCOA1065 iif NUCOA1120 iif E NUCOA1120s iF Sf NUCOA_US iff nuitems iif NULICOA TIF UCOA TIF File name UCOA IF Files of type IIF Files IF peer ea a Cancel Help Step 15 From QuickBooks view the imported employee information create paychecks if desired and or submit for payroll Time
130. Pay Class Department Employee meP n pale duhation a REG po z 09 30 Daily EN pd _r To add a condition click on the Add button and enter the following e Pay Code Select All or individual Pay Codes e Condition Select lt lt gt or gt e Value Enter a time threshold HH MM for the selected Pay Codes e Duration Select Daily Weekly or Pay period To remove a condition select a row and click on the Remove button 8 Click on the Exception tab This tab enables you to receive an IM notification when the selected Exceptions are generated gt IM Profile I General Pay Code Threshold Exception Pay Class Department Deparment Empkives Available Selected EI Early In LI Late In o Add All MP Missing Punch ABS Absence Remove All INSCH Not Schech led lt k gt SB ae ee e Toselect an Exception highlight the desired Exception in the Available list and click on the Add button e To select all Exceptions from the Available list click on the Add All button e To remove an Exception from the Selected list highlight the desired Exception in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e Toremove all selected Exceptions click on the Remove All button 9 Click on the Pay Class tab This tab enables you to receive an IM notification when the selected Pay Classes are used Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module 20 5
131. Pay Code Enter 2 for time and a half 2 ae Enter 1 for straight time Payro ings aaa Pay Codes ahi Enter 1 for straight time Enter 1 for straight time Enter 1 for straight time Enter 1 for straight time 9 30 Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 Click on the Date Range tab The following is an example of the Date Range tab window r General Date Range Breaks Payclass Department Employee Date Selection Date Range X From Date C Until HE C Foward SJ oavyis Backward i IDay s Week s Month s i Year s al kag 10 In the Date Selection field select the date range for the report The choices are Today Yesterday Last Open Period Previous Open Period Current Week Previous Week Current Month Previous Month Last 2 Weeks Date Range Current Pay period and Previous Pay period Note When Current Pay period and Previous Pay period are selected the first Pay Class in the Selected List on the Pay Class tab will be used as the date range for the file 11 If Date Range was chosen as the Date Selection you must enter the From Date and Until Date using the Calendar icon You also have the option of going forward or backward as many days weeks months or years from the From Date using the Forward and Backward options 12 Click on the Breaks tab The Breaks tab determines which departments in the Amano Time amp Attendance software that will be passed to the Payroll Export
132. Payroll No access to Setup Wizard from the Edit menu Only access to Employee Timecard Communications and Recalculate modules Also access to Reports and Payroll modules However no access to Global assign and apply functions Supervisor No access to Setup Wizard from the Edit menu Only access to Employees Timecard and Reports modules However no access to Global assign and apply functions 3 Inthe Account Settings section select the following Disabled If checked the user will be disabled Enabled is default Expires On When checked the password will expire on a given date When the date arrives a check will automatically be placed in the disabled option Read Rates When checked the user will have read only access to the Rates modules Write Rates When checked the user will have write access to the Rates modules 4 Click on the Password tab HEEJ oaa ICID General Password Payclass Department Employee Password Confirm Password Options Must change password on next login Never Expires Expires after _ Days Cannot change password 5 Enter a user password and confirm the password Note The minimum required password length is 6 characters with a maximum of 20 characters The password can be any combination of letters and numbers and is case sensitive However no spaces and or symbols are allowed Please make a note of your name administrator user and
133. Payroll for Windows CBS Excel GevityHR Paycheck Paylink Paycheck Preview Payday Peachtree Ceridian Power Pay EasyPay PayWeb 13 QuickBooks file export Integration SS ee eS oe OS ABRA ACCPAC for Windows Ahola Amano Americanhealthtech Ameripay Ceridian Encore Ceridian Esource Ceridian Insync Ceridian Source 500 Ceridian Web CompuP ay CYBORG DacEasy DELTEK DM Payroll EVOLUTION Fidelity Great P lains Dynamics HRPS ScorPEO D Edwards Lawson 8 1 MAS 90 Millenium Pay Choice PayAmerica Paycom Time amp Attendance Software Payroll Interface Module 19 1 Default Payroll Interfaces Optional Payroll Interfaces Paycor PayMaxx PayP lus Payroll 1 PayTime PeopleSoft Real World SAGE SageAccPacERP SBT VisionP oint 10 Solomon Specialized Data Systems SunGuard Pentamation Timberline Ultipro Paymate Platinum The Payroll Interface Module provides a way of transferring data in the system to payroll software The data is usually transferred by means of a text file formatted to the payroll company s specifications or directly into the payroll company database See Creating a Payroll Profile in the output section 19 2 Time amp Attendance Software Payroll Interface Module Chapter 20 Events Notification Module E vents Notification M odule I ntroduction Traditionally time and attend
134. Plus filename SS a ee ee Records By Check to separate records Output Path Year Format Enter the year format Check to transfer name through to payroll file Payroll Settings Cpi Check to transfer rates through to payroll General Tab Pass Rees file Check to transfer dollars through to payroll file Check to transfer tips through to payroll file Pass Name Pass Dollars Pass Tips TipsCode Tips Code E Earnings D Deductions Payroll Settings Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 27 PayDay Examples of export file fields for PayDay are shown in the following matrix table Pee PS ee eee eee eee Payroll Select PayDay Payroll ID Enter a 2 character upper case code identifying the Payroll payroll batch no General Tab specify the location and file name provided by PAYDAY of AMERICA for the export file ss iiai Example G ProgramFiles Time Guardian Plus ifename e ee ee E Enter code provided by PAYDAY of AMERICA Pass Rates Check to transfer rates through to payroll file Check to transfer dollars through to payroll file TG Plus default are Codes 0 Regular through 41 Severance Pay Codes 0 Regular through 41 Severance Pay Codes 0 Regular through 41 Severance Pay Codes 0 Regular through 41 Severance Pay Payroll Settings vag ET SoS Sor Pay Codes Tab a Codes 0 Regular through 41 Severance Fay Payroll Settings General Tab Codes 0 Regular through 41 Seve
135. Pome 3 OC w Home 1 flere 3 O w Perma Home 3 CC Home 1 Homa 3 CC toma 1 Heme 3 OC vj me Pome 1 Hors w lar VA PE fiom Zor w OL om v Zo a oh Us JURY Home w Zo w BAV i om v 3 Zo v How Z 1031 2006 Wed C 80 22 2006 The Heme 1 CIEI KIKIKI KICI CAKARA CIK Category Totais iJ Period Totals 9 Fri 9 29 When you have finished click on the Save button to save your changes Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 15 The Adjustments Tab in the Timecard grid consists of the following columns that have to be displayed Date that punches schedule belong to Zone Code assigned user defined for zone differentials Pay Code Pay Code user defined to be assigned to hours Total Hours for assigned Pay Code And the following additional user selectable columns that can be displayed o ayn Pay perod punchestours bero Note When making an hour adjustment for an employee for type of hours which require approval the following type of screen will appear Time Guardi iari PAO Setup Daily Actwibes Output Preferences Weltome SYSOBA Non Worked Hours Approval The following adjmaimants would aaa a5 benefit balance and require your approval Any aijustments not approve ed will not tbe fa Date Paycode Houre Approved C a Overrides Tab W eb This function allows overrides for only the existing employee hours and associated Pay Code For al
136. Rate Template Employee 1 Smith Mike JOBCLASS 6 6 CC6 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 MM 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 6 Enter a rate in the Rate field Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module 15 9 A Combined Cost Rates General C Use Rate Template Employee 1 Smith Mike JOBCLASS 6 6 CC6 7 Repeat Steps 3 thru 6 to add additional Rates to this template 8 To delete a rate select the desired row and click on the Delete button 9 To automatically increase the rate by a click on the Percent Increase button A Combined Cott Rates General C Use Rate Template Employee 1 Smith Mike La Delete 10 Click on the l button in the Date field to enter the effective date for the rate increase and enter the percentage increase of the rate in the Increase field When you have finished click on the button to save your settings and return to the Combined Cost Rates window 11 Click on the button to save your settings The Combined Cost Rate will be added to the Main View 15 10 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module Combined Billable R ates This module enables you to create Combined Billable Rates and is enabled when at least one item is assigned to the Billable Rate Order in the Combined tab of the Rate Setup window and at least one employee has been added in the Employees module The rate t
137. Remove button e To remove all selected categories of the Labor Level click on the Remove All button e Filter departments shown in the Available and Selected lists by selecting a sort item in the dropdown list in the Sort field Then enter data in the Criteria field s above either or both lists Only categories of the department matching the data entered will appear in both lists 16 Click on the Employee tab The following is an example of a Employee tab window JA General Date Range Breaks Payclass Department Employee Sort Number d Criteria Selected 1001 Smith John i e m REENEN 1005 Johnson Susan Comment Add All Remove Remove All Show Active Employees Only Show Active Employees Only e To add an employee to the payroll file highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the Add button e Toadd all employees to the report click on the Add All button e To remove an employee from the payroll file highlight the desired employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e To remove all selected employees click on the Remove All button e Filter employees shown in the Available and Selected lists by selecting a sort category in the dropdown list in the Sort field Then enter data in the Criteria field s above either or both lists Only employees matching the data entered will appear in both lists Generating the Payroll
138. Reset box The benefit balance for an employee will appear under the Benefit Balance column if the Tracking Type has been previously set to Deaccruals or Import Balance See Error Reference source not found for additional information on reports showing benefit balances Note This function can also be done with Global Assign I from the main employee list Employees W eb Access This tab allows the supervisor administrator when signed into the Time Guardian Pro system to set the web access rights for an employee From this screen the supervisor can assign the employee a password to use for initial login to the web module Retype this password in the confirm password Next select the modules below from the web client that you wish this employee to have access to Modules that are not checked off will not appear as menu selections when the employee logs in From the Employees screen click on the Web Access tab and the following type of screen will appear ig A o ggg wiso karl 1009 v A General Personal Contact Assignments Scheduling Labor Level Certification Wages Benefit Web Access Password Confirm Password Available Modules Module Punch Previous Punch Adju stents Reset Password Schedule Posting Report Module Description OOS O O Reset ResetPassword Allows the employee to change his or her password the Allows the employee to change his or her password to change his or her passwor
139. SS ____ General Breaks Coffee Breaks Meals Assignments Break Credit Intervals ooo ay we Be S gan f Enter the From and To interval times for each break The employee punch times will be assigned to one of the Meal Template types Break Meal or Coffee Break based on the time between the OUT and IN punches To create a Flexible Sequence Meal Template 1 Click on the Meal Templates node within the Shifts module in the Tree View 2 Click on the aa button and the Meal Templates window will appear Meal Templates General Breaks Coffee Breaks l Meals Assignments Break Credit Name NJ Corporate Breaks Description corporate HQ meal template Default Position Start O End Type Flex Flex Type Sal Auto Meal Deduct meal when employee does not punch out for meal Must work at least 04 00 hour s to have meal deducted Meal position to deduct from 04 00 from Start C End of Schedule Enter a name for the Meal Template in the name field Enter a description of the Meal Template in the Description field Select the Default Punch Position Start or End that the break or meal will be based on Select Flex as the Type and Sequence as the Flex Type oo a E Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module 13 9 7 Place a check in the Auto Meal check box if you wish to have an automatic break deduction Enter in t
140. Sars Cost Cost Total Silane 60 00 1260 0 80 00 1260 0 1260 9 1260 0 17 18 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module Icons C ommands W eb The toolbar of the Timecard grid consists of the following Button Command Description Saves the currently displayed employee Save Save record fan 24 9 004 al TSD 743104 This dropdown list allows you to view JSA ida aod different Pay periods in the Punch SEDA GM 4004 Overrides or Adjustments Timecard Si S04 8104 Pay periods grids Previous Pay periods can only be aponda gogn adjusted if they are still open by using the an Punches tab for punches and the J Adjustments tab for hours 54 9411704 gH 204 9 A04 Cancel any Timecard adjustments and Cancel Cancel return to the Employees screen Delete Row Deletes the selected row s in the grid Inserts a row below the selected row in Will display the benefit balances for the 7 Benefit selected employee and show the amount Balances taken available and current balance up to the Pay period shown Will display the Individual Schedule for Individual the selected employee and date to allow Individual schedule Schedule schedule modification At least one row must be selected to display Preferences W eb The display preferences for the Timecard grid are set by clicking on the appropriate Preferences Submenu selections from the Preferences menu Preferences Overrides col
141. Save Cancel Delete insert Beneltbelences 123457 Smith John 11808 13108 v Payperiods j Purana Orana E Adjustments C Date Day Schechde Cost Center S Deparment JORCLASS LEVFLA ZoneC Paycode Hours Dollars Ej 1 10 2008 Fri tome 3 Cl iw ome 1 Home 1 w fibme wi Zonewm REG w O ia2oo8 Sat Heme 3 CC Herne 1 Home 1 v v Home w Toney REG v Mdmansan deiat gt E Linen z iem lt yaoyz008 Sun Home 3 00 v Home I Home Te Home 2 Zone v Fee 1 21 2008 Mon Home 3 CC w Home 1 v Home 1 m hore Zone REG 1 22 2000 tue Wome 3 CC Home 1 Home 1 ome w Zane REG 1 23 2000 wed tome J C w Home 1 v Home 1 v forme wv Zone AREG a2472008 Thu Home 3 v Heme 1 w Homel v Home w Zone v REG w w Ti a 1 25 2008 Fri Soma 3 CLSA Glome 3 BA Giom 1 AM Bioma SE Zone SA AGG 48 1 20 2008 Sat rome 3 CC Home 1 w ome tv Home e Zone REG w 1 27 2008 Sun CO omeji omeji w omei vi Zae w REG V 1 20 2000 Pome 3 ce Home 1 w Home 1 Home Zone Ak REG w 1 23 2008 home 3 0x v Heme 1 w Home 1 v tome w Zone v REG 1 30 2008 Home 3 OX sel CE ap hoi Monel Zone E REG lt la si 2008 Home 3 OC w Heme 1 w Home 1 dHe Zone w REG Oo D o a n otat Hours Do
142. Settings Import Default Settings Import Field Map Settings Name NI Employee Records Description Import profile For NI HQ personnel File Mame Import Type v Override Existing O Individual Schedule Advanced Schedule In the Name field enter a name for the Import profile Enter a brief description of the Import profile in the Description field Enter the name and path of the import file in the File Name field or click on the browse button to the right of the field to browse for the file you wish to import 6 Select the Import Type from Employee Individual Schedule requires Advanced Schedule module Advanced Schedule requires Advanced Schedule module and Override Existing 7 Click on the Import File Format Settings tab This tab defines the format of your import file Select the following ioj x E m RN MAG fuvemcioyec records O General Import File Format Settings Import Default Settings Import Field Map Settings Delimiter Tab kd Text qualifier None Date Format Month f1 X I Month 1 Y I Month f1 od Hour Format Hour 8 00 X Full Name Format FirstName LastName hd FirstName LastName FirstName Middle LastName FirstName LastName FirstName Middle LastName astName FirstName Middle jd ol a Delimiter Select a Delimiter from the dropdown list The Delimiter is the character which separates the data
143. Setup click on the Wizard Complete button at the bottom of the wizard to complete the setup of Time Guardian and display Time Guardian login screen The Time settings and other configuration data will now be populated in the software including the time setting on the terminal s Time Guardian will poll for any connected terminals Note Employees can be entered during the initial setup process or any time later Employees can also be imported Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 57 This page intentionally left blank 3 58 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Chapter 4 Daily Use Initial Startup When the installation software activation registration and Setup Wizard are complete the Login screen will appear The following figures may use Time Guardian Time Guardian Plus and Time Guardian Pro as examples John_Smith Widbc firebirdsql localhost 3050 C Program Files Time Guardian Pl ime Guardian Plus Enter the Username and Password you defined in Step 9 Login Setup and click on the button and the Auto Find dialog will appear to select the type of terminal to be auto detected on initial startup The choices are MTX 15 FPT 40 or None of the Above This dialog only appears the first time the software is installed il Auto find terminal s What type of terminalis do you have MTx15 MTX15 FPT 40 Mi None of the above After terminal selection the software will open
144. Web Interface Module sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 17 1 Web Interface Module Introduction esssesssesrnesrnesrnsrrnerrrerrnnrrnnrrrnsrrnsrrerrrerrrerrrerrrerrrerrreni 17 1 Using the Web Interface Module ssesssesrsnsrrnsrrnerrnsrrnsrrnsrrnsrrnnrrnnrrnsrrnnrrnrrrnrrrnrrrnerreerreerree 17 3 Chapter 18 Zone Differential Module ssssssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 18 1 Zone Differential Premium Rules Module Introduction sesssesrnesrnesrnerrresrrerrnerrrerrrerrren 18 1 Using the Zone Differential Premium Rules Module sssssssssssssrrnerrnerrnerrnerreerresrrrsrreerreerns 18 1 Chapter 19 Payroll Interface Module sssssssnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 19 1 Payroll Interface Module Introduction sssessssesrnerrnerrnerrnerrrnsrrerrnrrnnrrnerrrnrrresrresrrerrrerrrerre 19 1 Chapter 20 Events Notification Module s ssssssssssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 20 1 Events Notification Module INtroduction cccccecccsssecceseeeeeeeeeeueeeaeeeeseesesaeserseesesaeestaneseaees 20 1 Using Events Notification Module ssssesssssrrnsrrnsrrnerrnnrrnsrrnsrrnerrnrrnnrrnnrrnnrrrnrrrerreerrenrreerree 20 3 Chapter 21 Benefit Time Module s sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 21 1 Benefit Time Module Introduction
145. a button and the Schedule window will appear Elak Auto Schedule Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun fe er A A Enter a name for the schedule in the Name field 4 To assign a template or auto schedule to a particular day highlight the desired template or auto schedule in the lists click on the button and check the desired day of the week The assigned Template or Auto Schedule will appear in the schedule list with a de under the chosen day To remove a Template or Auto Schedule from a particular day highlight the schedule in the Schedule list and click on the day you want the schedule unassigned The de will be removed from that particular day in the Schedule list To remove a Template or Auto Schedule from the Schedule list highlight the desired schedule and click on the remove button Note Time Guardian Pro checks for a schedule in the following order 1 Schedule Override 2 Template Schedule 3 Auto Schedule Schedule T imeline A schedule timeline can be displayed by selecting a schedule from the schedule list in the Schedule module tree view and clicking on the button This button is enabled when at least one schedule has been created AA Schedule Timeline To close this view click on the button 12 6 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module Schedule C overage The Schedule Coverage feature illustrated below allows you to view a report or image of the
146. able for terminals etc Software U pgrades Module activation allows you can expand the Time amp Attendance capabilities capacity via the Toll Free support number to e Purchase and conveniently activate any combination of available optional advanced modules through a simple activation process e Expand the employee capacity from the standard 100 employees incrementally from 125 employees and higher to unlimited e Expand the number of concurrent users e Purchase extended support to setup Advanced Modules i e Zone Differentials Time and Attendance Software Installation and User Guide This Installation and User Guide was designed to assist you with the installation and daily operation of your Time and Attendance software by providing a comprehensive understanding of the software This document covers the Time Guardian Time Guardian Plus and Time Guardian Pro software with screen shots from mainly from Time Guardian and Time Guardian Plus but includes descriptions of Time Guardian Pro features This Guide has a Table of Contents to locate specific areas of interest Time amp Attendance Software Introduction 1 5 1 6 This page intentionally left blank Time amp Attendance Software Introduction Chapter 2 Installation There are five documents available to assist you in the setup and use of your Amano Time amp Attendance software This Installation amp User Guide the FPT 40 Terminal Time Guardian Quick Start G
147. abor Select the labor category or categories that the Schedule will use When you have finished click on the click on the button The Advanced Schedule you just created will appear in the selected cell 12 20 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module E dit User Defined The Edit User Defined command from the submenu enables you to create a custom Advanced Schedule There are 15 User Defined Advanced Schedules to choose from User Defined Advanced Schedules must be enabled before use To do so select the row of the desired schedule and check the Active column To change the Name of a schedule double click on the name field and type in the desired name When finished you must press the Enter key to save the name otherwise the name you just entered will not appear in the Advanced Schedule pop up menu LEVEL LEVEL LEVELS LEVEL4 LEVELS LEVELE 1 Gl 1 Default 1 Defaut 1 Defaut 1 Default 1 Defauit 1 Default REG The Labor Level Pay Code and Zone fields can be modified by double clicking on them and using the dropdown lists to make a selection LEVEL1 Paycode To enter the hours for the schedule double click on the Hours field and enter the desired amount of hours VELI LEVELZ LEVELS LEVEL4 LEVELS LEVELE Remainder afault 1 Default 1 Default 1 Default 1 Default 1 Default REG FONE1 oo Check Remainder if you want the hours to be part of the Remai
148. al Rounding Templates General Grace First INjLast OUT _AIINfOUT Openschedule Transfer Ho Break Meal Unit Transfer IN Punch Transfer QUT Punch Transfer rounding works the same way as Break Meal rounding When a punch Is designated as a transfer punch it will use transfer rounding if it is activated If itis not activated then IN OUT rounding will be used Hour Rounding Hour Rounding is enabled in the General Rounding tab You must select either Punch Pair or Schedule as the Rounding Type Punch Pair rounds the amount of time worked between two punches after the automatic break meal deductions are taken out Schedule rounds the total amount of time worked for a schedule after the automatic break meal deductions are taken out 14 8 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module Rounding Templates Sele General pee Sh IN Lest SL Te Hour Rounding Break Meal Type G Punch Pair C Schedule Setting Unit Point Example Interval punch pair rounding occurs on multiple punches in a day The first interval or punch pair is 8 07 AM and 11 00 AM These punches calculate to 2 hours and 53 minutes of time If a Unit of 15 and Point of 7 is used then this time would be rounded to 3 hours and 0 minutes The second interval or punch pair is 12 32 PM and 5 00 PM These punches calculate to 4 hours and 28 minutes of time This time is rounded to 4 hours
149. ally start when the Time amp Attendance software is opened This service was installed during the initial installation but not started for Time Guardian and Time Guardian Plus Time Guardian Pro automatically has this service configured to start To configure and or start the Apache Tomcat 6 service Step 1 Open Computer Management and select Services and Applications a Computer Management m File Action wiew Window Help 2 Computer Management Local Description i System Tools F E Event viewer G Shared Folders Local Users and Groups Performance Logs and Alerts Device Manager Storage Starts stops and configures Windows services Extension Snap in Configures and controls the Windows Management Instrumentation WW Extension Snap in Provides Fast and flexible searching on file contents and properties Services z WMI coll Indexing Service Step 2 Click on Services and the following type of Service screen which lists currently installed services will appear Computer Management ff m File Action View Window Help 8 x ew fi A EA Computer Management Local A iS System Tools El Event viewer ace z Shared Folders Apache Tomcat 6 Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As 4 Local Users and Groups Ry NET Runtime Optim Microsoft Manual Local System Bf Performance Logs and Ah er os shes nena Sa Adobe LM Service AdobeLM 5 Manual Local System
150. ame for the Exception set in the name field 4 Enter a description of the Exception set in the Description field Note If you wish to duplicate the properties of an existing Exceptions template for another Exceptions template select the desired Exceptions template open it enter in a new name and click on the Save As E button The new Exceptions template will appear in the Main View 5 Click on the Exception tab 6 To add an Exception highlight the desired er note Meal Penalty MPNT can now be selected in the Available list and click on the Le button To select all the listed Exceptions click on the asa button To remove an Exception from an employee s Remove record highlight the desired Exception in the Selected list and click on the button To remove all the listed Exceptions click on the button 7 Forsome Exceptions in the Selected list you can enter in the Minute Requirement HH MM which will determine if the Exception will be reported once the Minute Requirement has been reached For example Time Guardian Pro can be configured to not generate a LI Late In Exception if the employee is late by less than 5 minutes Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 31 This page intentionally left blank 12 32 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module Chapter 13 Advanced Meal Module Advanced M eal M odule Introduction The activation of the Advanced Meal Module provides t
151. an Plus Time Guardian Pro and the materials provided we ask that you e mail them to TimeGuardian amano com All feedback is welcome and greatly appreciated and will help us provide a better product to you our customer We thank you for selecting Time Guardian Time Guardian Plus or Time Guardian Pro and welcome you to the Amano Cincinnati family of Time Solution and Access Control products The following table lists the standard and optional features for all Amano Time amp Attendance software Time amp Attendance software with 100 Standard Standard Standard tote a a Version 5 0 Version 2 0 Version 4 0 Interfaces Oey oa ce ae Optional 25 50 100 250 Optional 25 50 100 250 unlined 500 1000 and unlimited 500 1000 and unlimited users Concurrent User Optional 1 5 10 25 Optional 1 5 10 25 and Optional 1 5 10 25 and Upgrade and unlimited unlimited unlimited Payroll Interface Optional Optional Optional additional interfaces Time amp Attendance Software Introduction 1 1 Employee Capacity Upgrade Features for Base Time Guardian Software E xpandable 1 2 Multi user with standard support of 1 concurrent user for Time Guardian and 5 concurrent users for Time Guardian Plus and Time Guardian Pro Optional support for additional concurrent users is available for all packages with the User Module activation see previous table Standard one hundred 100 Employee Capacity not including inactive e
152. ance systems have always been after the fact reporting systems Warnings errors notifications etc have always been reported by reports or log files The problem with this approach is that the end user finds about these events after they have occurred many times after it is too late or too costly to address them The Instant Messaging IM that this module provides when activated runs as a Service in the background to allow real time notifications and immediate response to events Instant messaging provides the following three 3 crucial aspects of real time response e Presence It will be easy to know in real time if a service resource or device is available and its current status e Two way device independence As long as both devices talk the same protocol they will be able to communicate regardless of location and system e Standards based The IM system uses an open standards based protocol to communicate allowing easy integration into existing environment and systems This module when activated requires the installation of an Escalation server using J abber Server which can run as an Application or as a Service Note Time Guardian requires the Escalation Server TG service and Time Guardian Plus requires the Escalation Server TG Plus service to be started and configured to automatically start when the Time amp Attendance software is opened Thess services were installed during the initial installation but not
153. and To times for the break in 24 hour format and Break Length in HH MM format 15 Click on the button to add more breaks or click on the button to remove a break 16 Click on the Meals tab 13 4 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module Meal Templates PER General Breaks Coffee Breaks Meals Break Credit Fixed Meals From Length Add 00 00 O00 al 17 To add a meals interval click on the button A row will appear in the Fixed Meals box Must double click on From To and or Length fields to enter data 18 Enter From and To times for the interval in 24 hour format and Meal Length in HH MM format 19 Click on the button to add more meals or click on the button to remove a meal Flexible M eal Template A flexible meal is a meal that can be taken at any time of the day There are 4 types e Terminal Employees must press a button on the clock before punching IN and OUT for breaks Only works with MT X 15 terminal function buttons can be used on the MTX 15 e Interval Punches that occur within certain preset intervals are assigned to breaks or meals This takes a look at the amount of time an employee punches out for e Sequence Breaks or meals are assigned in sequential order and each punch pair is assigned to a break or meal in the order that they occur This setting requires an employee to take a break and meal in the proper sequence e Window Punches that occur within cer
154. andard 7 To adda Zone Differential Rule click on the Add button and enter the following e Type Select Fixed Times Schedule Start or First IN Punch 18 8 Time amp Attendance Software Zone Differential Module e Day The day that the Zone Differential will begin For Schedule Start and First IN Punch this field is set to Current For Fixed Time select 1 days before Current Day 1 days after 2 days after or 3 days after e From Enter the time HH MM that the Zone Differential will begin e Day The day that the Zone Differential will end For Schedule Start and First IN Punch this field is set to Current For Fixed Time select 1 days before Current Day 1 days after 2 days after or 3 days after e To Enter the time HH MM that the Zone Differential will end e Punch Type For Fixed Time and Schedule Start this field is set to Actual Time For First IN Punch select either Actual or Rounded Time e Qualification Click on the button to set the Qualification and the Zone Qualifications window will appear amp Zone Qualifications Qualification Process Type Process Number Not Qualified Zone Code Zone Award Remove Stop Stop Nextinth h Kee a Selecta Qualification from the Qualification list and click on the Add button The choices are Work Hour Before Schedule Within Schedule After Schedule Schedule and Zone A row will appear in the Qualification Rule box b Enter the following
155. are affected When the Global Apply Wizard is completed all these settings will be applied to all the employee s selected on the list Make the desired edits and click on the button when finished Note IMPORTANT Global Apply assign will only effect override the modules i e Previous Punch that have a checkmark in the Access column Therefore any module where the Access column is not checked will not be changed updated by Global Apply Finishing Global Apply The final screen shows a list of the employee s that would be affected by the Global Apply operation selections and provides the user with the chance to Cancel the operation Click on the OK button perform the operation 5 14 Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration Deleting Employees To delete an employee highlight the desired employee record from the employee list in the Table View and click on the button You will be prompted to confirm your deletion Employees we 2 Are you sure you want bo delete the selected rowis Click on Yes to delete The employee record will be removed from the list including all historical data Note It is recommended that you make the employee inactive instead of deleting the employee in case you would want to reactivate the employee at a later date E diting Employees To edit an employee record double click on the desired employee record or highlight the employee in the list and click on the button Th
156. are using This information can be obtained from QuickBooks iif file opened with Notepad see figure The Time amp Attendance software will enter a default value in the Export To field Choose the location and file name for the export file This information is entered in the select path field Step 9 Once all the fields for the General Payroll Settings have been entered click on the Pay Codes tab see figure and select the Pay Codes that you want transferred from the Time amp Attendance software to QuickBooks Assigning a payroll ID to the desired pay codes will do this A complete list of payroll Ids can be found in QuickBooks payroll items The Item Name in QuickBooks Pay Code in the Time amp Attendance software Payroll Settings General Paycodes x Pay Code l Value if Payeodel OT Faycode T i D lPavcodesl J TT Example of Amano Time amp Attendance Pay Codes vs QuickBooks Payroll Field IDs Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 37 Time Guardian Pay Codes QuickBooks Payroll Field ID Regular Pay Holiday Pay Step 10 From the Time amp Attendance software Payrolls screen click on the Employee tab see figure and select the employees from the Available List to be included in the payroll file aia General Date Range Breaks Payclass Department Employee Sort Number v Criteria P Badge X AvailalPayroll Last Name
157. artment JOBCLASS Zone ce Paycode Comments Reason 123457 Smith John E 9 29 2006 153458 Lee Howard me 3 CC Home 1 iw Home 1 i Home 4 Zor iw REG E 31 30 200 EEEE Ce w Home 1 x Home 1 v E 1071 2006 123462 Romwell Manu ne 3 CC v Home 1 l C 10 1 2006 123468 James William i C 10 2 2006 153469 Paxton Jeffrey _ Re 3 CC_ Home 1 H O 10 3 2006 Tue Home 3 CC Home 1 10 4 2006 Wed piii CC ICH LEAR 4 mm VESGnaonae oa nome lt T otals W eb The Daily and Pay period Totals for the employee are shown in the Timecard grid at the bottom of the screen to provide a quick view of the employee s daily and Pay period totals see figure Category Dollars Cost Total Billable Billable Total Period Totals 2 80 30 Mon Mar 20 Tue Mar 21 wed Mar 22 Thu Mar 23 Fri Mar 24 Mon Mar 27 Tue Mar 28 Wed Mar 29 Thu Mar 30 Fri Mar 31 4 otals FRAP eee ee BBEBBEEBBEBBBB The timecard total rows can be expanded to show more detail about the hours for the Pay period or a given day by clicking on the left hand side on the node see illustration below notice the hand pointer and and Signs Tire Gundi PRO Setup Dady Activibes Output Preferences Welcome SYSDGA Timecard
158. artment in the Available list and click on the Add button e To add all departments to the report click on the Add All button e To remove a department from the report highlight the desired department in the Selected list and click on the Remove button Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 7 e Toremove all selected departments click on the Remove All button e Filter categories of the Departments shown in the Available and Selected lists by selecting a sort item in the dropdown list in the Sort field Then enter data in the Criteria field s above either or both lists Only departments matching the data entered will appear in both lists Note Filtering by department does not exclude employees from that department but it does exclude the hours worked in that department 26 When you have finished selecting the departments for the report click on the Employees tab See the following illustration for an example General Date Range Title Page Footer Sort KEREGI Paycode Alichiatsles Department Employee Click on the Magnifying Eyeglass icon to filter employees using Pay Class department and or employee criteria The following is an example of the screen that will appear when you click on the Employee tab from the Employee Filter screen amp Employee Filter x Payclass Department Employee Sort Number z Criteria PER Je Selected 1001 Smith John 1003 Abbate John Ad
159. ary High School Some College No Degree Bachelor Masters Doctorate IM Password This field active only if Events Notification module is activated Confirm IM Password This field active only if Events Notification module is activated lempos TER Ei Seog 1000 Smith John Tt EN i General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Certification Benefit Web Access Nexus220 Gender Male C Female Sac Sec No xex Birth Date lagu6 Marital Status Married s Education Level Bachelor IM Password assess Confirm IM Password FFTTTTT TEPE 3 38 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard E mployees C ontact Use this tab as a Human Resources function to record employee contact information see figure for example La Employees HE m pagg Mah ae General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Certification Benefit Web Access Nexus220 Address Street 12 Volt Place City Middletown State New Jersey Country usa i Zip 07747 Telephone Home 732 787 1212 Work 973 403 1500 Ext 115 Cell 732 741 5678 E Mail jsmith amano com Emergency Contact Name Alice Smith Phone 732 741 5678 Employees Assignments Use this tab to Assign each employee to Pay Class Assigns a Pay Class to an employee Pay Classes can be created in the Setup Wizard Time Zone
160. ase create your personal login Note Create users and assign employees Please create your personal login The Login Setup allows you to create User profiles accounts and assign access privileges to the accounts in Time Guardian e When you add a profile the option for the Administrator or Read Only access is provided Once an Administrator has been given access they will have the ability to add modify and edit any data contained in the system Note At least one administrator profile must be created in this step Each profile consists of a Name Password and Language selection e Selecting Default User will cause this Login to be displayed each time the Time Guardian is opened Press the Login button and the following Users screen will appear to enter general info for account settings The User s window consists of 5 tabs General Password Pay Class Department and Employee see figure io x am gan D me General Password Pay Class Department Employee Name ohn_Doe Group Mea eiga Account Settings l Disabled Expires On Read Rates Write Rates To create a User account 1 In the General tab enter the name of the individual or account you are adding in the Name field 3 54 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 2 Select the type of group you want the user to belong to from the dropdown choices of Administrator will have full access to all functions all modules
161. at you are using which is required when placing a support call Tree View The Tree View see the following figure lists the desktop module components for using Standard Time amp Attendance software without any optional modules They are Daily Activities Modules Employees Click on this module in the tree view to Add edit and or delete employees Timecard Click on this module in the tree view to Add and or modify employee punches Communications Click on this module enabled if using Access Terminals to remotely transfer functions on active terminals from the Host PC such as poll locations set locations time download validation and settings and view amp communicate with specific terminals location Recalculate Click on this module in the tree view to recalculate employee hours for selected Pay periods within a given Pay Class Output Modules Reports Click on this module in the tree view to configure generate and print reports based on employee time and attendance data Payrolls Click on this module in the tree view to add configure or edit payroll company settings for file export Import Click on this module to create and or edit employee import data transfer Export Click on this module in the tree view to define file format and export employee data Auto Process Click on this module in the tree view to name and set up recurrence of auto process for report terminal communications import export and or
162. ate Description NJ Manfacturing Rates Date Rate 2121 3 7 2006 LE 15 75 E 7 Click on the button in the Date field to enter the effective date for the rate When you have finished click on the Apply KA button to save your settings and return to the Rate Template window 15 14 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module General Number Name o Male Template Ess a S M T 1 6 Ms Standard Rate Description NJ Manfacturing 13 14 15 20 21 22 27 28 29 8 Enter a rate in the Rate field o Rate Template General Number Name 5 Standard Rate Description NJ Manfacturing Delete 9 Repeat Steps 5 thru 7 to add additional Rates to this template Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module 15 15 This page intentionally left blank 15 16 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module Chapter 16 Access Control Module Access C ontrol M odule Introduction When the Amano Nexus 220 or AmanoNet 7 6 software is installed on your system coupled with the Amano Time amp Attendance Software with the optional Access Control Module active you can load employees from the Access Control system into the Time amp Attendance System using the Synchronize Access Control command see Auto Process Settings tab Also any new employee entered in
163. ates GSE The Schedule Rules describes how to pay the employee For the day m Meal Templates 3a Shift Overtime BB Outside Shift Overtime Be Daily Rules i f Payclass fA Schedule HS Locations itt G Daily Activities 69 output Exceptions Exceptions are used to track deviations in an employee s time and attendance from assigned schedules Exceptions in Time Guardian Pro are defined by a group or set and then assigned to a Shift To create a group or set of Exceptions template 1 Click on the Exception module within the Shifts module in the Tree View and the list of defined exceptions will appear A Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA File Edit Help Si Today A Name v Ka _ 2 S Setup Name Description ae i Company Track all exceptions System will generate all exceptions Gd Users Son Zoff 7am 4pm Monday Friday standard NJ shift Holiday Shift Holiday Shift Paycodes S S Shifts i P Rounding Templates free CADLIONS AY meal Tempa Bit Shift Over Flags used to track employee deviations from assigned schedules work patterns Outside Shift Overtime B Daily Rules Ge Payclass H Fat Schedule E Locations Daily Activities Ce 63 Output 12 30 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 2 Click on the button and the Exception window will appear m Exceptions General Exception Mame Holiday Shift Description Holiday Shift 3 Entera n
164. ay period totals see figure Ee Timecard Jackson Bill 1002 x Bl BED AD AM E cts Bill 1002 AA 572709 878109 r Q 5 actus Punches Overrides Adjustments Date Day indicator 12 bay N Punci Day OUT Punch OUT Punch Tatal Hours adjustment BreakHe Aug 2 2009 t EDT Aug 3 2009 Mon EDT 4ug4 2009 Tue a EDT Aug5 2009 Wed EDT 09 00 4 Daily Totals Period Totals y gt Total 52 00 Total 92 30 a Paycode Paycode REG 52 00 REG 88 00 Labor 1 Default 09 00 1 Default 45 00 E 2 NJ Engineer 2 NJ Engineer 43 00 OT 04 30 Labor l 4 z Sem am ambos a MA a i E ka Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration 6 7 cons C ommands The toolbar of the Timecard grid consists of the following Zs First Employee Displays the first employee record in the Timecard grid Previous Employee a the previous employee record in the Timecard Next Employee a s the next employee record in the Timecard Last Employee Displays the last employee record in the Timecard grid This dropdown list allows you to select employee Employee records in both the Punches and Adjustments Timecard grids ARET SN Filters the employees that can be viewed in the Filer Epes Timecard grid by selecting certain critena This dropdown list allows you to view different Paypenods inthe Punches Overmd
165. bility to edit setup of the software such as adding additional employees and changing current users administrators When this submenu is selected the Setup Wizard will appear see figure Setup Wizard General Department Pay Code Schedule Pay Class Exception Employee Clock Login Define your Company profile Fi Company Do you want to integrate Access Control No Yes 4 Access Control Do you want to send employee hours to your payroll software No Yes Quickbooks Pro How do you want to export QuickBooks Direct integration Is QuickBooks installed on the current PC O No e Change Password Provides the ability to change the password for the current user administrator if ithas expired or is set to change password on Login When this submenu is selected the Change Password screen will appear See figure Fi Old Password er Password p o Confirm Password Pete Help Menu Help Topics Tine Guardian Licensing amp The features of the Help Menu are e Help Topics Provides access to the on line Help e Time Guardian Licensing Provides access to License Information and a connection for software registration Select License Information to see employee and concurrent user capacities This will also display what Time amp Attendance modules are activated with a green checkmark 4 4 Time amp Attendance Software How To Use About Provides the version of the software th
166. button e To add all Pay Classes to the report click on the Add All button e To remove a Pay Class from the payroll file highlight the desired Pay Class in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e Toremove all selected Pay Classes click on the Remove All button 14 Click on the Department tab The following is an example of a Department tab window Payrolls General Date Range Breaks Payclass Department Employee Sort Labor Number Criteria po G _ Labor Number Criteria Name h Available Selected NJ Engineering R Add H Add All Engineering Remove Remove All 15 To add a department category to the payroll file highlight the desired department category in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all departments for the payroll file click on the Add All button To remove a department from the payroll file highlight the desired category in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected departments click on the Remove All button e Toadda Labor Level category to the payroll file highlight the desired Labor Level category in the Available list and click on the Add button 9 32 Time amp Attendance Software Output e To add all categories of the Labor Level to the report click on the Add All button e To remove a category of the Labor Level from the payroll file highlight the desired category in the Selected list and click on the
167. c Employees with QuickBooks and import from QuickBooks database from Setup Wizard Employee Step 7 of initial Wizard or using the Import module to import employee data The employee module can also be used to add create new employees and or edit existing employee s e Click onthe ka button and the Employees window will appear see the following figure The Employees window can consist of the following tabs General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Wages Nexus 220 or AmanoNet Certification Benefit and Web Access depending on what modules are activated May also depend on setup configuration Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration 5 1 e Enter the employee information in the fields of each tab Fields highlighted in yellow are required and no record can be saved without the proper information being entered The following is an overview of each of these tabs including field names and definitions Note The employee badge number and employee number must be unique Also see Access Control about employee number requirements General Tab From the Employees screen click on the General tab and the following type of screen will appear E B B z gt g 5999 Poulton Alan General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Certification Benefit Web Access Nexusz20 Number 5999 Badge 64692760216 Payroll 5999 Last Name Poulton Middle Name First
168. can CENE i a H 1 FO 12 rih bn r Pmr ATER IFLR The Punches Tab in the Timecard grid consists of the following columns that have to be displayed And the following additional user selectable columns that can be displayed Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 13 Labor Level 6 user defined Information Indicators W eb The Indicator field in the Punches tab displays symbols to indicate that certain data in the Timecard grid was entered or modified The indicator symbols are as follows Tr oR Comment Reason exists ne ees Punches were edited Punches were edited edited e Paneches wer exist for this row Override hours applied Note By putting the mouse over the icon you to see the information that the icon represents Individual Schedule W eb To modify an Individual Schedule for an employee select a date from the Timecard Grid on the Punches tab and click on the Individual Schedule button only active on this screen The Individual Schedule will allow you to create and or modify the schedule for that date see figure 17 14 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module Time Guardian gt Setum y Achat Culp Woltome Sv SO8A individual Schedule Bate 17192008 Type Fi d k Poycode REG k Shalt Mae i Schedule Start Schedule End Dar idaysbefar ODay Time 0700 am Tune Labor fer Homa Leiber Cost Center 55 Cheer trees JOROLASS LEVE
169. cation Based on the options terminal etc the download command will for e MTX 15 Terminal send the employee names employee hours time display format lock in schedule DLS settings and previous punches This will be finished by setting the time e FPT 40 Terminal send the employee names employee hours time display format and DLS settings This will be finished by setting the time Time amp Attendance Software Communications 7 1 Clear maps at a FPT 40 terminal locations or multiple FPT 40 terminal locations Send maps at a FPT 40 terminal locations or multiple FPT 40 terminal locations Receive maps ata FPT 40 terminal locations or multiple FPT 40 terminal locations To select specific MTX terminals within a location double click on the desired location row and the following Communications dialog will appear for MTX terminals wala 2 To select specific FP T 40 terminals within a location double click on the desired location row and the following Communications dialog will appear for FP T 40 terminals a Communicat horn The Send Maps Receive Maps and Clear Maps commands are only used for FPT 40 terminals Select terminals in the Terminals list by placing a check in the Select box of each terminal When you have finished making your selections use one the commands to communicate with ie al the terminals Click on the Close button to close this dialog 7 2 Time amp Attendance Sof
170. ced Rounding Module e Point The numeric value used to determine when an employee s punch would be moved forward to the next Unit The rule for rounding is that the Point always moves forward Break Meal Enter the following to set the Break Meal rounding rules for the Pay Class Note This section of the screen will be disabled if the Hours Rounding Type field Is set to None e Type Select None Hour Rounding or Punch Rounding e Hour Rounding If Hour Rounding was selected set the Unit and Point for both the Break and Meal e Punch Rounding If Hour Rounding was selected set the Unit and Point for IN and OUT punches for both the Break and Meal Rounding moves an employee s punches or hours to an even amount to make it easier for calculations There are 2 methods available either by rounding individual punches Punch or by rounding the total hours Hours Only one method can be selected A Rounding Template is used to set a particular rounding rule The template can then be assigned to a Shift Additional rounding can be found in the Daily Rules Daily Rounding and Pay Class Weekly Pay period Rounding modules Refer to these modules for more detail To create a Rounding Template 1 Click on the Rounding Template node within the Shifts module in the Tree View E Time Guardian John_Smith File Edit Help Rounding Type Punch TAT Meal Templates Sa Shift Overtime Outside Shift Overtime H Daily Rules E
171. ckBooks Pay Code s _PayCode Vale Mapping EG P T Select a Pay Code from QuickBooks Paycode1 OT Paycode2 DT Paycode3 TT SCK VAC aes re res hi PER res rs ESE Paycode2 HOL BONUS JURY BRV Note Failure to perform and or correctly map Pay Codes could result in non synchronization The Item Name in QuickBooks Pay Code in the Time amp Attendance software Step 3 From the Time amp Attendance software Payrolls screen click on the Employee tab see figure and select the employees from the Available List to be included in the payroll file 9 42 Time amp Attendance Software Output as General Date Range Breaks Payclass Department Employee Sort Number v Criteria Selected 1001 Smith John 1005 Johnson Susan Remove Remove All Show Active Employees Only Show Active Employees Only e To add an employee to the payroll file highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the Add button e To add all employees to the report click on the Add All button e To remove an employee from the payroll file highlight the desired employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e To remove all selected employees click on the Remove All button e Filter employees shown in the Available and Selected lists by selecting a sort category in the d
172. cked Note The amount of exceptions that can be tracked may vary depending on module activation Exception lEarly In EI Early Out EO Late In LI Late Out LO Missing Punch MP Absence ABS Not Scheduled UNSCH Long Meal LM Short Meal SM The following figure shows the colors displayed in the timecard to indicate various actions performed These timecard actions may differ depending on the modules activated Time amp Attendance Software How To Use Column Punches Holiday Punches Schedule Group Edited In punch Font Punches Auko Fonk Punches DLS Font Punches Adjustment Font Edited hours Font Sunday t Wednesday Thursday Work Hours Award Hours Award Hours Override Pay In Advance Remainder Holiday Formulas Individual Holidays can be created in the Holiday window by selecting the Setup Wizard from the Edit menu clicking on the Pay Code tab and pressing the Holiday button A formula is used in the Date Definition and Condition tables to generate the holiday Note Ifthe Advanced Pay Class Module is activated see this module for additional information on the Holiday Group and formulas Time amp Attendance Software How To Use 4 7 This page intentionally left blank Time amp Attendance Software How To Use Chapter 5 Employee Administration Employees can be administered by selecting the Employees module in the Da
173. column heading You can also deselect any checked Pay Codes in a column by clicking on the column Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 11 17 heading To select all Pay Codes in the grid click on the button This button will also deselect all the Pay Codes in the grid if all were selected Note If you wish to duplicate the Weekly Overtime properties from the General Level and or Count tabs select the desired Weekly Overtime template open it enter ina new name and click on the Save As Le E button The new Weekly Overtime template will appear in the Main View C onsecutive Overtime Consecutive Overtime awards overtime based on the qualifying number of consecutive or non consecutive days within a week or Pay period and number of hours worked per day Consecutive days are days that are worked one right after another with no days off in between Up to 4 levels of Consecutive Overtime days can be created with each level assigned its own threshold limit to move the hours from one Pay Code to another See the following table for an settings example Consecutive Overtime From To Pay Code o ee o e Oo eea e S Additionally you can setthe Pay Codes that will count toward consecutive overtime level Creating a Consecutive Overtime T emplate 1 Click on the Consecutive Overtime node within the Pay Class module in the tree view see the following figure Fy Time Guardian John_Smith File Edit Help
174. configuration for an easy to use time and attendance system with access integration The nine 9 steps of the Setup Wizard are E Setup Wizard Steps Summary Step 1 J4 General Optional Company rule and payroll interface Step 2 2 Department Optional Step 3 Ga Pay Code Optional Step 4 fH Schedule Optional Step 5 Pay Class Required P ay Period Overtime Rounding and Meal rules Step 6 cs Exception Optional X Step 7 4 Employee Required Step 8 gt Clock Optional X Step 9 A Login Required User rights login options and employee selection STEP 1 General Setup Optional Wizard Step e Access System Integration e Company Profile e Payroll Interface STEP 2 Department Setup Optional Wizard Step STEP 3 Pay Code Setup Optional Wizard Step e Pay Code Types e Overtime and Absence Rules e Wages Rules Time amp Attendance Software Introduction 1 3 STEP 4 Schedule Setup Optional Wizard Step STEP 5 Pay Class Setup Required minimum of 1 Pay Class e Overtime Authorization e Pay period Type e Overtime Rules e Rounding Rules e Meal Rules e Holiday Assignment e Hours Authorization requirement requires schedules e Advanced Overtime e Day Change Rules STEP 6 Exception Setup Optional Wizard Step STEP 7 Employee Setup Required Wizard Step minimum of 1 employee needed STEP 8 Clock Setup STEP 9 Login Setup Required Wizard Step minimum of 1 administrator profil
175. cription payroll selection payroll number and output path will be created automatically during the initial Setup Wizard when QuickBooks Pro is selected to auto sync In the Payroll ID field select Payroll Number Employee Number Social Security Number or Badge Number In the Output Path field enter in the directory path of the payroll file or click on the Browse button to set the path An Open dialog will appear Select the path and directory and enter in the filename The filename of the payroll file is usually set by the payroll company you are using Click on the Specific Payroll Settings button to see the Payroll Settings window which are payroll company specific Configure the General and Pay Codes settings tabs as per the desired payroll requirements and click on the ka button QuickBooks Compatibility Note The Amano Time amp Attendance software is compatible with the following versions of QuickBooks Pro for manual export QuickBooks 2010 and Enterprise 10 0 QuickBooks 2009 and Enterprise 9 0 QuickBooks 2008 and Enterprise 8 0 QuickBooks 2007 and Enterprise 7 0 QuickBooks 2006 and Enterprise 6 0 QuickBooks 2005 and Enterprise 5 0 R5 and later QuickBooks 2005 and Enterprise 5 0 QuickBooks 2004 and Enterprise 3 0 R7 and above QuickBooks 2003 QuickBooks 2002 R2 and above QuickBooks 2002 Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 17 See the following matrix tables for additional information on Speci
176. cter will appear in the Selected list to indicate that a data element was skipped To re order fields in the Assignments Window use the Move Up and Down buttons To Import a file select the import profile for the file from the import profile list and click on the Run import button Export M odule The Export module provides a way to create a profile for the export of employee and schedule data from the Amano Time amp Attendance software Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 47 Creating an Export Profile 1 Click on the Export module within the Output group in the Tree View Wi Time Guardian Plus John_Smith 5 x File Edit Help D Today Daily Activities Description A Employees NM Bldg 3 2009 iJ Bldg 3 2009 export File E5 Timecard fart Communications H Recalculate 69 Output t Reports T Payrolls s Import oa aie ell 2 Click the button to create a new Export profile and the following Export window will appear General Name ina Bldg 3 2009 Description r Bldg 3 2009 export file Documents and Settings jpaxton M had File Name Export Options Export Type AmA as In the Name field enter a name for the Export report profile required field 4 Enter a brief description of the Export report profile in the Description field Enter a file name in the File Name field and press the browse button to establish a path of where the file will be placed 6 Select the Ex
177. ctions during synchronization leave the default value 0 for the Reason Code Otherwise set the Reason Code to a value that is Specific to filter for those transactions that you want to process 4 Click on the Firebird tab to enable the Firebird database e Select Yes if the Nexus 220 database Is on the same PC as Time amp Attendance software e If not select No and enter the appropriate IP Address for the PC which contains the Nexus 220 database e Enter the location or use the file chooser button to select the location for the Nexus 220 database file For example C Program Files Nexus 220 Database DB 220 FDB Step B Synchronize the Time amp Attendance software and Nexus 220 with the following procedure After the Nexus 220 configuration is complete the Synchronize Access Control menu will appear under the Time amp Attendance software File menu Use this menu selection to synchronize Time amp Attendance software with the Nexus 220 system The procedure for this synchronization is as follows 16 4 Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module 1 Synchronize Departments on Time amp Attendance software with Nexus 220 In this process Departments from the Nexus 220 that do not exist in the Time amp Attendance software Labor Names for the Department Labor Level will be brought into the Time amp Attendance software The same will be done for Nexus 220 whereas Labor Names for the Department Labor Level in the
178. d a Posting Allows the employee to schedule posting his or her timecard R eport Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 43 f J Note This function can also be done with Global Assign L from the main employee list see Global A Employees W ages Use this tab as to create increase and or delete wage rates cost for employees ES Bh meee Cafes or General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Wages Nexus 220 ta E ka Les This tab allows you to assign wages to employees The Cost Rate box will only be enabled if a Costis configured in the Rate Setup module for Standard Rate Click on the Add button and a row will appear in the Rates box Enter a rate for the employee in the Rate field In the Operation field select Rate Add to or Percentage Rate is the employee s actual rate Add to will add to the existing rate as defined in Rate Setup Percentage will increase the existing rate for the employee by the percentage as defined in Rate Setup Rates can be increased using the O peration field or by clicking on the Percent Increase button and the following window will appear Jafiej2009 1 Click on the button to enter an effective date for the increase and enter the percentage you wish to increase the rate Click on the button when finished To delete a rate or rate operation select the desired row and click on the Delete button Note C
179. d then an Undefined Punch record will be created in the Time amp Attendance software e Eventually the Nexus 220 Transaction record would be marked as processed in the Nexus 220 database to prevent re processing the same transaction again Note This process only imports NEW Departments Employees T ag holders and Nexus 220 Transactions It does NOT update any existing Departments Employees Tag holders and Nexus 220 Transactions Requirements Relationship Matrix for Time amp Attendance software amp Nexus 220 po Time Guardian Plus Department Labor Name Department Number Employee Number Tagholder Id No Management Type Access Control Master Type Access Control amp Time Access and Time Attendance Employee Tagholder Employee Badge Tagholder Tag Number TRANSACK table s TR_PROCESSED field should be 0 Reason Code TRANSACK table s lf 0 default bring all TR_REASON CODE Punch Transactions AmanoNet Wizard Setup for AmanoNet The following paragraphs detail the steps involved in setting up the AmanoNet Access Control Systems during Employee Setup with the Setup Wizard if the Access Control Module has been activated see Step 7 Employee Setup Wizard for additional Wizard information E mployees Setup for AmanoNet Use to setup access control integration with PIN numbers and or tags for each employee 16 6 Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module The AmanoNet tab
180. d All 1005 Johnson Susan 1006 Avery Ronald Remove Remove All Show Active Employees Only T Show Active Employees Only Note Clicking in the box Show Active Employees Only does not apply for new employees added after the filter profile was set e To add an employee to the report highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the Add button To add all employees to the report click on the Add All button e To remove an employee from the report highlight the desired employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected employees click on the Remove All button 9 8 Time amp Attendance Software Output e Click on the Pay Class tab to utilize available Pay Classes as a filter for employee reports and follow the same preceding procedure e Click on a Department tab to utilize available departments as a filter for employee reports and follow the same preceding procedure Note Report profile settings are associated with the user that was logged into the Time amp Attendance software when the report profiles where created However a user with Admin privileges can click on the X selected users see figure Report Functions amp Examples Audit Report As seen in the following example the Audit Report records every change made in Time Guardian This includes changes made to an employee s punch and the addition or deletion of a Department or any other
181. d enter the desired time When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes Deleting Punches To delete a punch click on the desired IN or OUT Punch field and press the Delete button When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes Adding E diting and Deleting E mployee T ips Adding E mployee Tips To add an employee tip click on the desired Tip field and enter in the desired dollar amount When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes E diting Tips To edit an employee tip double click on the desired Tip field and enter the desired dollar amount When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes Deleting Tips To delete an employee tip click on the desired Tip field and press the Delete button When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes Overtime Authorization If overtime authorization was selected in the Overtime Rules tab from the Pay Class step in the Setup Wizard for e Hours worked before an assigned schedule B Sch Auth e Hours worked beyond an assigned schedule A Sch Auth e Hours worked on an unassigned schedule U Sch Auth you must place a check in the corresponding overtime column B Sch A Sch or U Sch on the timecard on the Punches tab for the employee to be awarded overtime hours see figure Time amp Attendance So
182. d half checked C Day PayCode Hours Overtime monay Ree 80 Tuesday REG so Wweanesoay REG so Thursday REG so Fray Ree so 20 The overtime hours Pay time and half unchecked monay Ree so Tuesday Ree so Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 11 3 3 For Weekly Overtime select the Weekly Overtime template and the Reset date in the fields provided The setup for this overtime allows you to select whether the hours counted will occur in a Weekly Start Pay Period Day of Week Start or Pay Period This is called the overtime reset date e f Weekly Start is selected then you must select the day of the week the reset begins on Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday and Saturday e fthe user chooses Pay Period Day of Week Start then the overtime resets at the day of the week that the pay period actually stated on Note the overtime reset date is configured in the Overtime Definition tab of the Pay Class e Ifthe user chooses Pay Period then the start date of each Pay Period is the start date for the overtime and the overtime will continue for the entire pay period 4 For Consecutive Day Overtime select the Consecutive Day template and the Reset date in the fields provided The setup for the Consecutive Overtime requires overtime reset date which determines if the hours and days worked to qualify must occur in a Weekly Start Pay Peri
183. d start 30 30 After scheduled start Assign schedule when end of shift overlaps by more than oifoo OME 0 Schedule Assignment Based on IN punch 1 Inthe Before scheduled start field enter the amount of time before schedule that an employee s IN punch must occur in to be assigned to a schedule 2 Inthe After scheduled start field enter the amount of time after schedule that an employee s IN punch must occur in to be assigned to a schedule In Punch must be in this windows to apply schedule l Before schedule After sedis 8 00 5 00 p 12 2 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module Schedule Assignment Based on Overlap Enter the amount of time that an employee s shift must overlap the schedule for a schedule to be assigned to the employee 9 00am 5 00pm Scheduled j 2 00pm 8 00pm Uncheduled Schedule 9 00am 4 00pm l J 1 Template Schedules A template schedule is a schedule that an employee has for a particular day Sun Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri or Sat For example Employee 1 will have a schedule setup as follows Sun 8 00 AM 5 00 PM 9 00 AM 6 00 PM st The template schedule consists of start and end times Fixed type only which may span across multiple days limited by maximum shift length Pay Code shift rules and the days to apply the schedule so open schedules do not generate any exceptions on the punches for the day To create Templa
184. d to understand how this selection affects punching in and out For Scenario 1 if Schedule End is selected for an employee that has a schedule 8 00am 5 00pm If the actual last In P unch was 8 20 and the minutes from was set for 120 mins 2 hours then the employee would be automatically punched out at 7 00pm Note the employee must have an Template Schedule or Individual Schedule already defined for this to work or else it will be ignored For Scenario 2 if Last In Punch is selected for an employee that has a schedule 8 00am 5 00pm If the Last In Punch was 08 20am and minutes from was set for 60 mins 1 hour then the employee would be punched out at 09 20am 4 Select the Pay period type choice of Custom and Select the start date for the Pay period with the number of days 5 Click on the rules 6 Click on the Day Change tab icon to display the Rounding Demo view to help understand rounding 39 Pay Class ei General Day Change achadile Rounding j Overtine Definition Overtime Execution Overtime Authorization Holiday Benefit Execution Time 02 00 AM Occurs Before midnight After midnight Override Maximum shift length Shift Requirement Maximum number of punches OMS fe 7 Enter the time in 24 hour format that your business day ends in the Time field 10 8 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module 8 Enter the Maximum shift length or window of time
185. dation highlight the desired item in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all the listed items click on the Add All button e To remove a Labor Level department category from filter for Terminal Validation highlight the desired item in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all the listed items click on the Remove All button e Select the desired sort criteria from the dropdown list the choices are Labor Number and Name Both the Available and Selected lists for terminal validations can be sorted by typing in the Criteria fields above each list 4 Click on Employees tab to filter employees Terminal alidation T T aa E g F Yalidation_salary General Department Employees 5 To filter add employees for the Terminal Validation setting click on the button The Employee Filter window will appear 3 Payclass Department Employee Sort Number Y Criteria Selected By default all employees are selected This filter is deeper as it acts upon the previous filter from the Department tab to filter out employees by selecting the Pay Class and Department tabs Employees that are assigned to the selected Pay Class and or Department will appear in the Available list Also you can use the Employee tab to sort the employee list using Number Badge Payroll Last Name First Name and Comment and then apply the criteria To add an employe
186. des x Pay Code Does your company have paid Holidays J Holidays Press the Pay Code button to configure the Pay Codes that your company will be using see figure At least one Pay Code must be selected for the Time and Attendance software to calculate hours Description Regular Position 1 Primary Type Hours Type Cost Multiplier Billable Multiplier Split Hours Counts Towards Attendance Download to clock ae 1 The Name field is pre defined for the Pay Code and can be changed 6 character maximum allowed However duplicate names are not allowed 2 Inthe Description field enter in a brief description of the Pay Code 3 A Position number is assigned automatically and can be changed 5 digit maximum allowed with no duplicate position numbers This position number is used for display order on reports and the Timecard grid and also used to select the 4 pay codes downloaded to the MTX 15 and or FPT 40 Terminal s 4 See the pre defined Primary Type how the hours awarded to a specific Pay Code Hours corresponds to work hours REG OT and non worked hours SCK VAC Dollars corresponds to monetary amounts given to an employee Bonus Tip Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 9 See the pre defined Hours Type Non worked SCK VAC etc or Worked REG OT In the Cost Multiplier field enter in the cost multiplier for the Pay Code if the default value is not acceptable 7 Int
187. dropdown lists select the Month and Year Click on the desired day in the pop up calendar When you have finished close the calendar and return to the Schedule Rotation window 6 In the Length In Days field select the number of days that this template will span Click on the Pattern to display a schedule grid in the Pattern box The days to be included in the template are indicated by cells see the following figure a PRO Setup Daily Activities Output Preferences Welcome SYSDBA Schedule Rotation Name INJ Flex 4on 3off Description NJ Flex 10hr day Relative Start Date 12 17 2007 I Length In Days 4 Pattern 74 m 31144 E Apply Cancel 7 Click on the button to exit without saving your settings and return to the main Schedule Rotation screen showing a list of already created schedule rotations Note To complete you must have at least one schedule assigned to a day 8 Schedules and Labor Levels are assigned to each day of the rotation by any one of the following methods Existing Template Schedule and Labor Reference To add a template or auto schedule and labor category to a particular day a Select the desired day in the Pattern box with the check box ka b Select desired Template Schedule from the Template Schedules dropdown list 17 10 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module c Select desired Labor Level subcategory from the Labor References dropdown list or click on
188. dual schedule is applied to employee when it qualifies based on the rules setup in Pay Class for schedule assignment To add employees to an Individual Schedule profile 1 Inthe Tree View select the Individual Schedule node within the Daily Activities module see the following figure amp Time Guardian Pro S YSDBA File Edit Help i Today Name w os p S _ H Sg Setup Name Description eh Daily Activities S0r 2otr fram 4pm Mon Frid schedule n J Employees SOFF 20n schedule NI Weekend MFG schedule 3 B Timecard Holiday Schedule p z Salaried Personnel Schedule B P individual Schedule oa Communications A Recalculate FB Payperiods ES Gu utpat Individual Schedule ente Department JOBCLASS LEVEL4 Employee _ General Date Range Fayclass gt Mame lo p Description 3 Entera name for the schedule profile in the Name field required field 4 Enter a brief description of the schedule profile in the Description field 5 Click on the Date Range tab 12 12 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module ad Individual Schedule Sele Cast Center 55 LEVEL4 Employee General Date Range Payclass Date Selection Date Range From Date O Until Forward 1 2 Day s O Backward From the Date Range screen select the following Date Selection Select one of the following choices Today Yesterday Last Ope
189. e 1 Click on the Period Overtime node within the Shifts Module in the Tree View and the following type of screen will appear we Time Guardian John_Smith SE File Edit Help Setup rh Company Name Description dill Users MJ Son 2off Day shift OT NJ Son 2off Day shift OT MFG perso Pay Codes 9G shifts i P Rounding Templates gt SS Exceptions 47 Meal Templates By Shift Overtime gt Outside Shift Overtime Be Daily Rules 5 a Daily Overtime fname Period Overtime General Settings Name NJ Son Zoff Day shift OT Description NJSon Zoff Day shift OT MFG personnel Assianed Day Default _ Fri Period Hours Current Calculated Day Period Length 120 00 v Period starts on First In Punch only Time 08 00 AM 11 14 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module Enter a name for the Period Overtime template in the name field required field Enter a description of the Period Overtime template in the Description field Select Period Hours The choices are Current Calculated Day or Previous Calculated Day of the 1 In P unch 6 Enter the Period Length in HH MM Enter the Time in HH MM for period overtime 8 Click on the check box if you wish the Period to start on the first In Punch only If this setting is not checked a new period will be created for every IN punch When multiple periods are in effect an
190. e Marketing Number 10 Maximum of 4 digits For MTX 15 terminal Description Expires On 2 14 2008 To add a Labor Name click on the button All the fields in the window will go blank In the Name field enter a name for the Labor Name In the number field enter a number that will be associated with the Labor Name Enter a brief description of the Labor Name in the Description field If the Labor Name Is to expire on a specified date click on the button and select an expiration date from the calendar When you have finished click on the button to save your settings and return to the Labor Names window When the labor expires the labor name will be flagged in Red See User Accounts and the EXPIRED LABOR WILL NOT BE DOWNLOADED TO THE CLOCK There is a 4 digit maximum for a labor number that can be downloaded to the MT X 15 terminal clock To modify a Labor Name select the desired Name from the active list and click on the button to view the Labor Names General tab window for that labor name change current labor name to new name and save your changes To add a new Labor Name make an inactive level active by clicking on the box alongside Active Click on the button to save your settings and return to the Labor Levels window After you have finished entering Labor Levels click on the button in the Labor Levels window to save your settings and return to the main tree view W ages To assign a Costor B
191. e Schedule Rounding Overtime Definition Overtime Execution Overtime Authorization Holiday Benefit Execution Order of Benefit Execution Initials Lal CORALS Order Priority of Benefits The execution order Priority of benefits can be set by selecting the benefit category and clicking on the up or down arrows to move the benefit up or down the list 10 10 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module 13 When you have finished click on the button to save your settings The Pay Class will appear as a row in the Table View Viewing Holidays in a Pay Class The Holidays assigned to a Pay Class can be displayed in calendar format by clicking on the button This button is activated when at least one Holiday Group is assigned to the Pay Class The Year field is used to view the current previous or following year s scheduled holidays Click inal icon too print the displayed Holiday calendar and to close the calendar click xX on the LJ button Pay Codes Pay codes determine how an employee s hours will be categorized and displayed throughout the system The Pay codes module will be visible in the tree view when the optional Advanced Pay Class Module is activated To create a Pay code 1 Click on the Pay codes module within the Setup group in the Tree View see the figure A Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA File Edit Help S4 Today SA Setup Descrip
192. e Married Divorce or Widowed Default is Not Specified Educational Level The employee s education level Elementary High School Some College No Degree Associate Bachelor Masters or Doctorate Default is None Specified IM Password Only available if Events Notification module is activated Confirm IM Password Only available if Events Notification module is activated Contact Tab From the Employees screen click on the Contact tab and the following type of screen will appear to enter employee contact information see figure 5 4 Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration ell m E E E ft002 eckson ei a General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level wages Address Street fiz volt Place City Middletown State New Jersey Country T Telephone Home 732 747 1212 Work 973 403 1500 Ext js Cell 908 545 1234 E Mail bjackson amano com Emergency Contact Name lalice Jackson Phone 732 741 5678 Assignments T ab From the Employees screen click on the Assignments tab and the following type of screen will appear eG Employees BET Aeg tooosmith tn A General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Certification Benefit Web Access Nexus220 Pay Class NJ MFG Time Zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada DLS Daily Rule 555_daily_rules Supervised By None v validation O rz TECER
193. e amp Attendance Software Output Exceptions Report The flagging of Exceptions is a valuable piece of information that can be provided by Time Guardian These flags provide managers with a key piece of feedback as to when how and if an employee is punching properly If you did not choose to use Exceptions during the initial installation they can be modified at any time by opening the Setup Wizard from the Edit menu and selecting the Exceptions tab Select the exceptions you wish to track see below for additional method As seen in the following example the Exceptions Report includes the Name Employee Number and Badge Number It provides a list of the Exceptions that were generated based on the settings selected in the Exceptions section of the Wizard The report also includes reasons provided in the Main operations window Employees may have multiple Exceptions for the Same day depending on the settings provided If no exceptions were selected during the Setup Wizard then this report will be blank Exceptions Report Date range Jun 1 2009 Aug 17 2009 Date In Code Out Code Daily Exceptions Schedule Employee 1002 Badge 1235 Name Bill Jackson Jul 1 2009 Wed Wed 08 00 Wed 17 00 Jul 2 2009 Thu Thu 09 00 Thu 06 00 Jul 3 2009 Fri 09 00 Fri 06 00 Jul 4 2009 Sat 09 00 Sat 13 00 By default all Exception codes are selected during the Setup Wizard and are included in the report Historical H
194. e amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 29 These 9 standard exceptions are El Early In LO Late Out LM Long Meal EQ Early Out MP MissingPunch SM Short Meal Li Late In ABS Absence UNSCH Not Scheduled You may choose to track all some or none of these exceptions The table below gives an example of the exceptions that would be displayed for an employee who was assigned to an 08 30 AM to 17 00 PM schedule These Exceptions are based on the recorded IN and OUT punches Day inPunch OUTPunch Exceptions Schedule In the example above an employee has a schedule for Monday through Friday and worked on Saturday so the UNSCH exception would be displayed indicating that no schedule was found for that day 2 After completing the entry selection of information for Step 6 Exception Setup click on the Next Ec button to advance to Step 7 Employee Setup Step 7 Employee Setup W izard R equired W izard Setup Step Setup Wizard Step 7 Employee Setu Do you want to import employee s information from a specific file No Yes a Employee Import Would you like to create employees at this time amp Employee sync Employee s with QuickBooks Both ways 3 30 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Do you want to import employees from Access Control Answer Yes to this question if you want to use this built in import feature This feature allows you to import Time and Attendance employe
195. e Apply button Step 5 With Apache Tomcat 6 selected click Restart to immediately start the service Step 6 Close Computer Management screen as you are finished configuring and starting the required Apache Tomcat 6 service From now on the service will start automatically The description of this module will utilize Time Guardian Pro screens for illustrative purposes The activation of the Web Interface Module provides a punch web view that allows the employee to punch IN or OUT This operates with same functionality as the Amano MTX 15 and or FPT 40 clock provides The employee may be capable of doing labor transfers from the punch submission screen Also the employee will be able to denote whether the punch is for a coffee break break or meal However the Web Interface Module will provide two 2 distinct parts capabilities 1 part will be for employee access and the 2 part will be for supervisor only access The sections of the Time amp Attendance Software affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Employee Configuration Web Access e Employee Global Assign Web Access e Employee Portal Web Punch In 17 2 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module View Previous Punches View Time Sheet Make Adjustments Reset Password Run Schedule Posting Report e Supervisor Portal Access list of Supervise Employees Add Edit Delete
196. e Employees window will appear with the fields populated with the information of the selected employee Make the desired edits and use as the Save As l button to make a copy of an existing employee with different information i e name etc Use the Save Le button to save the current employee information and not exit to the Employee tree view list Use the Apply ka button to save and exit to the Employee tree view list These functions are present on all of the Employees tab screens Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration 5 15 5 16 This page intentionally left blank Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration Chapter 6 Timecard Administration Timecard M odule Employee punches can be viewed added edited and deleted in the Timecard module The Timecard module is accessed by selecting the Timecard module within the Daily Activities group in the Tree View i time Guardian Plus John_Smith File Edit Help Today Daily Activities M Employees a Communications First Name A Recalculate Middle Name 63 Output Exception 4 Reports Payclass 5 Payralls Gi Import a Export a S gt Auto Process Employees can be initially filtered in ascending order by using a field with a dropdown list located on the top of the Timecard window see above figure The choices in this list are Number Badge Number Payroll Last Name First Name Middle Name Exception Pay Class Schedu
197. e Save button in the toolbar to save your changes A PRO Setup Daily Activities Output Preferences Welcome SYSDBA Toggle row with checkmark for possible deletion Timecard payperiods 9 29 06 10 12 06 right click to select delete F TZ Day IN Punch IN Punch Puyfch OUT Punch Total Hours Adjustment Break Hour Exception Fri lept Sat 10 1 2006 Sun EDT Sun O 10 2 2006 mon EDT Mon E 10 3 2006 ue EDT O 10 4 2006 wed EDT O 10 5 2006 Thu EDT O 10 6 2006 Fri EDT C 10 7 2006 lt oessa osson 1o UNSCH LI LO ea ea eal alk j AR i M LI LO LI LO Select All fsa 7 TIERE EES ES ES Adding E diting and Deleting E mployee T ips Adding E mployee T ips W eb To add an employee tip click on the desired Tip field and enter in the desired dollar amount When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes E diting T ips W eb To edit an employee tip click on the desired Tip field and enter the desired dollar amount When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes Deleting T ips W eb To delete an employee tip click on the desired Tip field highlight the tip right click and select delete When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes 17 24 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module Schedule Override Overriding a
198. e created After the completion of Step 9 Login Setup click on the Wizard Complete Ki button to end the Setup Wizard Once the initial setup is complete the Setup Wizard can be accessed and used at any time to make setup modifications For instructions on how to do this please refer to the section about Setup Wizard R egistration Please perform on line registration after successful initial Time amp Attendance software activation or return the enclosed warranty registration card Amano Customer Support On Line Help Can be accessed through the main menu in the software or most windows by clicking on the button E Mail Support Support is provided via e mail at TGS upport amano com A zip file with your settings should be sent to Amano support for diagnostic troubleshooting 1 4 Time amp Attendance Software Introduction Amano One on One T echnical Support O ptions Toll Free support number is 1 800 253 9836 e The first 30 days of support is provided free of charge however this only applies to installation and set up questions and requires the user to complete the warranty registration card e After 30 days users requiring phone support will be charged a fee per incident or the user Can purchase a support contract e A Support Contract contact support for fee includes software support for one year and also includes free software updates Also a hardware Support Contract contact support for fee is avail
199. e credited to using the dropdown list The choices are None Meals Breaks Coffee Breaks All Breaks Breaks and Meals Coffee Breaks and Meals or All Breaks and Meals 6 Inthe Maximum Amount field enter the maximum amount of time HH MM that will be credited 7 Inthe Coffee Break Credit box select how the unused Coffee Break time will be credited to using the dropdown list The choices are None Meals Breaks Coffee Breaks All Breaks Breaks and Meals Coffee Breaks and Meals or All Breaks and Meals 8 Inthe Maximum Amount field enter the maximum amount of time HH MM that will be credited 13 16 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module Chapter 14 Advanced Rounding Module Advanced Rounding M odule Introduction Rounding is the act of moving the employee s punches or hours to an even amount that will make it easier for end user calculations Rounding is done in two ways The first type of rounding is rounding individual punches while the second type is rounding the hours that the punches make up Note Hours rounding cannot be done in conjunction with punching rounding The user has a choice of either using punch rounding or hour rounding parts The sections of the Time amp Attendance Software affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Advanced Pay Class Weekly Rounding with day of week reset Pay Period Rounding Meal Break Rounding Hours Rounding or Punch Ro
200. e employee takes a 10 minute break and 55 minute meal The 10 minutes that employee did not take for the break will be applied to the 10 minutes the employee went over on the meal No extra time will be deducted from the employee for taking a longer meal than allowed The total time taken from the employee is 65 minutes If the Break Credit is not used set to None then 75 minutes would deducted from the employee 20 minutes for breaks and 55 minutes for meal To configure the Break Credit 1 Click on the Meal Templates node within the Shifts module in the Tree View Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module 13 15 2 Click on the aa button and the Meal Templates window will appear Click on the Break Credit tab t Meal Templates General Breaks Coffee Breaks Meals gt Break Credit Meal Credit Allow unused meal time to be credited to Maximum Amount Break Credit Allow unused break time to be credited to Maximum Amount Coffee Break Credit Allow unused coffee break time to be credited to Maximum Amount 3 Inthe Meal Credit box select how the unused meal time will be credited to using the dropdown list The choices are None Meals Breaks Coffee Breaks All Breaks Breaks and Meals Coffee Breaks and Meals or All Breaks and Meals 4 Inthe Maximum Amount field enter the maximum amount of time HH MM that will be credited 5 Inthe Break Credit box select how the unused Break time will b
201. e following figure will be the 5 to appear This corresponds to the Wages tab found on the Employees screen see Wages Tab g Global Apply Cost rate ssign Rate Template Template Rate 9 Effective Date Assign Rate Table Operation The Cost Rate window allows the user to specify and apply rate settings by clicking on the radio button next to the selection If the radio button is not selected then the selection will not be applied to the employee s The user can choose to Assign Rate Table or Assign Rate Increase Note the first option would replace the existing settings with the new settings while the 2 option is only applied to employees with a Rate Table Additionally if assigning a Rate Table the user can choose to Override the employee s existing Rate Table with the new settings by clicking on the Override checkbox In this example all selected employees from employee list will be assigned a Rate Table If they already have a Rate Table the specified rate would be added to it 5 12 Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration When the Global Apply Wizard is completed all these settings will be applied to all the employee s selected on the list Certification Global Apply If selected the Certification window for the Global Apply Wizard see the following figure will be the 6 to appear This corresponds to the Certification tab found on the Employees screen Note This global apply
202. e information from the Access Control database directly into the Time amp Attendance software Note This feature is only active if you selected in Step 1 General Setup Yes to integrate Access Control Also the Access Control module has to be activated 1 To use this feature select the Tag Holder Type from the dropdown menu choices of Access and Time or Access only Note Employees imported with the Tag Holder Type of Access only will be marked in the Access Control database as Access and Time 2 Press the Find button see figure to search for the Access Control database you will need to know the name and location of the import file EJ Access Control Import General Tag Holder Type Access only New Employee s in S 4 Access onl Find Clear View Log C Select All Clear Messages Employees who cannot be imported will appear in the information message box indicated in red with a description of why they failed to meet import criteria Select the employees you desire from the list of found employees by clicking in the Select column or check Select All Press the Run Import button and the employees will be imported into the Time Guardian database with confirmation information appearing in the message box in blue see figure for TG Plus example Importing Employees to Time Guardian Plus Importing 3 employee s Imported 111 Poulton Alan Imported 1 Plumber Joe Imported 222 Mana
203. e of the Overrides Columns which is set the same way as the Adjustment Columns lumna Microsoft lintenned Txplarci x E yi Pi Sarih LP Fraates F aA b te ee ee ere nie r ae Time Guardian H Setun Daily Acwuihisa Output Preferarncas User Preferences Overrides Columns Column Width Dair Te Day ay Schedule 125 Fin Cost Cambler Joboliess LEVELS LEWELA LEVELS LEVELG Rone Payoude Muurs anmannan E EK I El E Comments Reason Apply F AMANO Ariane Gita Ges 140 Haren Ave emelernd PI OUTES IJD E0 626 26 Lpyhoh IWA Aurea Cinna int A vighls wsered Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 21 Exception C olors M enu Selection W eb The Exception Colors submenu is used to change the colors for Exceptions in the Timecard grid MPNT for Meal Penalty now exists Select the Exception Colors and the following User Preferences Exception Colors window will appear User Preferences Exception Colors Laren hey Kimm aras 4 oo i rii p T we Gc Py 7 E TT 33 45 B D Earn reed ER Dany chet arrak POM Late bn Break LIB Late Out ireak dLE Earig n Stead dE Barty Chet Meal i C4 Late be Mead LIM Late Ont heal LOA T k E rc i Fy T E To define colors for exception colors click on the button on the desired color column and select a color from the Pick A Color palette To restore the defa
204. e that a data element was skipped To re order fields in the Selected Window use the Move Up and Move Down buttons 9 Click on the Run import ie button to Import an employee file into the Time amp Attendance software 10 Click on the Apply zi button to save the Import information and return to the Step 7 Employee Setup Click on the Close bg button close the Import window without saving Would you like to create employees at this time Click Yes for this question and press the Employee button if you want to enter employees The Employees module see figure of the Time amp Attendance software allows you to have up to one hundred 100 active employees and assign them a schedule with Pay Class and wages Note Optional additional active employee amounts are available upon activation for incremental increase all the way up to an unlimited number of employees Each employee record requires a unique Employee and Badge number both of which are entered in the Employee module on the General tab see figure The standard Employees module for Time Guardian consists of seven 7 tabs General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level and Wages Activation of the Access Control module can add Nexus 220 or AmanoNet for access control when selected in Wizard Setup Stepl Activation of the Benefit Time module will add the Certification and Benefit tabs Activation of the Web Access module will add the Web Access tab The Pay Typ
205. e to the Terminal Validation highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all the listed employees click on the Add All button Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 47 To remove an employee from the Terminal Validation highlight the desired employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all the listed employees click on the Remove All button Do you want to configure Bell Schedules If Yes is selected for Bell Schedules click the Bell Schedule button and the Bell Schedules screen will appear see figure i Bell Schedules Bialr ogajojo f General Name JaFternoon_Break Description Factory standard main floor break as per union Special Note Selecting Holidays will only work with HandPunches all HandPunch models A Bell schedule requires you to enter the Duration for the bell to ring the time of day for the bell to ring and the days of the week Multiple entries can be made for Bell Schedules with different duration and day assignments Bell Schedules are downloaded to the selected terminals by location in the Communications module To do so perform the following 1 Create a new Bell Schedule and you will be required to enter a name for the Bell Schedule yellow required field 2 Inthe Description field enter in a brief description of the Bell Schedule 3 Click on the Add button A blank row will appear in the Bells grid
206. e will only be active when Salary has been selected for the Type of Employee The Time amp Attendance software has two Employee Types e Hourly employees These employees are required to punch at the clock in order for hours to be calculated and awarded e Salary employees These employees must have an assigned schedule and are paid automatically either By Hour or By Schedule Note Remember when creating a Salary Employee you must have a schedule before hours will be calculated A salaried employee with Pay by Hour can punch for exception tracking while a salaried employee with Pay by Schedule cannot punch You can lookup employees from any of the Employee screens by clicking on the Filter Employee icon on the top of each Employees screen to filter employees with using Pay Class department and or employee criteria The following is an example of the screen that will appear when you click on the Employee tab from the Employee Filter screen Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 35 Bemployee rier Payclass Department Employee Remove All P Show Active Employees Only I Show Active Employees Only By default all employees are selected You can filter out employees by selecting e To add an employee to the list highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the Add button To add all employees to the list click on the Add All button e To remove an employee from the list highlight the de
207. eak or Coffee break plus the time taken for Regular break or Coffee break e Allowed break and amount under or over Which is the amount of time the employee is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break and which is the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break 11 In the Deduction for Long Break box set how the break will be deducted if the employee uses a longer period of time than allocated for the break a Inthe Threshold field enter the amount of time HH MM that will be used in the determination b Inthe Less and More Than Threshold fields set the conditions if the time taken for the break is either less or more than the threshold in the fields provided They choices are e Allowed break Which Is the amount of time the employee is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break e Amount taken Which is the amount of time the employee actual punched out for the Regular break or Coffee break e Amount under or over Equals the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break e Nothing Means to deduct no time from the employee e Allowed break and taken time Which will deduct the time allocated for Regular break or Coffee break plus the time taken for Regular break or Coffee break e Allowed break and amount under or over Which is the amount of time the employee is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break a
208. ect date L Global Apply or Edit Exception list filter preferences Run Import R un Export Rounding Demo y Open timecard with exception gt shor rereronecs list filter Find terminals Edit labor names Send map templates for FPT Clear map templates for FP T 40 40 terminal only terminal only Receive map templates for FPT 40 terminal only 3 2 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Highlighted Fields Yellow Indicates that the field is required data must be entered Red Indicates an error or data not entered for a required field Icon Toolbar The following icons are used in most Amano Time amp Attendance modules and if they are present they will have the same universal function which is e Tocreate a new item for example user click on the Add aa button and enter the appropriate information Note However if you desire to save the item i e User without closing the open window simply click on the Save button e Use the navigation arrow K 0 a buttons to move between the First Previous Next or Last item i e User in the list which appears on the top right of the open screen e To delete an item i e Bell User navigate to the desired item i e User and click on the Delete m button Click on the Yes button when the warning dialogue appears e Click on the Apply A button to save the selected item i e User and close the open window or click on the Close bg button
209. ected Add all Remove Remove All Tr By default all Pay Classes are selected and will appear in the Selected list Pay Classes can be removed from the Group by selecting them in the Selected list and clicking on the Remove button All the Pay Classes can be removed from the Selected list by clicking on the Remove All button 9 Click on the Department tab This tab is used to set the labor categories within each labor level that the user has access to Note If a labor level is marked red it has expired 7 Users General Password Pay Class Department Employee Sort Labor Number Criteria Criteria Labor Number x Name Available Selected 1 Default 2 Engineering sie 3 TEST 4 Parking Support Add al 5 Integration 7 Finance Remove 8 Parking 9 OA Department 10 R amp D Remove All 11 Service J M 12 Trainina wu e 10 By default all labor categories are selected and will appear in the Selected list Labor categories can be removed from the Group by selecting them in the Selected list and clicking on the Remove button All the labor categories can be removed from the Selected list by clicking on the Remove All button Labor categories can be simultaneously filtered in both the Available and Selected lists in ascending order by using the Sort field dropdown list The choices in this
210. ed employees click on the Remove All button e Use the Sortfield dropdown list to sort employees The choices are Number Badge Payroll Last Name First Name or Comment e Use the Criteria field above the Available and Selected lists to filter sort employees in the respective list The choices are Number Badge Payroll Last Name First Name or Comment e Click on the Apply A button and the following Global Edit dialog box will appear Global Edit x x Do another global edit e Click on the Yes button to configure another global edit or No to exit global editing of timecards Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration 6 17 6 18 This page intentionally left blank Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration Chapter 7 Communications The Communications module is used to remotely communicate with terminals in setup locations Locations and Terminals can be configured during the Setup Wizard Step 8 Terminal Setup Operations include polling downloading setting the time and viewing specific terminal settings in a location Polling or polled operation refers to actively sampling the status of the external terminals by the client program Time amp Attendance software Downloading is utilized to send data to the remote terminals from the Time amp Attendance software such as the Lock in schedule at the MT X 15 terminal which is derived from the employee schedule and or Pay Class sched
211. ed for hours punched to go to payroll B Sch Auth Before Schedule Authorization required note hidden if not selected see step 5 Pay Class from Setup Wizard A Sch Auth After Schedule Authonzation required note hidden if not selected see Step 5 Pay Class from Setup Wizard U Sch Auth Unscheduled Authorization required note hidden if not selected see Step 5 Pay Class from Setup Wizard Home Labor Level for Department user defined Tips in dollars separate from bonus dollars Comments Reason Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration 6 3 Note If the Advanced Labor Rate module Is activated the Timecard can show the Billable Rates depending upon the User privileges Information Indicators The Indicator field in the Punches tab displays symbols to indicate that certain data in the Timecard grid was entered or modified The indicator symbols are as follows Symbols 7 Comment Reason exists Cs moes Punches were edited Labor transfer exist for this row Override performed Note By putting the mouse over the icon you can see the information that the icon represents Overrides Tab This function allows post calculation overrides for only the existing employee hours for an employee assigned to a schedule For all other Timecard modifications see Punches and Adjustments tabs To perform an employee Timecard override click on the Overrides tab then click on the Hours cell in the grid fo
212. ed to reach Levell s threshold value Note You can select all the Pay codes in a given column by clicking on the column heading You can also deselect any checked Pay codes in a column by clicking on the column heading Also you can select unselect all pay codes by clicking on the Check Uncheck All Icon Outside Shift Overtime Outside Shift overtime allows you to create a finite set of overtime rules for employees that work before or after their scheduled Shift or Schedule Up to 4 levels of Outside Shift Overtime can be used Each level can be assigned its own threshold limit Hours worked beyond the threshold will be moved to the specified OT pay code To create an Outside Shift Overtime template 1 Click on the Outside Shift Overtime node in the Shifts module in the Tree View see figure F Time Guardian John_Smith Fie Edit Help Ei Today 2 Setup a h Company 48 Users Pay Codes 9 Shifts P Rounding Templates Exceptions YT Meal Templates a Shift Overtime De Daily Rules Pay Class Pa Schedule Description AJ MFG Holiday Temporary Workers 2 Click on the isa button and the Outside Shift Overtime window will appear 11 8 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module Outside Shift Overtime Seles General Before Shift After Shift Mame Holiday Workers Description WI MFS Holiday Tempory Workers Before Shift After Shift 3 E
213. eeeseeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeseesesaeeeeaeseseeetanses 12 2 Chapter 13 Advanced Meal Module ssssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 13 1 Advanced Meal Module Introduction cccesccssseccseeccsseeceueeeeeeeeseseeseeserseseesserseseesasseragss 13 1 Using the Advanced Meal Module ccccssecccsseecsneeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeseeseeeeeaeeersusesaesenansees 13 2 Chapter 14 Advanced Rounding Module ssssssssssnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 14 1 Advanced Rounding Module Introduction cccccssecccseeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeraeeeeseeseaeesesaeseraess 14 1 Using the Advanced Rounding Module ssssssssssrrnesrnerrrerrnsrrrsrrnrrnnrrnnrrrnrrrnrrrsrnerrrerreerree 14 2 Chapter 15 Advanced Labor Rate Module s ssssssssunssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 15 1 Advanced Labor Rate Module Introduction cccccsssccsseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeseeseeeerausesaeeseanerenas 15 1 Using the Advanced Labor R ate Module ccccccsssccsseeceseecsnseeeaeseeseseeeaeeerseeeraeeeesasserages 15 1 Chapter 16 Access Control Module sictntissinistinesreia EO 16 1 Access Control Module Introduction micniieiisianinn nani wamain mariana 16 1 Using Access Control Module sesssesrsesrsesrrnsrrerrnerrnnrrrnrrrnsrrnsrrnsrnnrrnnrrnnrrrerrrnrrnnrreerrrerre 16 2 ji Time amp Attendance Software Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 17
214. een the Time amp Attendance software PC and the connected terminals Integration with Nexus220 and AmanoNet 7 6 for Access control systems may require the activation of Access Control module which is standard in Time Guardian Pro If the Wizard Complete button is not active you must review your setup verifying that all mandatory fields in red have been completed When all required fields are complete the Wizard Complete button will then be displayed Should you have any questions or require additional information please email TGSupport Amano com The following information will sequentially guide the user through the Setup Wizard data entry See the remaining sections of this Time amp Attendance software Installation amp User Guide for more additional functional descriptions especially sections describing the functionality of the Advanced Modules Note Time Guardian screens are used for illustrative purposes in the Setup Wizard Some advanced modules may have been activated to illustrate their setup features Step 1 General Setup W izard Optional W izard Setup Step Setup Wizard Step 1 General Setup Define your Campany profile Jh Company Do you want to integrate Access Control Do you want to send employee hours to your payroll software O No G Yes Quickbooks Pro v How do you want to export QuickBooks Is QuickBooks installed on the current PC Define your Company profile From Step 1 General Setu
215. elect the way in which you would like to view the employee data Hire Date The first date that an employee begins working for an employer Historical Report This report displays all historical data for an employee for a given length of time including absence exception and pay code information Holiday An assigned day off Holidays Located under the Pay Codes setup this menu allows holidays to be assigned a pay code and the number of hours to be paid Hourly One of two types of employee designations used by the Time and Attendance software when calculating time Hours Display Determines how hours are displayed throughout the system There are two options Minutes and 100 of hours G 4 Time amp Attendance Software Glossary Hours Grid Displays a complete history of employee activity for a given date range Hours Worked Report Displays a complete history of hours worked by date and employee range Import Extracting data from third party software and adding it to the Time and Attendance software Inactive Date The date on which an employee s hours are no longer calculated by the system Initialize Used in conjunction with the terminal to establish communication Late In LI An exception used to identify late IN punches for an employee Long Meal LM An exception used to identify a long meal by an employee Late Out LO An exception used to identify late OUT punches for an employee Login Profile
216. elements from one another The choices are Tab Comma Pipe Semicolon Backslash Forward slash or User Defined If User Defined is selected you must enter the character in the field provided b Text Qualifier Selecta Text Qualifier from the dropdown list The choices are None Single Quote or Double Quote The Text Qualifier is the character which encapsulates a data element i e California Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 45 e Date Format Select the date format from the dropdown lists The choices are Month 1 Month 01 Month J an Month J anuary Year 90 Year 1990 Day 1 Day 01 and Day Mon Hour Format Select the hour format The choices are Hour 8 00 Hour 08 00 Hour 08 00 or Minutes 480 Full Name Format Select the Full Name Format from the dropdown list Note This field will be available for assignment in the Import Field Map Settings tab 8 Click on the Import Default Settings tab This tab allows you set the defaults for data being imported Select the following Note Import General Import File Format Settings Import Default Settings Import Field Map Settings Employee Number Badge Payroll Number As it is As itis As it is O Same As Badge O Same As Employee Number O Same As Employee Number Manual Increment From Manual Increment From Default Labor Default Assignment Department Default Pay Class NJ MFG Schedule None
217. emains as the master If employee is changed in the Time amp Attendance software the employee change must be updated in QuickBooks to maintain good synchronization When you have finished click on the button to save your settings Note This function can also be done with Global Apply command from the main employee list Create a new Employee and you will be required to enter a Name etc Click on the necessary tabs to complete the entry of employee information See the following paragraphs for description Also see the Employee Administration chapter 3 36 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard E mployees G eneral D000 mA General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Wages Nexus 220 Number Badge Payroll Last Name Middle Name First Name Hire Date 7 9 2008 a s lt lt Inactive Inactive Date PE C Hourly Salary Pay Type I Supervisor Authority Level None Ze Hours Schedule Reject Threshold Defaut Comment Hours New Improcess Q C Management Type Access Control amp Time Attendance v When using an MTX 15 terminal the Time amp Attendance software provides you with two options to punch with a badge or with a specific PIN number The FPT 40 terminal provides you with two options to punch with a specific ID number or biometric template fingerprint e Badges When Badges are used the Badge PIN Number section of the Employee Setup needs to
218. emplates created here are assigned to employees in the Wage tab of the Employees module Note There must first be combined billable rates setup in the Rate Setup module under Company before using this module To create a Billable Cost Rate 1 Select Combined Billable Rates module within the Company group in the Tree View see the following figure A Time Guardian Pro SY5DBA File Edit Help a dl Today Type J Si a Setup Type Use Table Employee Cost Center 55 Department JOBCLASS bh Company billable rate 1002 Smith J 3 CCS 1 Default 1 Default oa Labor Levels Bilable rate TE B Rate Setup Billable rate 1007 Patel RB 3 CCS 1 Default 1 Default 3 l F Fate Template Dr Combined Cost Rates n Paycodes a a 4 ltl 3S Shifts The items assigned to the Billable Rate Order in the Combined tab of the Rate Setup window will appear in the Combined Cost Rates window 2 Click on the kaa button and the following is an example of the Combined Billable Rates window that will appear Combined Billable Rates General C Use Rate Template Employee 1002 Smith John Cost Center 55 3 C3 Department 1 Default JOBCLASS 1 Default LEVEL4 1 Default Rates Date Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module 15 11 3 Using the dropdown lists provided select the employee or the Labor Level subcategory you
219. employee can receive overtime for each period 9 Click on the Settings tab and the following type of screen will appear lt gt Period Overtime General Settings Day of week Holidayts Defaut eg a m Level Count Base Levelli Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 From 00 00 08 00 22 00 ECR To 08 00 Schedule 2200 oT w ica 10 In the Level tab select the day of the week that this overtime rule will apply to using the Day of the Week Holiday s field The choices are Sunday through Saturday Default or Holiday Group The Default setting will be used for any day s or Holiday s not defined explicitly Enter the threshold limits and assign a Pay Code to each level of overtime 11 Click on the Count tab and the following window will appear lt Period Overtime General Settings Day of week Holiday s efaut RA Ss Level Count N z a za E m m E E E i Gl gi LI poopopoopopr0o0mm s ooooooooRE 3 poopoooopo00 opoppr00000 4 g 12 On the Count table check the Pay Codes in each column that you want to be combined to achieve each level s threshold For example if you checked REG and HOL in the Levell column then the hours for REG and HOL Pay Codes will be combined to reach Levell1 s threshold value Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime
220. ent This option will install client file for database connection and all application files on client PC ZA no If Server was selected as an installation option you will be prompted to enter the IP Address of the Time amp Attendance Software Server Enter the IP Address and click on the Next button If you did not select server in Step 4 just click on the Next button to proceed to Step 6 However if Client was selected as an installation option you will be prompted to choose Time Guardian Server Folder The Choose Install Folder screen will appear The default installation folder will be displayed If you would like to install the Time amp Attendance Software in another folder click on the Choose button To reset this field click on the Restore Default Folder button After you have made your selection click on the Next button Time Guardian Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Set D Choose Install Folder Where Would You Like to Install DoR Choose Install Folder i C Time Guardian Restore Default Folder Previous Note Amano recommends not installing the Time amp Attendance software inside the Program Files folder 7 The Choose Database Option screen will appear Select either Firebird SQL or Microsoft SQL and click on the Next button If you chose Microsoft SQL the Firebird Database Service does not have to be installed configured Time amp Attendance Softwa
221. enter the End Time in the Time field 12 16 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module To copy an already existing schedule select the desired Template Schedule using the Template Schedule list or the Ed Ld mj and buttons Enter a new schedule name and click on the button Click on the button to apply your settings and return to the Individual Scheduler window The schedule you just created will appear in the Template Schedule list Note Double clicking on any cell within the Individual Scheduler grid will launch the following Individual Schedule screen A Individual Schedule General Type Fixed Paycode REG Shift 50n 2off 7am 4pm o Schedule Time Start Day 1 day before EndDay Start Time 07 00 AM End Time 04 00 PM Labor Cost Center 55 3 CC3 v LEVEL4 1 Default Department 1 Default v JOBCLASS 1 Default v Home Labor Reset e Labor Reference This field represents the labor categories that will be used in the Individual Schedule You can select the labor categories from the dropdown list or click on the button from the Individual Scheduler screen to create a custom labor reference The following window will appear A Labor References Labor Level 1 3 CC3 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 6 0 1 1 Labor Level 2 4 Department Lab 19 1 1 1 1 1 Labor Level3 6 JOBCLASS Labor l Labor Level 4 10 Standard Rate f Delete To add a
222. entially 2 5 hrs OT No hours in timecard No Option Unscheduled hours must be 10 00 14 00 S 0 hours authorized With authorization 4 chedule 3 h ours with potential for counting towards OT 4 Selectthe Daily overtime after and enter the hours to award overtime after the assigned number of hours have been worked in a day Daily Overtime is the time an employee works that extends beyond a certain level of time set by the company s policies Daily overtime is based on hours worked and is a way of rewarding the employee for working more hours than a set hour value in one day The hours that exceed the set hour value are normally paid ata higher wage or rate Up to 2 levels of Daily Overtime can be used Each level can be assigned its own threshold limit that move the hours from one Pay Code to another The following table shows an example Daily Hours Hours Pay Code Default Overtime From To Multiplier ee ooo f o e f e C iwen f eo i oo o s C iwa 1000 o or 20 5 Select the Weekly overtime after and enter the hours to award overtime after the assigned number of hours have been worked in a week Weekly Overtime rewards employee s overtime hours for working more hours than a set hour value for that particular week or pay period The hours that exceed the set hour value are normally paid at a higher wage than regular REG Pay Code hours Weekly Overtime is set in the Weekly Overtime window which is accessed
223. entually the AmanoNet Transaction record would be marked as processed in the AmanoNet database to prevent re processing the same transaction again Note These processes only bring in NEW Departments Employees Tag holders and AmanoNet Transactions It does NOT update any existing Departments Employees T ag holders and AmanoNet Transactions 16 10 Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module Requirements Relationship Matrix for Amano Time amp Attendance software and AmanoNet 7 6 Time Guardian Plus AmanoNet 7 6 panna Hane Employee Number Tagholder Id No Must be Active Empl I Tagholder Management Type SETETE PES Access Control Tagholder Type Access Control amp Time Access and Time Attendance Employee Badge Tagholder Tag Code NIA TRANSACK table s TR_ PROCESSED field should be T Punch Transactions Reason Code TRANSACK table s If0 default bring all TR_REASON CODE Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module 16 11 This page intentionally left blank 16 12 Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module Chapter 17 Web Interface Module W eb Interface M odule Introduction Time Guardian Pro comes standard with the Web Interface module while Time Guardian and Time Guardian Plus require itto be activated as an optional module Note Time Guardian and Time Guardian Plus require the Apache Tomcat 6 service to be started and configured to automatic
224. er 192 168 3 197 Create Account a Cancel Save 4 Enter the changes to the Profile and click Save 5 Restartthe IM Client and login 6 Change the Domain to the server s IP Address then click Continue lie Mocamp velop Mbtreoull beret kapklinis Be p Yew Figcetiec Tock Help i Le e d Ph poet Jp en Glen G2 aja E henoh27 0 0 DAA Henge Pract setongs BE Jive Messenger Setup Situp Progress Server Settitgs rouge iann elt are host settings for this server Note the suggested value for the domain m Sere Sete hased on the network satinga of this machine 6 Dumun Sr Doman 1a ee ae Healt a DP adren of ide aera Admin Console Port amai Aden ACON Bort suri fe ee wabebaded adimin pondole del mull ii e901 Secure Admin Conan Fort sana Port sufibetr Tar thee eel baded aren aondete inreingh EBL tastant it TOWYN ves O ho Enabled or dingbeed paidia HME conection 2 irra Briad C rtin ia Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module 20 11 7 Inthe Data source Settings screen select Embedded Database and click Continue 20 12 Yew Foarte Took tb j ath Pe Farortes Eis g gs E Hatp 177 0 0 Oju dtaca pp Datasource Settings Choose how you would lke t connect to the Jive Messenger database Standard Database Connection Ves an external database with the builtin connection pool gt Embedded Database Use an embedded database pow
225. er key must be pressed after the 10th digit is entered Access Tries The number of hand reading attempts a user is permitted to try hand readings before being refused The default Is 6 Passwords The following fields are used to assign the Command Mode Group passwords for the selected terminal Each password may be up to 10 digits long a Security Disable the hand reading checks in the terminal required field b Enrollment Enroll and remove users required field c Management General system management operations required field d Setup Set the baud rate and number of the terminal required field e Service Access to service and diagnostic functions required field Punch Mode Select one or both of the following data entry modes a Explicit Punch If checked the Explicit Punch Menu will be enabled at the terminal b Department Code If checked a Department Code will be requested each time a user punches otherwise the user must press the key once before entering their ID number to display the Department Code prompt 23 To update the terminal settings click on the Update button This will download the current settings in this window to the terminal 24 After completing the entry selection of information for Step 8 Terminal Setup click on the Next al button to advance to Step 9 Login Setup Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 53 Step 9 Login Setup Wizard R equired E Setup Wizard Ple
226. ered by MSQLO8 The option requires no external database configuration and is an easy way to get rur quickly Mowewer this i not reconinmended for large ratallatiorts Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module Chapter 21 Benefit Time Module Benefit Time M odule Introduction The benefit time Module provides de accrual which allows the user to track benefit time an employee has accumulated and used The de accrual is a manual process by which the user manually tells the system how much benefit time the employee has The system will deduct any time the employee takes from the benefit Pay Code selected It consist of 1 Supervisor Time Card will check balance before authorization 2 Supervisor Advanced scheduling check balance before authorization 3 Employee balance The Time amp Attendance software sections affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Company Benefit tracking Type De Accrual or Import Balances e Employee configuration Employee Manual Balance Adjustment Employee Balance display e Employee Time Card Display employee Benefit Balances for non worked hours type Pay Codes e Advanced Pay Class Benefit execution order e Reports De Accrual Balance Report De Accrual History Report Using the Benefit Time M odule Benefit T ab Note This feature will only be visible allowed in the following instances when the Benefit Time Module ha
227. es and Adjustments Timecard gnds Previous Paypenods can only be adjusted if they are still open by using the Punches tab for punches and the Adjustments tab for Add Punch Adds a punch to the selected row based on schedule Inserts a row above the selected row in the Timecard Add Row i grid Deletes the selected row in the Timecard grid Displays either the Actual or Rounded punch times in the Punches Timecard grid Paypenod i s This dropdown list allows you to select employee punch R ded unch AME cdi type of actual or rounded Activation of the following modules will add these associated icons User Module will add Preferences icon on the timecard toolbar Benefit Time Module will add neneftt tl icon on the timecard toolbar Advanced Schedule Module will add Create Individual Schedule icon on the timecard toolbar 6 8 Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration Grid Navigation Timecard grid navigation can be accomplished through the following keys and mouse clicks Up one cell Down one cell aT Will accept data entered in a cell or scroll through the characters in the cell when the cell is in Edit Mode Right one cell Right one cell p ul pre Left one cell ae a Will accept data entered in cell regardless of what mode the SHIFT JENTER cell is in Eri CIEI Down one cell Note Holding down any of the above keys will cause the cursor to move rapidly in the designated directio
228. etters and mumbers Yau can hie this step i you have already setup your admin account not for firak tine were Current Password admin Email Sree Hew Password Confirm Password Enter the following e Current Password For new installations the default current password is admin e Admim Email Address Enter the e mail address of the Admin or computer that the J ive Messenger Server is installed on e New Password Enter a new password for admin account If you do not want to change the password for the admin user click Skip This Step button e Confirm Password Enter the same password as above 6 The J ive Messenger Setup Complete screen will appear The IM Server must be restarted To do so right click on the in the system tray on the lower right hand corner and click Launch Admin fe dt Yew Pevertes ook tb Q D ie Loser Permes Aea tero 127 0 0 1 9090 setue firhed ep Jive Messenger Setup Jive Messenger Setup Complete This iaitailation of lo Mossenqer 6 now complet To continu i Please restart the server 2 Login fp the admin corenis Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module 20 9 7 The Jive Messenger Screen will appear Click on Stop and the Start to restart the J ive server Jive Messenger i ive Messenger 2 1 3 Started Jun 17 2005 9 02 20 AM Admin console listening at http f127 0 0 1 9090 https 127 0 0 1 9091 See Canaan
229. eyond an assigned schedule require authorization when checked a user with Admin or Payroll privileges see Step 9 Login needs to approve employees hours in the timecard that occur after a schedule before they can be calculated see example table Hours worked on an unassigned schedule require authorization when checked a user with Admin or Payroll privileges See Step 9 Login needs to approve employees hours in the timecard that occur during non scheduled time before they can be calculated see example table For example employee Bill J ackson is an engineer who Is assigned to a schedule to work Monday to Friday from the hours of 08 00 8 00 AM to 17 00 5 00 PM with an hour for lunch does not punch for lunch and there is no punch rounding The following table for employee Bill J ackson utilizes a few options to illustrate how time calculations would be affected by authorization Option 1 No authorization for before after or unassigned hours is checked enabled Option 2 Authorization is required for before and after and Option 3 Authorization required for unassigned hours 3 18 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard OUT Assigned Total Seton All hours in timecard se 9 hours Depending on Overtime rules potentially 1 hr OT 8 Scheduled hours reported and authorization required for Option B Sch amp A S ch for punches to 5 8 hours calculated Without authorization only 8 hrs paid W ith authorization pot
230. ference list will be applied to the cell Manual To add a schedule manually q Double click on the desired cell in the rotation and the following window will appear P Schedule Rotation Type Fixed v Paycode REG En Shift NJ Corporate HQ Standard MFG Shift Schedule Time Start Day Current Day End Day 0s yy Start Time o7 00aM EndTime 04 00 PM Labor Home Labor Cost Canter ss a c S amp a 0 StondardRate for MEGNI EE Department 1 Default JOBCLASS 6 JOBCLASS Labor Category6 b Select the Type Pay Code and Shift from the fields provided Ce 12 24 In the Schedule Time boxes enter the Start and End Times and the day that this particular schedule will end The choices for Start Day are 1 days before Current Day or 1 day after The choices for End Day are Current Day 1 days after 2 days after or 3 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module In the Labor box check the Home Labor box to default all labor levels to Home Labor or select the sub categories of each Labor Level you wish to include in the schedule When you have finished click on the button to save your settings and close the dialog box Select desired Labor Level subcategory from the Labor list or click on the button The Labor References window will appear U Labor References Cost Center 55 3 C03 fl ocecem en e 1 1 Department 4 Department Lab l gt 1 1 1 1 1
231. ference the window of time in a day that an employee can work to receive premium pay Zone Codes are assigned to Zone Differentials To create a Zone Code perform the following To create Zone Codes 1 Click on the Zone Differential node within the Daily Rules module in the Tree View 2 Expand the view of the Zone Differential node and click on Zone Codes 3 Click on the a button and the Zone Codes window will appear ir Lone Codes Mame Pones Description NJ Summer work Schedule 3 4 Enter a name for the Zone Code in the name field required field Enter a description of the Zone Code in the Description field Assign a Number to the Zone Code in the Number field required field Duplicate numbers are not allowed 18 2 Time amp Attendance Software Zone Differential Module Qualification Rules Qualification Rules are rules that govern whether an employee can be awarded hours Zone Award in a particular Zone Code for working inside the eligibility windows To create Qualification Rules 1 Click on the Zone Differential node within the Daily Rules module in the Tree View 2 Expand the view of the Zone Differential node and click on Qualification Rules 3 Click on the a button and the following Qualification Rules window will appear a Qualification Rules k eS Mame OT Son 2off Description NJ MFG OT qualification rule 4 Entera name for the rule in the name field required
232. fic Payroll Settings QuickBooks Pro Examples of export iif file fields for QuickBooks Pro are shown in the following matrix table Payroll Select Quickbooks Pro Payroll Payroll ID Enter payroll ID General Tab Specify the location and file name forthe export file Output Path Example C ProgramFiles Time Guardian Plus filename iif E Te Enter version number obtained from opening P QuickBooks iif file with Notepad E EEA Enter release number obtained from opening QuickBooks iif file with Notepad Seer E Enter company name obtained from opening Payroll Settings Company QuickBooks iif file with Notepad General Tab x Enter the create time number obtained from opening Create Time QuickBooks tf file with Notepad Pass Dollars Separate Records By Day Payroll Settings Fo Haliday Pay eons 9 18 Time amp Attendance Software Output ADP For DOS Examples of export file fields for ADP for DOS are shown in the following matrix table Se Payroll Select ADP DOS Davra Enter a 2 character upper case code identifying the Payroll ID et kagi Payroll payroll batch no General Tab Specify the drive and directory where ADF for DOS is Output Fath installed The file name will be Extpay01 Example C PCPERS Extpay01 Enter a 3 character upper case code identifying the company Enter a 1 numeric code io identify the PC Payroll and Payroll Settings personnel version number General Tab Check to transfer zones th
233. file The number of departments to be passed on is dependent upon the payroll company you are using The selection will leave that particular department field blank in the payroll file The following is an example of the Breaks tab window Cronos E General Date Range Breaks Payclass Department Employee Available Selected Add All Remove k Remove All e To add a department to the payroll file highlight the desired Labor Level in the Available list and click on the Add button e To add all departments to the payroll file click on the Add All button Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 31 e The departments in the payroll file will be separated in the order that they appear in the Selected list To change the order of the departments in the Selected list select the desired department and click on the Move Up and Move Down button e Toremove a department from the payroll file highlight the desired department in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected departments click on the Remove All button 13 Click on the Pay Class tab The following is an example of the Pay Class tab window Payrolls General Date Range Breaks Payclass Department Employee Available Selected Stamdard add is Add All Remove Remove All e To adda Pay Class to the payroll file highlight the desired Pay Class in the Available list and click on the Add
234. ft overtime nodes will be grayed out but the exception template will stay selectable and theses nodes will not be accessible from the tree view Software Setup amp Feature Software Configuration Location Advanced Pay Class Main Application Tree View Daily Rules Main Application Tree View Shift Rules Main Application Tree View Using the Advanced O vertime M odule The activation of the Advanced Overtime Module affects the Pay Class Shifts and Daily Rules Modules Overtime Definition in Pay Class M odule 1 Click on Overtime Definition tab 11 2 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 9 Pay Class HER General Day Change Schedule Rounding Overtime Definition Overtime Execution Overtime Authorization Holiday Benefit Execution Pay time and half Weekly Overtime Template Overtime after 40 andDT Reset Weekly Start DayoFweek Sun Consecutive Non Consecutive Overtime Template Overtime after 6th consec Reset Weekly Start Day of week Sun 4 Range Overtime Template None 2 Ifyou want the Pay Rate to be time and a half for overtime check the Pay Time and a half option otherwise the Pay Rate will default to the multiplier in the Pay Codes For example if overtime is awarded after 40 hours Day PayCode Split Hours Monday REG Y 80 Tuesday REG v 80 TWednesday REG Y 80 Thursday REG Y 80 The overtime hours Pay time an
235. ftware Timecard Administration 6 11 fi C h Note The Sch Auth columns will not appear on the timecard if there is no schedule Authorizing Payroll E xport To authorize hours for an employee to be included in the payroll export file place a check in the corresponding Hours column in the timecard on the Punches tab see figure This is required if Hours for payroll require authorization was checked in the Overtime Rules tab from the Pay Class step in the Setup Wizard Punches Overrides Adjustments Sehesle Hours auth ech ath asch auth U seh Ath Bes Mon 08 00 Mon 17 00 EN Tue 08 00 Tue 17 00 Wed 08 00 Wed 17 00 Thu 08 00 Thu 17 00 _ Fri 06 00 Fri 17 00 Global Timecard E dit To globally edit employee timecards e Inthe Tree View select the Timecard module within the Daily Activities group and the following is an example of the screen that will appear time Guardian Plus John_Smith File Edit Help El Today Number X EH Daily Activities Number Badge Number Payroll Last Name Fir Employees 1002 1235 13 Jackson Bil piu Communications Recalculate 69 Output 4 Reports S Payrolls a Import gt a Export Sie E amp Auto Process R ES ven Global Edit e Click on the Global Edit button and the General Global Edit window will open e Select Edit Type fro
236. function will only be available when Advanced Schedule module is activated amp Global Apply Certification Override Available Selected o Level 1 CNE 1213 07 ee Level 2 Java Developer I PMI 1 Add All l PMI 2 Remove Remove Remove all Date Achieved 12 13 2007 PA From this window the user can choose to add or replace an employee s certifications In the example figure above the user choose to add the CNE certification to the selected employee s with an Achievement date of 12 13 2007 In the example the Override check box is not selected If the Override checkbox is selected then the selected employee s existing certifications would be replaced with the new selections When the Global Apply Wizard is completed all these settings will be applied to all the employee s selected on the list Benefit Global Apply If selected the Benefit window for the Global Apply Wizard see the following figure will be the 7 to appear This corresponds to the Benefit tab found on the Employees screen 4 Global Apply Benefit Override Paycode Date Amount Reset Add WAC 12 3 201 2 2 80 00 een 2 A Remove Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration 5 13 Note This global apply function will only be available when Benefit Time module is activated From this window the user can choose to apply a benefit setting to the selected employee s In
237. ge the order of the Qualification Rules select the desired rule in the list and click on the Move Up or Move Down buttons To remove a Qualification Rule select the desired rule from the list and click on the Remove button d Click on the button to save your settings and return to the Zone Qualifications window To exit without saving click on the x button 8 To Set zone code for all windows to click on the dropdown box and select one of the following choices None Highest Zone Code Majority hours First In Punch or Last Out Punch 9 To add more Zone Differential Rules click on the Add button and repeat Steps 4 thru 6 To change the order of the rules select the desired rule in the list and click on the Move Up or Move Down buttons To remove a Zone Differential Rule select the desired rule from the list and click on the Remove button 10 In the Set Zone code for all Windows field choose one of the following None Highest Zone Code Majority Hours FirstIn Punch and Last Out Punch 18 10 Time amp Attendance Software Zone Differential Module Chapter 19 Payroll Interface Module Payroll Interface M odule Introduction The Amano Time amp Attendance Software comes standard with a default 13 common payroll interfaces The activation of the Payroll Interface Module can supply up to 43 additional payroll interfaces Default Payroll Interfaces Optional Payroll Interfaces oe oe ee ee i YS Ee ADP DOS ADP PC
238. gin The choices are 1 days before Current Day or 1 days after 8 In the End box select the Day that the schedule will end and the time of the day that the schedule is to end The choices are Current Day 1 days after 2 days after or 3 days after Auto Schedules Auto schedules are used when an employee can work any one of many different schedules The schedule that is used for the employee can be based upon the employee s IN punch OUT punch or both The auto schedule uses the template schedules A template schedule is assigned to an auto schedule with its own start before and after setting and end before and after setting The following is an example of the Auto Schedules screen To create Auto Schedules 1 Click on the Auto Schedules node within the Schedule module in the Tree View see the following figure Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA File Edit Help S Today Setup h Company B Std NI Auto schedule HSA Users B Paycodes Shifts ae Daily Rules Payclass S fat Schedule 8 Template Schedules bal Auto Schedules Before Start Aft za Schedule Coverage thems O me ae bl gt 12 4 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 2 Click on the isa button and the Auto Schedules window will appear Auto Schedules General Name Std NJ 4uto schedule Based on IN punch Based on OUT punch Based on IN and OUT punch Template Schedu
239. h to have all employee breaks combined together as one break When you have finished defining the number of breaks and break sizes click on the button to save your settings 9 Inthe Deduction for short break box configure how much time will be deducted from the employee when an employee punches out for a shorter period of time than they were allocated in the break a Enterin the amount of Threshold time HH MM before the action Is to be taken b Setthe conditions if the time taken for the break is either less or more than the threshold in the fields provided The choices are Allowed break Which is the amount of time the employee is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break Amount taken Which is the amount of time the employee actually punched out for the Regular break or Coffee break Amount under or over This is the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break Nothing This is to deduct no time from the employee Allowed break and taken time Which will deduct the time allocated for Regular break or Coffee break plus the time taken for Regular break or Coffee break Allowed break and amount under or over Which is the amount of time the employee is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break and which is the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break 10 In the Deduction for long break box
240. han a set hour value in one shift Schedule The hours that exceed the set hour value are normally paid ata high wage or rate Up to 4 levels of Shift Overtime can be used Each level can be assigned its own threshold limit The hours worked beyond the threshold will be moved to the specified OT Pay Code To create a Shift Overtime template 1 Click on the Shift Overtime node in the Shifts module in the Tree View see the figure E Time Guardian John_Smith DER File Edit Help Su Today 3 Setup Description HP Company 3 Corporate NI MFG OT A Users n Pay Codes Shifts P Rounding Templates E Exceptions 3 n Meal Templates B Outside Shift Overtime ee Daily Rules i Pay Class Fi fat Schedule H Locations Daily Activities 59 output 2 Click on the isa button and the Shift Overtime window will appear 11 6 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module a Shift Overtime General Level Count Name NJ Corporate OT Description NJ MFG OT 3 Enter a name for the Shift Overtime rule in the name field 4 Enter a description of the Shift Overtime rule in the Description field Note If you wish to duplicate the properties of an existing Shift Overtime template for another Shift Overtime template select the desired Shift Overtime template from the Shift Overtime window open it enter in a new name and click on the L 4 button The new Shift Overtime template wi
241. he Billable Multiplier field enter in the cost multiplier for the Pay Code rate if the default value is not acceptable 8 Check Split Hours if you want the Pay Code to be used for Split Hours Split hours allow the system to move hours from one Pay Code to another Not allowed for BONUS Pay Code For example if overtime is awarded after 40 hours _ Pay Code Sot Hai Mendy neg _ y a9 Tuesday vac v so Fri Tuesda Wednesda Thursda Friday Ifthe VAC hours were not set to Split the overtime hours will be or f Parcode Hows _ overtime messy neo T ANE ka Thursday rec so 20 ae we a The following table lists all of the Pay Codes with their predefined fixed and selectable parameters If the Cost Multiplier parameter is marked as defineable that means the default value in the field can be changed by entering a new value and saving it If the Split Hours Counts Towards Attendance and Counts Towards Overtime parameters are selectable that s indicates that this action can be turned On or Off A checkmark m in this column indicates the default setting 3 10 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Table of Default Paycodes Worked 2 0 ir sl defineable selectable aein sia Hours 1 0 nae defineable selectable electa selectable eE p e wi zje E pe ee J e o e aeta aa aate an Boms o Dollars Worked ESO te eee a Jij tile te me If the Counts Towards
242. he Column will be displayed in the grid if this field is checked Columns that are fixed cannot be deselected To restore the default settings of the Punches columns click on the button To save apply new settings for the Adjustments amp Overrides Columns click on the button Adjustment amp Overrides C olumns M enu Selection W eb Select the Adjustment Columns or Overrides Columns submenus from the Preferences menu and the following User Preferences Adjustment Columns or Overrides Columns windows will appear 17 20 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module Walcoem SyYSO8A User Preferences Adjustment Columns Column Width Show tate 75 Day at Schedale 2 Cust Center Jobclass LEVEL LEVLiA LEVELS LEVELG Jane Paycoode Hours Communts Reavan AMANO Paman Ave Hogeland PLI U7 Det 12740 HE Ai ASS The Adjustment amp Overrides Columns selections are used to set the user preferences properties of each of the columns in the Adjustments and Overrides tab view of the Timecard grid e Width Width of the Column To change the width of the desired Column enter in a number e Show The Column will be displayed in the grid if this field is checked Columns that are fixed cannot be deselected To restore the default settings of the Punches columns click on the button To save apply new settings for the Adjustment amp Overrides Columns click on the button The following is an exampl
243. he Wages tab in Employees Module Write Rates When checked the user will have write access to the Rates modules THIS MUST BE CHECKED to have access to the Wages tab in Employees Module 5 Click on the Password tab Users General Password Pay Class Department Employee Password essees Confirm Password sssss Options Must change password on next login Never Expires Expires after Days Cannot change password 6 Enter in a password for the user The password must then be confirmed Note The minimum required password length is 6 characters and can be any combination of letters and numbers and Is case sensitive 7 Setthe password expiration options The choices are e Must change password on next login The user will be prompted to enter a new password for this account at login Time amp Attendance Software User Group Module 22 5 e Never expires The password created will never expire e Expires after This allows you to seta specific date for the password to expire After this date the user will be prompted to enter a new password e Cannot change password The users will not be able to change their password 8 Click on the Pay Class tab This tab is used to set which Pay Class the user has access to The employee list will only show the employees belonging to the selected Pay Class 30 Users l E EIK General Password Pay Class Department Employee Available Sel
244. he ability to setup complex scenarios for meal and or break deductions on an automatic or punch basis When this module is activated the shift module is also active Meals are the deduction of hours taken from an employee or hours given to employee for meal and breaks The meals will be broken up into 3 categories meals breaks and coffee breaks There are two ways in which the deduction can take place either by the fixed or automatic method In fixed method the times when the meal occurs is set and the difference between the Start and end is deducted In the automatic method different time windows are setup to see if employees punch for the meal If the employee punches then amount setup for the automatic deduction taken away from the employee works hours If the employee does punch in the windows then no time is deducted but there is setup feature that allows the user to deduct the automatic time even though the employee did not punch for it The sections of the Time amp Attendance Software affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Shift Rules Exception Template Meal Template v Fixed Meal v Flex Meal Interval Window Sequence Terminal v Meal Credit v Meal Penalty e Location Terminal MTX 15 Terminal Break Coffee break Meal options sent to the terminal e Global Edit Punch Type Meal Type User Interface From shift link in tree view only exception templates and meal te
245. he basic rounding rules for this Pay Class ial EALE E z General Overtime Rules Rounding Rules meal Rules Holidays Does this Pay Class have rounding rules C No Yes Rounding Settings C Daily Rounding Rounds by total time 2 Select Yes to enable rounding rules for this Pay Class and select rounding settings for either Daily Rounding or Punch Rounding For Daily Rounding all IN and OUT punches for a day will be rounded with Unit Point For Punch Rounding all punch pair hours will be rounded with Unit P oint Rounding was created so that employers could define rules that would allow employees punched time to be rounded to a defined unit The time that the employees punches move forward or backward is based on a defined point This allows all of the hours to be better managed for payroll purposes because rounding moves an employee s punches IN OUT or daily hours to an even amount to make it easier for calculations The Time amp Attendance software allows you to apply the defined Unit and Point to individual punches Punch Rounding or the daily total of hours worked by an employee Daily Rounding For Punch Rounding you must specify the Unit and Point individually for both the IN and OUT punches a punch pair For Daily Rounding just the total amount of time for the day is rounded A Time Simulation tool has been included on the Overtime Rules screen to test your settings For example employee Bill
246. he desired Pay Code in the Selected list and click on the Remove button 9 6 Time amp Attendance Software Output e Toremove all selected Pay Codes click on the Remove All button e Click on the Move Up or Move Down buttons to move an item up or down in the sort Selected column to change the priority 24 Click on the Audit Class tab See the following illustration for an example General Date Ranae Title Page Footer Excention PAVEGOE Audit Class EparimEN i Sort Employee Available Selected Initial Hours Adjustment Add All Remove Remove All Move Up Move Down e To add an Audit Class activity type to the report highlight the desired Audit Class in the Available list and click on the Add button e To add all Audit Classes to the report click on the Add All button e To remove an Audit Class from the report highlight the desired Audit Class in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e To remove all selected Audit Classes click on the Remove All button e Click on the Move Up or Move Down buttons to move an item up or down in the sort Selected column to change the priority 25 Click on the Department tab See the following illustration for an example General Date Range Title Paae Footer Sort Debe pul Paycode Budit Glas Department Employee Sort Labor Number by Criteria Criteria Available e To add a department to the report highlight the desired dep
247. he grid click on the button This button will also deselect all the Pay Codes in the grid if all were selected Note The 4 buttons at the top right of the Level tab allow you to Select or De select all copy cut and paste the Overtime Pay Codes into different days or holidays The buttons are as follows 11 24 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module Chapter 12 Advanced Schedule Module Advanced Schedule M odule I ntroduction This module is used to define when an employee should work Schedules consist of Template Schedule fixed schedule for day of week Auto Schedule a set of template schedules to pick from based on an employee s punches and for a multiple shift Individual Schedule a fixed schedule for a specific date and Schedule Rotation a schedule based on a pattern The sections of the Time amp Attendance Software affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Schedule Auto Schedules Template Schedule with Auto Schedule Individual Advanced Schedules Schedules Rotation Employee Schedule Override Employee Configuration e Advanced Pay Class Template Schedule assignment based on schedule start time schedule overlaps e Shift Rules Exception Template e Reports Schedule Posting Report Schedule vs Actual Report Meal Hours will be included if schedule time allowed now includes meal hours e Import Individual Sched
248. he required number of hours to work before for the deduction is applied and select the Punch Position of the shift to deduct from Click on the Breaks tab Select the Break size based on Default Size or Shift Break Size Base size on Number of breaks For breaks based on default size enter the number of breaks and the default break size in the fields provided For breaks based on Shift break size click on the bal button and the following Define Breaks window will appear Define Breaks Number of breaks based on shift length From To Break Add Break size based on shift length From To 00 00 To enter the Number of breaks based on shift length click on the Add button A row will appear Enter the From and To times of the shift and the number of breaks for that shift To enter the Break size based on shift length click on the Add button A row will appear Enter the From and To times of the shift and the size of each break for that shift When you have finished entering the number of breaks and break sizes click on the button to save your settings 13 10 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module Meal Templates Seles General Breaks Coffee Breaks Meals Assignments Break Credit Base size on Default Size y Number of breaks 1 Default break size 15 00 Deduction for short break Threshold 00 00 Less than or equal to threshold Nothing More than threshold
249. hedule Relative Start Date 9 25 2006 Length In Days Pattern Sun Mon 9 25 Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Mon 07 00 Tue 07 00 ied 07 00 Thu 07 00 Fri 07 00 Mon ped E oad bas 04 00 Thu 04 00 Fri 04 00 pre ome ain Rreepee nn Enter a name for the Schedule Rotation Template in the Name field required field 4 Inthe Description field enter a brief description of the template In the Relative Start Date field enter in the start date of the pattern in DDMMYYYY format or click on the button The Select Date dialog box will appear 12 22 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module E7 A a Gurenteed HourtAll 1h Name 40NSOFF Description Select Date Oc ot Zj kd vear 2005 Pattern 3 MMs 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 TE Using the dropdown lists select the Month and Year Click on the desired day in the calendar When you have finished click on the button to save your setting and close the dialog box and return to the Settings tab of the Schedule Rotation window 6 Inthe Length In Days field select the number of days that this template will span A blank schedule grid will appear in the Pattern box The days included in the template are indicated by white cells o Schedule Rotation EES ER 3 1 6 0 1 1 Name Son 20FF Description Son 20FF weekly schedule for 8am 5pm Relative Start Date 12 4 2006 a Length In Day
250. heduled start time Repeat for the scheduled end time For example the schedule for the employee is 8 00 AM to 4 00 PM The grace window for the start of schedule is set for 15 minutes before 7 45 AM and 15 minutes after 8 15 AM the scheduled start time If the first IN punch for the day occurs between these two times it will be rounded to the scheduled start time of 8 00 AM The grace window for the end of the schedule is 30 minutes before 3 30 PM and 30 minutes after 4 30 PM the scheduled end time If the last OUT punch for the day occurs between these two times it will be rounded to the schedule start time of 4 00 PM aS Start Schedule End rayan 04 00 pm Grace Zone 1 Grace Zone 1 Grace Zone 2 Grace Zone 2 Start End Start End If the punch falls within If the punch falls within the window it gets the the window it gets the schedule start time schedule end time First IN Last OUT This rounding occurs outside of the grace rounding windows and when an employee has a schedule with start and end times Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module 14 5 O Rounding Templates First IN Last OUT Early IN fig Late IN Last OUT Unit and Point Unit Early OUT TETE Late OUT S OBI In the First In Last Out tab there are 4 Units and 4 Points used to determine rounding A Unit is a numeric value used to adjust employee punch time to a consistent measurement of time Common units are 1 3
251. ications A Recalculate EAI output T Reports Payrolls Import Export 2 Click the lad button to create a new Auto Process profile and the following Auto Process window will appear aaa Process TST General Settings Recurrence Name Hours Summary Description Hours Summary FYO9 NJ HQ Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 49 In the Name field enter a name for the Auto Process profile 4 Enter a brief description of the Auto Process profile in the Description field Click on the Settings tab The following is an example of the Settings tab window that will appear General Settings Recurrence Process Type Communications Import Export Synchronize Access Control Report Name audit Report Y Printer WACIHQIRICOH 2045e OPERATIONS IV Keep file Output Path tit 6 For Process Type choose from Report Communications Import Export or Synchronize Access Control Note The Auto Process for Report Import and Export which runs as a service will run the selected Report Import and Export profiles with a frequency based upon the Recurrence settings The Auto Process for Communications will either Poll Set Time or Download the selected terminals based on Recurrence settings W hile the Auto Process for Synchronize Access Control will synchronize employee and department data in the background as a service with a frequency level based upon Recurrence
252. ick on the Add button To select all employees in all Pay Classes click on the Add All button To remove the employees from a given Pay Class from the report highlight the desired Pay Class in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected Pay Classes click on the Remove All button 10 Click on any of the Labor Level tabs El Schedule Coverage i al SS SS SS eee General Payclass Cost Center 55 Department JOBCLASS LEVEL4 Employee Available Selected Add All Standard Rate for MFG Remove Remove All Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 9 e To include employees from a given Labor Level in the report highlight the desired Labor Level in the Available list and click on the Add button e To select all employees in all Labor Levels click on the Add All button e To remove the employees from a given Labor Level from the report highlight the desired Labor Level in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e Toremove all selected Labor Levels click on the Remove All button 11 Click on the Employee tab Ell Schedule Coverage E re BR General Payclass Cost Center 55 Department JOBCLASS LEVEL4 Employee l Sort Badge Criteria aA agge Selected 12364 Beltran Carlos 123450 Wilson Karl 123451 Parikh Vijay 123 EE ae Ramesh Add All 123456 Ryan Robert ma ain John 123459 Abbate Jon 123462 Rom
253. idation_Salary Active 13 In the Name field enter in a unique name required field that will be used to describe the terminal This field will be automatically populated with the MAC address when the eyeglass button is used 14 In the Number field enter in a unique number for the terminal if allowed 15 In the Serial No field a unique number will appear for a found MT X 15 terminal 16 If you wish to assign a Bell Schedule to the terminal select one from the dropdown list in the Bells field Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 51 17 If you wish to assign a Terminal Validation setting to the terminal select one from the dropdown list in the Validation field 18 Click on the Options tab In the Buttons boxes place a check in the Labor box to activate the Labor button for a MTX 15 terminal This box will be grayed out for FPT 40 terminal because this function is not available at the terminal Click in the Coffee Break and or Meal boxes to activate those functions at the terminals p3 Terminal General Options Labor Bi Buttons Break Coffee Time 12 Hour O 24 Hour Misc View Hours 19 In the Time Format box select the time format 12 hour or 24 hour for the terminal FP T 40 MTX 15 and Hand Punches 20 In the Misc boxes select whether to enable the RR Keypad Repunch Protection and or view hours for the MT X 15 terminal The only function avai
254. iday The choices are Schedule or Hours If Hours is selected proceed to Step 5 If Schedule is selected proceed to Step 6 E nter in the number of hours that will be awarded for the holiday yellow required field Click on the Setting tab The Setting tab is used to enter the date and condition definition for the holiday 3 12 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard SEE General Setting i Date Definition Occurs On Occur rs On aa o apply E A formula is entered in the Date Definition and Condition tables to generate the holiday see next chapter for Date Definition and Condition tables Use of a formula can eliminate the need to enter a specific date For example to define New Year s Day select the following terms in the Date Definition table Once saved the holiday must then be assigned to a Pay Class The table below gives an example of a holiday that occurs on the same date but assigns different hours based on the Pay Class Holiday Name Pay Code Pay Clas Full time Christmas 2 25 2007 Full time Part time Christmas 12 25 2007 An unlimited number of holidays can be added and the custom holiday rule based setting see figure provides for holiday changes each year so they do not have to be updated annually Note Use the Save As l button to make a copy of an existing holiday with a different name 7 After completing the Pay Code and Holiday entry selection of information for Step 3
255. ight Savings Time Settings enter the following e Start Date The date that the DLS period will begin e Start Time The time of the day of the Start Date that the DLS period will begin e End Date The date that the DLS period will end Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 49 End Time The time of the day of the End Date that the DLS period will end Press the Reset button to Reset the DLS atthe Terminal 8 Click on the Connection tab WA Locations cs gt fal w m E o m Edison Location General Connection Terminals Part e COM Port comi v Baud Rate 2600 X Modem 1200 baud Hayes clone Phone 9 Inthe Connection field select the type of connection you are using to communicate with the terminal s The required information in the Connection Info will depend on your connection Ethernet The terminals communicate to the Host PC via Ethernet connection If selected you must enter the IP Address and Port Obtain the correct IP address from your network administrator or alternatively please consult the appropriate terminal manual 1 e MTX 15 Installation Guide FP T 40 Fingerprint Installation Guide Hand Punch 50e Manual etc to perform terminal diagnostics hardware configuration and identify the IP address Modem A modem is used at the Com Port of the Host PC to communicate to the terminal s If selected you must select the Com Port Baud Rate Modem Type and enter the Pho
256. iguration and use of the Nexus 220 system with the Amano Time amp Attendance software A manoNet Tab Access Control module must be activated for this feature Use to setup access control integration with PIN numbers and or tags for each employee See Access Control Integration Module for details on the setup configuration and use of the AmanoNet system with the Amano Time amp Attendance software Global Apply L To globally assign settings to a group of employees highlight the desired employees from the listin the Table View and click on the Global Apply button see the following figure Witime Guardian Plus John_Smith File Edit Help J Today i G Daily Activities mployees E Timecard ee Communications 69 output A Reports g Payrolls a Import a Export S5 Auto Process The Global Apply window will appear Number X Number Badge Number 1001 it 1002 1235 1003 12352 a 1004 hear s 1005 1238 Payroll Last Name see the following figure to choose which sections parameters to globally apply to the employees E Global Apply Please choose which sections to globally apply General Assignments Scheduling Labor Level Cost rate Certification Benefit R Web Access Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration ND ka o 5 9 Note This Global Apply Wizard essentially corresponds to the tabs found on the Employees screen
257. ill be deducted Starting from the start of the break or meal and moving forward For End the time will be deducted starting from the end time of the break or meal and moving forward 6 Select Fixed as the Type Place a check in the Auto Meal check box if you wish to have an automatic break deduction Enter in the required number of hours to work in Fixed Position before for the deduction is applied Select the Punch Position of the shift to deduct from 8 Click on the Breaks tab Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module 13 3 Meal Templates EEE _ _ General Breaks Coffee Breaks Meals Sssignients Fixed Breaks From Ta Length Pos 10 50 ST 9 To adda break click on the button A row will appear in the Fixed Breaks box Must double click on From To and or Length fields to enter data 10 Enter From and To times for the break in 24 hour format and Break Length in HH MM format 11 Click on the button to add more breaks or click on the button to remove a break 12 Click on the Coffee Breaks tab Meal Templates _ ag General Breaks Coffee Breaks Meals Assignin Break Credit Fixed Coffee Breaks _ From Length oaee P 13 To add a Coffee Breaks interval click on the button A row will appear in the Fixed Coffee Breaks box Must double click on From To and or Length fields to enter data 14 Enter From
258. illable Rate for wages click on the button or check the Use Rate Template for Cost or Billable rate Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module 15 3 Note You must be an Administrator to have access to Wages or this tab will not appear Labor Names JOBCLASS a SS gt D gt i o General Wages Cost rate Billable rate Use Rate Template _ Use Rate Template Template Standard Rate Rates Rate 15 3 Operation Add DF 10 9 2006 2 Effective Date 3 7 2006 amp For Use Rate Template check the box Cost rate Template ji Rate 10 00 Effective Date prz912005 Select the desired Rate Template from the list in the Template field To Add a rate Click on the Add button and a row will appear in the Rates box In the Date field enter a date when the rate for the labor level will be in effect Enter a rate for the labor level in the Rate field In the Operation field select Rate Add to Percentage Rate is the labor level s actual rate Add to will add to the existing rate as defined in Rate Setup Percentage will increase the existing rate for the labor level by the percentage as defined in Rate Setup Billable rate C Use Rate Template Rates Date Operation ene Add To v Add To Percentage h Rates can be increased using the O peration field or clicking on the Percent Increase button The following wind
259. ily Activities group within the Tree View The Employees module can consist of the following tabs General Personal Contact Assignments Scheduling Labor Level Wages The following tabs may be present if these modules have been activated Access Control gt AmanoNet or Nexus220 Tabs Advanced Schedule gt Certification Tab Benefit Time gt Benefit Tab and Web Interface gt Web Access Tab Note If optional Access Module is installed to integrate with Amano Access Control AmanoNet 7 6 or Nexus 220 from 4 to 8 tags could be present The amount of tags depends upon the controller the AmanoNet system Is connected to connection to AC or EC controller will have 4 tags while connection to EC2 controller will have 8 or 10 tags The Amano Time amp Attendance software can easily accommodate employees with the same first or last name however the Employee Number must be unique since it is the primary sorting key Badge Numbers can be changed or reused should an employee lose the badge or become inactive Each tab also has an Employee List double clicking a selected employee on this list will cause their information to become active in all fields Adding E mployees To add Employees e Inthe Tree View select the Employees module within the Daily Activities group and the Employees list will appear in the Table View see the following figure Note Employees can be added to the Amano Time amp Attendance database by selecting to Syn
260. ime Guardian Plus fifename Payroll Settings Pass Rates Check to transfer rates through to payroll file General Tab Pass Dollars Check to transfer dollars through to payroll file TG Plus default a es gi lt rot Hedaya a O Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 23 Excel Examples of export file fields for Excel are shown in the following matrix table en een Payroll Select Excel Payroll ID En l Payroll Specify the location and file name for the CSV General Tab Anit Output Path export file Example G ProgramFiles Time Guardian Plus ilename a Soa ee Se Check to transfer start end date in the following Display startiend date format mm dd yyyy yyyy mm dd or dd MMMMM yyyy Separate Records By Day Check to transfer zones through to payroll file Payroll Settings G Mallan General Tab Pass Dollars Check to separate records Include Empty Check to transfer employees with no hours Records through to payroll file Minutes TG Plus default Pay Code 9 24 Time amp Attendance Software Output Gevity HR Examples of export file fields for Gevity HR are shown in the following matrix table Enter a character upper case code identifying the payroll batch no Specify the location and file name provided by Gevity HR forthe export file Example G ProgramFiles Time Guardian Plus ifename Company Payroll Settings Number General Tab Pass Dollars Payroll Set
261. imum shift length window is the period of time that punches will be calculated for a schedule that crosses day change time 12 13 hours is a recommended number for this field This allows all lunch or break punches to be applied to the correct schedule In the examples below 2 00 AM will be used for the Day Change Time Once defined you must determine if this time is to start Before or After midnight When Before midnight is selected all hours from 00 00 2 00 AM will be recognized by the Time amp Attendance software as part of the Previous day Anything after 2 00 AM will be applied to the Current or New Day When After midnight is selected all hours from 00 00 2 00 AM will be seen by the Time amp Attendance software as part of the Current day and anything beyond 2 00 AM will be applied to the Next day 3 16 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Examples of Before and After midnight settings 2 00 AM Before Midnight means that all punches up to 2 00 AM will be applied to the Previous day and any punch after 2 00 AM will be applied to the Current day 2 00 AM After Midnight means that all punches up to 2 00 AM will be applied to the Current day and any punch after 2 00 AM will be applied to the Next day 10 00 PM Before Midnight means that all punches up to 10 00 PM will be applied to the Previous day and any punch after 10 00 PM will be applied to the Current day 10 00 PM_ After Midnight means that al
262. in the Available list and click on the Add button e Toselectall employees from the Available list click on the Add All button e To remove an employee from the Selected list highlight the employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e Toremove all selected employees click on the Remove All button Configuring the IM Server 1 Right click on the Y in the system tray in the lower right hand corner and click Launch Admin Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module 20 7 T Jive Messenger Setup Microsoft internet Explorer Ge cle e Ses L address MG Petecifn27 0 0 1 PO iu a Jive Messenger Setup Setup Progress Lanquerpe Selection b ugg enton Weleda i Ima M sianjar S t Thit na will kad yau traagh a nial Sean r B Garver tine Lp TR pE Bofors yau diun chadan a Logue fr the system or uaa hi Sfat oF Erei Choose Language Czech ies cr Co Deutch ide English eni D Fran ais fr Do paderan nl D Portugu s Grasiteinn pt ER r AN oe amped Chinese h_or 2 Select English then click continue 3 Change the Domain to the server s IP Address as seen below then click Continue Ge CS Yw Fyt Tock tjp 9 4 OE J saih Jp torem Ba S 3 aust Api BB hepsi 127 0 0 4 2090s setup hest sethngs ep Setup Progress Server Settings arom isat Below are host settings for this server Note the suggested value for the doman Sever ties based on the network se
263. ing all of the information contained in the General tab of the Employee Setup Wizard Employee Report Bill M Jackson Number 1002 Badge 1235 Department Default Schedule tst shift Mon Sat Pay Class genedulg Type Salary Pay Type Schedule Hire date Jul 9 2008 Active Birthday Apr 29 1946 S S XXX XX 5151 Address 12 Volt Place Middletown New Jersey 07747 USA Telephone Home 732 787 1212 Work 973 403 1500 Ext 1115 908 545 1234 E Mail bjackson amano com Comments New inprocess Q C employee Schedule Posting R eport As seen in the following example the Schedule Posting Report provides a list of employees including the information showing when they are scheduled to work Requires Advanced Schedule module activation to be available Schedule Posting Date range Apr 19 2010 May 2 2010 EMPLOYEE SUNDAY MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY Schedule vs Actual R eport As seen in the following example the Schedule vs Actual Report provides a list of employees showing when they were scheduled to work versus the actual hours they worked plus the variance in percent Requires Advanced Schedule module activation to be available Schedule Vs Actual Date range Apr 19 2010 May 2 2010 Scheduled i Hours Dut Apr 19 2070 Mon Mon 08 00 AM Mon 05 00 PM Apr 20 2070 Tue Tie 600 AM Tue 05 00 FM Am 21 2000 Wed Wed 0600 AM Weg 05 00 PM Apr 22 2000 Thu Thu 06 00 AM Thu 0300 PM 9 10 Tim
264. ing Support 45 Integration Warehouse Finance ri s J BIDS ue e Enter Adjustment Settings for Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration 6 13 Hours enter amount of time i e 08 00 Pay Code select the Pay Code to credit punch hours to from the dropdown list The default choices are REG OT DT SCK VAC PER HOL BONUS J URY BRV or user named ones Zone Code select the Zone Code to credit punch hours to from the dropdown list Note Zone Differentials module must be activated for this feature to be available e Enter Labor Settings for Check Home Labor box to bypass departments or select desired departments e f desired enter text in the Comments reason field When Add Dollars is selected the following is an example of the General Global Edit window E Global Edit General Edit Type Add Punch Add Hours Add Dollars Adjustment Settings Dollars 0 00 Pay Code BONUS Zone Code ZONE1 vw Labor Settings C Home Labor Department 1 Default Comments Reason e Enter Adjustment Settings for Dollars enter dollar amount i e 1000 00 Pay Code select the Pay Code to credit dollars to from the dropdown list Zone Code select the Zone Code to credit punch dollars to from the dropdown list Note Zone Differentials module must be activated for this feature to be available e Enter Labor Settings for Check Ho
265. ion default 1 1 2 15 For monthly enter the day of the month from 1 to 31 5 Select if employees of this Pay Class work past 2 00 AM 6 Enter the desired Day Change Settings by entering the hour when the day change occurs and selecting Before midnight or After midnight Day Change Settings should only be changed if employees are scheduled to start work after 02 00 AM and you want those hours applied to the current day Midnight 00 00 marks the start of a new day However there are times when an employee is scheduled to start on one day and end on another i e start work at 10 00 PM Sunday and leave work at 6 00 AM Monday Day Change Settings allow the Time amp Attendance software to account for a midnight day change time and calculate the number of hours correctly placing the punches on the current day For example using the following settings there are two scenarios where the hours can either be applied to Sunday or Monday Scenario 1 If you want the hours applied to Sunday then Sunday becomes the Current day and the hours from Monday are shifted backwards to Sunday Scenario 2 If you want the hours applied to Monday then Sunday becomes the Previous day and the hours from Sunday are shifted forwards to Monday In either scenario the Day Change Time must be configured The exception to this rule is when a punch occurs after the day change time but falls within the Maximum shift length The Max
266. ired line and click on the Move Down button Zone Award The Zone Award allows you to transfer the hours to another Pay Code duplicate hours to another Pay Code or award hours or dollars after the employee has met the Zone Qualification Rules Multiple rules can be award for each zone window and qualification To create Zone Award Rules 1 Click on the Zone Differential node within the Daily Rules module in the Tree View 2 Expand the view of the Zone Differential node and click on Zone Award wl Time Guardian John_Doe e File Edit Help Ei Today 9 Setup Na Description j Company 48 Users ul Pay Codes H 5 Shifts A Daily Rules i Daily Overtime ner Zone Codes Qualification Rules 9 Locations Daily Activities 64 Output 3 Click on the aa button and the Zone Award window will appear Time amp Attendance Software Zone Differential Module 18 5 Zone Award General Settings Name Zone Award Move Paycode Description Zone Award Move Paycode 4 Enter a name for the rule in the Name field 5 Enter a description of the rule in the Description field 6 Click on the Settings tab t Zone Award General Settings Source Move Paycode Type value TE Paycode Filter Selected Assign Paycode Labor Level Filter All Labor Award Zone Codes 7 Enter the following information Source Select one of the following options
267. is module is only visible after ithas been activated 22 2 Time amp Attendance Software User Group Module Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA File Edit Help Sig Today ca A SMa Setup Name DeStription Eh Company Administrator Administrators can atess any module in the system EAA Users Support Membe of the supporNgroup have read write access to all modules o D l Click on column heading Sy Shifts Groups using descending order toggled p3 Name or Description W BE Daily Rules Efl Payclass o mf Schedule Secondary filter tool EA Locations EGA Daily Activities G4 Output Note The Administrator and Support Groups are default groups and cannot be deleted User Groups can be initially filtered in ascending order by using a field with a dropdown list located on the top of the groups window see above illustration The choices in this list are Name or Description Additional filtering in ascending order can be accomplished by entering characters in a case sensitive field located to the right of the dropdown list see above illustration Click in the column headings anywhere to further sort both columns Each click toggles between ascending or descending order To create Groups 1 Click on the Groups module in the tree view 2 Click on the isa button and the following is an example of the Groups window that will appear Groups General Modules Description Support g
268. ive Overtime n General Consecutive 1 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 wa S ra mogouuo000ktk OOSOUODOOS ts DOSIOO0O RIS HOODOO ogoooo0o0od i S a 8 Inthe Count table check the Pay Codes in each column that you want to be combined to achieve each level s threshold For example if you checked REG and HOL in the Levell column then the hours for REG and HOL Pay Codes will be combined to reach Levell s threshold value Note You can select all the Pay Codes in a given column by clicking on the column heading You can also deselect any checked Pay Codes in a column by clicking on the column heading To select all Pay Codes in the grid click on the button This button will also deselect all the Pay Codes in the grid if all were selected Note If you wish to duplicate the Consecutive Overtime properties from the General Consecutive and or Count tabs select the desired Consecutive Overtime template open it enter in a new name and click on the Save As J button The new Consecutive Overtime template will appear in the Main View Range Overtime Range Overtime awards overtime based on the qualifying number of hours in a given period or date range A start and end date are required for each period An unlimited number of Ranges or periods can be setup in a given Range Overtime template but they cannot overlap Creating a Range Overtime T
269. k on the Import Default Settings tab This tab allows you set the defaults for data being imported Select the following Import i m re s General Import File Format Settings Import Default Settings Import Field Map Settings Employee Number Badge Payroll Number As itis As itis As itis Same As Badge O Same As Employee Number O Same As Employee Number Manual Increment From Manual Increment From Default Labor Default Assignment Cost Center 55 CC3 v Payclass GENESS Department Department Labor Category 4 w Daily Rule None JOBCLASS JOBCLASS Labor Category 6 w Time Zone GMT 12 00 International Date Line West LEVEL4 Standard Rate For MFG NJ w Schedule schedule Zone Zonet e Employee Number Select how the Employee Number will be defined The choices are As itis Same as Badge or Manual Increment From If Manual Increment From is selected you must enter the starting number in the field provided e Badge Number Select how the Badge Number will be defined The choices are As itis Same as Employee Number or Manual Increment From If Manual Increment From ts selected you must enter the starting number in the field provided Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 27 Payroll Number Select how the Payroll Number will be defined The choices are As it Default Labor Assign a default category for each Labor Level using the dropd
270. k on the enabled Firebird tab e Select Yes if the AmanoNet 7 6 database is on the same PC as the Time amp Attendance software e Ifnot select No and enter the IP Address for the PC with the AmanoNet 7 6 database e Type in or use the file chooser button to select the location for the AmanoNet 7 6 database file For example C Program Files AmanoNet Database AMANONET FDB 5 If MSSQL was selected as the database click on the enabled MSSQL tab e Select Yes if the Nexus 220 database Is on the same PC as the Time amp Attendance software e Ifnot select No and enter the IP Address for the PC with the Nexus 220 database e Enter the MSSQL database name for AmanoNet Step B Synchronize the Time amp Attendance software and AmanoNet 7 6 After the AmanoNet 7 6 configuration is complete the Synchronize Access Control menu will appear under the Time amp Attendance software File menu Use this menu selection to synchronize both the Time amp Attendance software and the AmanoNet 7 6 system The procedure for this synchronization is as follows 1 Synchronize Departments on both Time Guardian and AmanoNet 7 6 In this process Departments from AmanoNet that does not exist in the Time 7 Attendance s Labor Names for the Department Labor Level will be brought into the Time amp Attendance software The same will be done for AmanoNet whereas Labor Names for the Department Labor Level in the Time amp Attendance software that does not
271. l if the employee does not take it You have the choice of deducting the meal length from the Start or End of the employee s shift If Start is selected then the length of the meal will be deducted starting at the employee s first IN punch and working forward If End is selected then the length of the meal will be deducted starting at the employee s last OUT punch and working backwards Click on the Breaks tab 8 Select the Break size based on Default Size or Shift Break Size Base size on Number of breaks 12 Default break size 15 00 For breaks based on default size enter the number of breaks and the default break size in the fields provided Base size on Shift Break Size fk For breaks based on Shift break size click on the bali button The following Define Breaks window will appear Define Breaks Mumber of breaks based on shift length From To Break add Delete Break size based on shift length From Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module 13 13 To enter the Number of breaks based on shift length click on the Add button A row will appear Enter the From and To times of the shift and the number of breaks for that shift To enter the Break size based on shift length click on the Add button A row will appear Enter the From and To times of the shift and the size of each breaks for that shift Click on the Combine multiple employee breaks to one check box if you wis
272. l is marked red it has expired ajajaj Ooo ols General Password Payclass Department Employee Sort Labor Number x Criteria Criteria Available Selected 9 By default all departments are selected and will appear in the Selected list Departments can be removed from the Group by selecting them in the Selected list and clicking on the Remove button All the labor categories can be removed from the Selected list by clicking on the Remove All button Departments can be simultaneously filtered in both the Available and Selected lists in ascending order by using the Sort field dropdown list The choices in this list are labor number or name Additionally labor categories can be filtered in the Available or Selected lists by entering additional case sensitive characters in dedicated Criteria fields see illustration The Criteria field located above the Available list filters only that list while the Criteria field above the Selected list filters that list Each list is filtered independently in ascending order 3 56 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Note By unselecting Departments it can reduce the Employees that the user can have access to 10 Click on the Employee tab This tab is used to set user access to employee records ama gmo General Password Payclass Department Employee Select sort criteria Sort Bade From the Criteri Criteria dropdo
273. l other Timecard modifications see Punches and Adjustments tabs To perform an employee Timecard override click on the Overrides tab then click on the Hours cell in the grid for the hours that you wish to override See figure When you have finished performing a Timecard override click on the Save button to save your changes 17 16 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module When you have finished click on the Save button to save your changes The Overrides Tab in the Timecard grid consists of the following columns that have to be displayed Zone Code assigned user defined for zone differentials Pay Code user defined assigned to hours And the following additional user selectable columns that can be displayed Labor Level 6 user defined Employee Timecard Navigation W eb Use the employee dropdown list to quickly navigate between employees from any employee Timecard The First Previous Next and Last 4 4 gt I arrows can also be used See the following figure Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 17 ra Pe Setup Daily Activities Output Preferences Welcome SYSDBA First Previous Next and Last arrows Timecard Save pancel Delete insert __Benefitbalances _ oe d IPI 123457 Smith John Payperiods 9 29 06 10 12 06 e 123450 Wilson Karl SEU 6123451 Parikh Vijay gt Empl oyee dropdown list Cd Date 1123455 Patel Ramesh t Center SS ii Dep
274. l punches up to 10 00 PM will be applied to the Current day and any punch after 10 00 PM will be applied to the Next day e The following timeline example illustrates an employee punching in at 8 00 PM and punching out at 4 00 AM e The day change time is set to 2 00 AM e The Day Change is configured to Before Midnight with a maximum shift length of 12 hours and 59 minutes In the example even though two of the punches 2 30 AM and 4 00 AM occur after day change time they are within the maximum shift length and are calculated on the same day the day the IN punch occurs 7 Enter the maximum shift length an employee can work for Maximum Shift Length 12 59 1 00AM 2 30AM Day Change Time Same Day Calculation 2 00 AM Key n Punch ji Out Punch Overtime R ules Note If the Advanced modules are activated the Overtime Rules tab will be non accessible 1 Click on the Overtime Rules tab and the Overtime Rules screen will appear see figure This tab is used to define the basic daily and weekly overtime rules for this Pay Class The Time amp Attendance software was designed to accommodate a wide variety of overtime rules activation of the Advanced Overtime module adds additional capability such as Overtime Execution order Daily Overtime template Consecutive and non consecutive template etc You can cancel all authorized overtime by clicking No to the question Do you want to authorize your employee s hours
275. lable at the FPT 40 is to View Hours 21 If you checked the Labor button click on the Labor Button tab and the following screen will appear to setup labor transfer buttons with departments at the MTX 15 terminal Terminal General Options Labor Button HF i Check Uncheck all Mame Department Button 1 Button 2 22 If you set the Term Type to Hand Punch 1000 2000 3000 or 4000 in the General tab the HP Options tab will also be enabled This allows you to reassign configuration parameters for Hand Punch terminals Click on the HP Options tab and the following screen will appear 3 52 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Brenna nT General Options HP Options Reject Threshold 1254 Lock Control ID Length Access Tries Passwords Security Enrollment Management Setup Service Punch Mode V Explicit Punch To configure for an HP 1000 2000 3000 or 4000 Terminal set the following Reject Threshold The sensitivity of the terminal to the user s hand geometry Permitted values are 40 strictest setting through 200 least strict setting almost off with a default of 125 Lock Control The duration in seconds that the Lock Control output of the terminal will be activated The default is 10 seconds ID Length The User ID number length Permitted values are 1 through 11 with the default being 11 10 digits are the maximum in any case but if 11 are specified the Ent
276. labor category select the desired categories from any one of the Labor Level fields and click on the Add button To delete a labor category select the desired categories from any one of the Labor Level fields and click on the Delete button Click on the button to save your settings return to the Individual Scheduler window The schedule you just created will appear in the Template Schedule list Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 17 From the Individual Scheduler Assign Schedule E Assigns the currently displayed template schedule in the Template Schedule list to the employee for the particular day Assign Additional Schedule Assigns an additional template schedule in the Template Schedule list to the employee for the particular day Save Ej Saves the template schedule assignments Delete h Deletes an assigned template schedule from the selected cell Copy Cut and Paste m j and l h Allows you to cut copy and paste schedule assignments to different days and employees To assign an Individual Schedule to an employee L 2 Select the desired cell in the grid Select the desired template schedule using the dropdown list or create a custom template schedule using the button Select the desired labor category click on the button and the schedule will appear in the cell To add an additional Individual Schedule to particular day L 2 Select the
277. le Department Number or Department Additional filtering in ascending order can be accomplished by entering characters in a case sensitive field located to the right of the dropdown list see above illustration Click in the column headings anywhere to further sort both columns Each click toggles between ascending and descending order To view employees punches in the Timecard grid click on the Timecard button or double click on the desired employee record To filter those employees with certain Exceptions click on the Exceptions list filter preferences S button and the following window will appear Exceptions Date Range Available Selected UNSCH Not Scheduled Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration 6 1 e To select Exceptions highlight the desired Exceptions in the Available list and click on the Add button To select multiple Exceptions hold down the Shift key and or Ctrl keys e To select all Exceptions click on the Add All button e Toremove Exceptions highlight the desired Exceptions in the Selected list and click on the Remove button see above procedure for selecting multiples e Toremove all selected Exceptions click on the Remove All button e Click on the Date Range tab to select date range for the exceptions filter The following is an example of the screen that will appear Exceptions Date Range Date Selection Date Range x Exclide s Today FromDate 8 17 20
278. le 3 5 Schedule Start Schedule End Before 15 00 Before 10 00 After 10 00 After 15 00 Enter a name for the auto schedule in the Name field required field 4 Select the punch that the schedule will be based on e IN Punch If selected only the Schedule Start Before and After times need to be entered OUT Punch If selected only the Schedule End Before and After times need to be entered IN and OUT Punch If selected both the Schedule Start End Before and After times need to be entered 5 Assign a template schedule using the dropdown list in the Template Schedule field Template Schedule In creating a schedule the user defines schedules that are made up of template schedules and auto schedules Together these schedules form the weekly work pattern that can be applied to an employee The screen below shows an example of the template schedule and auto schedule assignments into a schedule To Create a Schedule 1 Click on the Schedule module within the Setup group in the Tree View see the figure A Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA File Edit Help Today Aji Name Setup liane ae Company schedule AA Users New Schedule x Paycodes NJ Schedule Sy Shifts Daily Rules g Payclass H Template Schedules a Auto Schedules lt gt E Schedule Coverage J Schedule Rotation ge HAN Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 5 2 Click on the is
279. le Start Schedule End AM 08 00 AM 08 15 AM 03 30 PM 04 00 PM 04 30 PM fi Li A 07 37 yy WYY w A VT Wj GF Enr 18 Grace Window Grace Window All IN OUT If First IN Last OUT is selected in the General tab all punches that occur between the first IN and OUT punches will be rounded using the Units and Point set in this tab If First IN Last OUT is not selected this rounding will be used for all punches including the first IN and last OUT punches A Unit and Point must be assigned to both the IN and OUT punches Rounding Tem Templates enera First Nast ODT OUT All IN OUT Open Schedule l Transfer Han J Break Meal Unit AIIM Punch All GUT Punch Open Schedule Open Schedule rounding is used when a schedule for the day has no start or end time defined There are four types of rounding performed for the open schedule A Unit and Point must be entered for each type They are e FirstIN punch of the day e AllOQUT punches e All IN punches e Last OUT punch of the day Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module 14 7 Rounding Templates General Grace First IN Last OUT AILINfOUT Open Schedule Transfer Break Meal Unit Point First IN Punch ka v All IN Punch AllOUT Punch Last OUT Punch Transfer Rounding Transfer rounding is used on punches that are designated as transfer punches by an employee pressing the transfer button on the termin
280. lected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected Holidays click on the Remove All button e Click on the Move Up or Move Down buttons to move a holiday up or down in the Selected column to change the priority 15 When you have finished click on the button to save your settings The Holiday Group will appear as a row in the Table View Creating a Pay Class 1 Click on Pay Class module within the Setup group in the Tree View see the following figure A Time Guardian John_Smith File Edit Help DER E Today Setup wh Company NJ MFG H A Users a Pay Codes H Ss 7 Shifts E ae D Day Rules E As Siedle H Locations Daily Activities 69 Output Description MJ MFG union shift Period Type 2 Click on the button and the Pay Class window will appear Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module 10 7 Pay Class Seed ertime Definitio Overtime Execution Overtime Authorization Benefit Execution General Day Change Holiday Schedule Rounding Name NIMFG Description Shift 555_shift Daily Rule 555_daily_rules Shift Auto Punch Out None i Payperiod Type Weekly Bi Weekly Semi Monthly O Monthly Custom Start Date 4 5 2010 z No of days 1 Hours Authorization gau 3 Using the drop down list select for the Shift Auto Punch Out based on none Schedule End or Last In Punch The following two scenarios can be use
281. list are labor number or name 22 6 Time amp Attendance Software User Group Module Additionally labor categories can be filtered in the Available or Selected lists by entering additional case sensitive characters in dedicated Criteria fields see above illustration The Criteria field located above the Available list filters only that list while the Criteria field above the Selected list filters that list Each list is filtered independently in ascending order Note By unselecting labor categories it can reduce the Employees that the user can have access to 11 Click on the Employee tab This tab is used to set user access to employee records 3 Users General Password Pay Class Department Employee Sort Number Criteria Selected 11 1 Kovacs Jim 6 123 Dominicci Carmen 10 125 Moro Tom Add all 1000 Smith John 1111 Johnson Jack 1234 Smith John Remove 5555 Moore Johnathan 9 5999 Poulton Alan Remove All 8888 James Bill C Show Active Employees Only Show Active Employees Only did ol 12 By default all employee records are selected and will appear in the Selected list Employees can be removed from the Group by selecting them in the Selected list and clicking on the Remove button All the employees can be removed from the Selected list by clicking on the Remove All button Employees can be simultaneously filtered in both the Available a
282. ll appear as the title of the report Click to show title on every page if desired 20 In the Footer Text field enter the text that you want to appear on the footer of the report 21 Click on the Sort tab See the following illustration for an example lt 0 x Exception Paycode PUIG Ele Emolovee General Date Range ii Title Page F Footer Sort Sort Option Employee Number ee Badge Employee Payroll Id Employee FirstName Employee LastName wis e e The Available column lists the sorting criteria reports They are Employee Number Employee Badge Number Employee Payroll Number Employee First and Last Name Employee Numbers are selected by using the dropdown list in each of the corresponding sort fields e Click on the up or down arrows to move an item up or down in the sort Available column to change the sorting priority Note Sorting options may vary depending upon the report selected e Placing a check in the Page Break column will place a page break after each of the sorting criteria selected e Placing a check in the Totals column will total each of the sorting criteria selected e Placing a check in the Ascending column will list each of sorting criteria selected in ascending order on the report No check will list them in descending order e Placing a check in the Show column will allow the selected sort criteria to appear in the report Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 5 e The placement of
283. ll appear in the Shift Overtime window 5 Click on the Level tab a Shift Overtime i General Level Count From Base Fe o0 00 i Level 1 08 00 Ta 08 00 Schedule 10 00 OT Level 2 10 00 Level 3 12 00 amp 12 00 DT Jir al Level 4 o 6 Inthe Level table enter the threshold limits from and To times and assign a reasonable Pay Code to each level of shift overtime For example in the example shown in the previous figure an employee will be paid based upon the schedule for a regular 8 hour day From the 8 hour to the 10 hour the employ will be paid for an OT overtime rate While from the 10 to 12 hours the employee will be paid ata DT double time rate and from the 12 hour till the end of the day the employee will be paid ata TT triple time rate 7 Click on the Count tab Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module lt a Shift Overtime General Level Count Pass REG Base Level 1 K OT DT TT SCK vac PER Ho JURY BRY Ooosesooo0o ODO OOORe OOO SOO ODO PESO NI REG 8 Inthe Count table check the Pay codes in each column that you want to be combined to achieve each level s threshold For example if you checked REG and HOL in the Levell column then the hours for REG and HOL Pay codes will be combin
284. llaneous Message select from dropdown Miscellaneous Usage enter Reset APB Resets the tag holder to the APB constraint condition on the doors to which they have access Suspend Enables the tag holder to override the APB constraint condition on the doors to which they have access by suspending it If you wish to assign another tag for the employee click on the Tag 2 thru Tag 4 Tag 8 buttons and follow a similar procedure performed for Tag 1 Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module 16 3 Configuring Nexus 220 The following paragraphs detail the steps involved in integrating data between the Time amp Attendance software and the Nexus 220 system Step A Configure the Nexus 220 settings with the following procedure 1 Login to the Time amp Attendance software select the Setup Wizard from the Edit menu and the Setup Wizard screen will appear 2 From the General Tab of the Setup Wizard select Yes to integrate Access Control then click on the Access Control button and the Access Control screen will appear Access Control General Firebird Access Control Type Select your Access Database Firebird Re Punch Protection F tk 4uto Sync Access Control On Login 3 From the General tab on the Access Control screen e Select Nexus 220 as the Access Control type e Select Firebird Nexus 220 version 1 0 only works with Firebird as the Database type e lf you want to process all valid Transa
285. llowing 12 26 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module Import General Import File Format Settings Import Default Settings Import Field Map Settings Delimiter Tab v Text qualifier None i Date Format Month 1 ss on Month 1 gt a Month 1 wy Hour Format Hour 8 00 Full Name Format FirstName LastName Hour 8 00 Hour 08 90 Hour ack Hour 08 00 gt Minutes 480 Ba e Delimiter Select a Delimiter from the dropdown list The Delimiter is the character which separates the data elements from one another The choices are Tab Comma Pipe Semicolon Backslash Forward slash or User Defined If User Defined is selected you must enter the character in the field provided e Text Qualifier Selecta Text Qualifier from the dropdown list The choices are None Single Quote or Double Quote The Text Qualifier is the character which encapsulates a data element i e California e Date Format Select the date format from the dropdown lists The choices are Month 1 Month 01 Month J an Month J anuary Year 90 Year 1990 Day 1 Day 01 and Day Mon e Hour Format Select the hour format The choices are Hour 8 00 Hour 08 00 Hour 08 00 or Minutes 480 e Full Name Format Select the Full Name Format from the dropdown list Note This field will be available for assignment in the Import Field Map Settings tab 13 Clic
286. lo Romwell Once complete field s specific to Time Guardian such as Schedule Department Wages and Employee Type will have to be updated for the newly imported employees from Access Control These items can also be globally assigned Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 31 Do you want to import employee information from specific file Answer Yes to this question if you want to use this built in import feature This feature allows you to import employee information from a text file directly into the Time Guardian database To use this feature you will need to know the name and location of the file to be imported Click on the Employee Import button and the Import window see figure will appear on the General tab E Import Hot poom General Import File Format Settings Import Default Settings Import Field Map Settings Name New jersey Bldg 35 employees Description 2010 MJ Employee import file File Marnie CTime Guardian Import_Emp csv log Import Type Employee Override Existing Individual Schedule C Advanced Schedule Note Default import fields are provided to be used and defaults will be used if the imported file a 7 i does not contain data for those fields Create a new Employee Import file You will be required to enter a Name In the Name field enter a name for the Import profile Enter a brief description of the Import p
287. lowing options to include them on the report e Enter No of Punch ina Row e Enter No of Pay Code ina Row e Show terminal number e Employee signature line e Show Comments e Supervisor signature line e Check Actual Punches or Rounded Punches Advanced Modules can add the following e Cost Rate e Billable Rate e Show Zone Number For Labor Analysis Report Only Check the output formats for the report For Presence Report Check the following options to include them on the report Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 3 e On Premise e Out e Absent 10 For Historical Hours Report Check the following options to include them on the report e Exception s Per Day e Display Weekly Total e Select Day of Week 11 For Audit Report Check the following option to include it on the report e Show full Audit history 12 For Schedule Posting Report Check the following options to include them on the report e Print advance schedules e Advance schedules override regular schedules e Print employee phone number 13 For Schedule vs Actual Report Check the following options to include them on the report e Report type of Summary or Detail e Punch time of Actual Punches and Rounded Punches 14 In the Output Format section for all report types click on either PDF to generate the report in Adobe Acrobat PDF format or Excel to generate the report in an Excel worksheet 15 Click on the Date Range tab See the following illustration for a
288. loyee has a regular schedule of working from 08 15 to 17 00 Mormal 3 hrs from schedule start with meal window of 2 hrs and 00 45 min meal 08 15 17 00 No Punch No Punch deduction no punching Normal 3 hrs from schedule start with meal window of 2 hrs and 00 45 min meal deduction punching for meal hours rounding with no grace Normal 3 hrs from schedule start with meal window of 2 hrs and 00 45 min meal ne T TE 30 mins deduction puncing for meal hours short meal rounding with no grace Normal 3 hrs from schedule start with meal window of 2 hrs and 00 45 min meal po 7 ja 1 00 00 15 deduction puncing for meal hours A i 45 mins rounding with meal grace 15 mins Normal 3 hrs from schedule start with meal window of 2 hrs and 00 45 min meal ag ny Out 12 15 deduction puncing for meal punch ein In 13 00 rounding with no meal grace Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 27 Holidays 1 From the Pay Class screen click on the Holidays tab and the Pay Class Holidays screen will appear see figure This tab is used to assign pre defined Holidays to a Pay Class Note The tab will not be enabled if you selected No in Step 3 Pay Code Setup for Does your company have paid Holidays LE ox aaa oma a General Overtime Rules Rounding Rules Meal Rules Holidays Select paid Holidays For this Pay Class Available Selected Martin Luther King Birthday a gt
289. lso be required to indicate what day you want the punches to be applied to This is done by selecting Previous Next or Current for the Start or End times 4 Schedules with different Start and or End times can also be created This is done by first creating a basic schedule and entering the days with common Start and or End times Select the Add button to add another row for the schedule For example the standard 8am 5pm shift Mon Fri might have a different start and end time on Sat and Sun 3 14 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 5 After completing the entry selection of information for Step 4 Schedules Setup click on the Next la button to advance to Step 5 Pay Class Setup Step 5 Pay Class Setup W izard R equired W izard Setup Step E Setup Wizard Step 5 Pay Class Setup Configure your Pay Class rules Note Setup Pay Period Overtime Meal and Rounding rules Pay Class Note Step 5 Pay Class Setup only performs basic Pay Class setup If you are configuring Amano Time amp Attendance software with the Advanced Pay Class module activated i e Time Guardian Pro you must continue configuring Pay Class rules from the Pay Class module in the tree view see Advanced Pay Class Advanced Overtime Advanced meal and Advanced Rounding sections as the Overtime Rules tab Rounding Rules and Meal Rules tabs will be grayed out non accessible There is NO Custom selection in the Pay Period Interval Settings
290. m the choices of Add Punch Add Hours or Add Dollars 6 12 Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration e When Add Punch is selected the following is an example of the General Global Edit window E Global Edit General Edit Type Add Punch Add Hours Add Dollars Punch Settings Punch oe moam DLS Paid As Punch Punch Type Break Meal Type Meal Labor Settings Conmments Reason e Enter Punch Settings for Punch enter punch time i e 16 00 4 00 PM DLS check box if you want punch entered under DLS Paid As Punch check box if you want punch to be paid as punch Select Punch Type the choices are Standard or Transfer If Standard for Punch Type selected no other choices available If Transfer for Punch Type selected check Home Labor box to bypass departments or select desired departments for transfer If Break Meal for Punch Type selected select Meal Type from the dropdown menu Note Advanced Meal module must be activated for this feature to be available e lf desired enter text in the Comments reason field e When Add Hours is selected the following is an example of the General Global Edit window F Global Edit General Edit Type Add Punch Add Hours Add Dollars Adjustment Settings Hours 00 00 Pay Code REG Zone Code ZONE1 Yy Labor Settings C Home Labor Department 1 Default Comments Reason3 TEST Park
291. mbined Cost Rates e Combined Billable Rates e Time card Show Billable Rates e Report Show Billable Rates e Report show up to 6 labor levels Software Setup amp Feature Software Configuration Location Labor R ate Main Application Tree View Using the Advanced L abor R ate M odule Labor levels are used to determine where an employee worked and what an employee worked on When the Advanced Labor Rate Module is activated up to 6 main Labor Level categories can be created with an unlimited number of entries per category These multiple levels can be used simultaneously for where an employee worked as well as what an employee worked on Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module 15 1 Example of Multiple L abor L eves An employee is scheduled to work from 9 00 AM to 6 00 PM From 9 00AM to 11 00AM they work in Building A and in the Production Department While working in Production the employee performed the job of welding parts that were needed for Work Order 100200 and then from 11 00 AM to 6 00 PM the employee switched to the job of Assembly of parts needed for Work order 100300 The assignment of labor for the day would look like this Hours Pay Labor Labor Level Labor Level 9 00 11 00 Building A Welding Work Order 100200 11 00 5 00 6 00 Regular Building A Assembly Work Order 100300 5 00 6 00 Building A Assembly Work Order 100300 How many labor levels the employee s hours are assigned
292. me Labor box to bypass departments or select desired departments e If desired enter text in the Comments reason field e Click on the Next Mal button and the following is an example of the Global Edit Exceptions window that will appear 6 14 Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration E cioba edit EEE Exceptions Available Selected LM Long Meal Add EO Early Out Add All LI Late In LO Late Out Remove MP Missing Punch ABS Absence Remove all UNSCH Not Scheduled Move Up Move Down e To add an exception highlight the desired exception in the Available list and click on the Add button e To add all exceptions from the Available list click on the Add All button e Toremove an exception highlight the desired exception in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e Toremove all selected exceptions click on the Remove All button e Click on the Move Up or Move Down buttons to move an exception up or down in the Selected column to change the priority Note To move backwards at any time click on the Previous Ki button e Click on the Next Mal button and the following is an example of the Date Range Global Edit window that will appear Date Range Date Selection Date Range y F tedudes Today Select Date 7 3 2009 p Month Aua vear 2009 ACOA Ca a From Date Until C Forward lavis 2 WE 456 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Backwa
293. me as the Badge number 16 2 Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module Tag Code 2080 Access Rights Site 4CI_ Support Level Normal Access Group 1 Tag Expiry Start Date 0 ue Start Time 12 00 AM End Date 0 d End Time 11 59 PM Miscellaneous Type Personal Access Code Message C Suspend ka kal bd E nter the following for Tag s TAG Code The number of the tag or badge you wish to use Use the Read Badge icon to the right of the TAG Code field to enter the number from the Registration Reader RR Site Select the site from the dropdown list to assign relevant site number that the employee will have access to Level Tag Options Assigns one of the following functions to the badge or tag a Normal Normal employee b Suspend All access for a particular tag is suspended c Blacklist The tag holder will be denied access to the site d Special Events 1 and 2 Button Tag holders are admitted for specific events such as a meeting or demonstration Access Group for Access groups that will be assigned to the tag Start Date The date when the tag will be activated YYYYMMDD End Date Displays the date when the tag will expire YYYYMMDD If left blank the tag will never expire Start Time The actual hour 1 23 on the date when the tag will start HH End Time The actual hour 1 23 on the date when the tag will expire HH Miscellaneous Type select from dropdown Misce
294. mited number of employees TimeGuardiarn ee ee Time amp Attendance Software Installation 2 1 Time amp Attendance Software I nstallation The following discussion utilizes Time Guardian for screen illustrations The installation of the Amano Time amp Attendance software is as follows 1 Insertthe Amano CD into your CD ROM drive The software program should automatically launch the InstallAnywhere Wizard see figure 2 When the Introduction screen appears click on the Next button to continue 2 Time Guardian z Introduction gt Introduction InstallAnywhere will quide you through the installation of Time Guardian Itis strongly recommended that you quit all programs before continuing with this installation Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen Ifyou want to change something on a previous screen click the Previous button You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the Cancel button Lome 3 The License Agreement screen will appear Check the selection to accept the terms of the License Agreement and click on the Next button Clicking on I do NOT accept stops the installation process i Time Guardian a x License Agreement Introduction Installation and Use of Time Guardian Requires Acceptance of the License Agreement Following License Agreement j SA l Amano Cincinnati Inc License Agreement A IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY DO N
295. mmended you install your terminal using the appropriate terminal installation guide The terminal is installed to communicate with the host PC The installation guide will provide the necessary steps to install the terminal Y ou may need to obtain the IP address for each Ethernet terminal s connected to the system Step 8 Clock Setup Is optional use this step only if e The company doesn t have access system e The company doesn t want the Time Attendance System to be integrated with Access Control System e The company has an access system but wants to use a different device s for Time Attendance Do you have Terminal s other than Access Control Terminal s If Yes the Time amp Attendance software will automatically poll and upload punches from connected terminals each time the software is opened Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 45 If No the connected terminals will have to be polled manually using the Communications menu in the Time amp Attendance software Answer No to this question if only Access Control terminal s are directly connected to the PC in which the Time amp Attendance software Is installed Do you want to configure Terminal Validation If Yes is selected for Terminal Validation click the Terminal Validation button and the Terminal Validation screen will appear See figure Terminal validation provides employee filtering from the setup configured in the General Department and Em
296. modifications made to the program This invaluable report also provides the date day and time the modification was made including the Login name of the user who made the change Events will be listed in chronological order starting with the first edit and continuing through to the last with a line separating activities for each date This report will record all punch transaction records and warnings of undefined data Audit Report Date range Aug 9 2009 Aug 15 2009 Employee 1002 Badge 1002 Bill Jackson Audit Date and Time User Rec Id Field Description Old Value New Value Aug 10 2009 15 07 John_Smith 2814 Punch Date 08 03 2009 08 00 08 03 2009 06 00 Aug 10 2009 15 07 John_Smith 2821 Punch Date 08 04 2009 17 00 08 04 2009 16 45 Aug 10 2009 15 07 John_Smith 2824 Punch Date 08 05 2009 08 00 08 05 2009 08 15 Aug 10 2009 15 06 John_Smith Punch Date 08 07 2009 17 00 08 07 2009 19 00 Aug 10 2009 15 11 John_Smith Work Hours Adjustment OT 08 03 2009 02 30 hrs OT 08 03 2009 04 30 hrs Aug 10 2009 15 08 John_Smith Punch Date 08 08 2009 07 30 Aug 10 2009 15 08 John_Smith Punch Date 08 08 2009 14 30 Aug 10 2009 15 11 John_Smith Work Hours Adjustment REG 08 04 2009 39 00 hrs Aug 10 2009 15 12 John_Smith Work Hours Adjustment REG 08 04 2009 39 00 hrs REG 08 04 2009 43 00 hrs Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 9 E mployee R eport As seen in the following example the Employee Report provides a list of employees includ
297. module will be included with any optional module It is not be available in the basic software package Selected Auto Schedules RWAD Add Combined Billable Ratesk W AD Combined Cost Rates RW AD Add All Communications RWAD Company RWAD Remove Consecutive Overtime R W AD Daily Overtime RW AD Remove All Time amp Attendance Software User Group Module 22 1 The following table is a list of Time and Attendance Modules controlled by User Group Access ate Communication Holiday Group Pay Periods Schedule Zone Award Schedule Company IM Profile Payrolls Coverage Zone Codes Consecutive Import Period Overtime Schedule Rotation Zone Differential Overtime Individual ee Daily Overtime ez nadie Qualification Rules Shift Overtime Daily Rules Labor Levels Range Overtime S hifts Using the User Group M odule The User Group module in the Setup group is used to create user profiles accounts and assign access privileges to these accounts This is accomplished through the use of User ID s Passwords and Groups access levels Groups are specific levels of rights and accessibility privileges These levels are custom to your company s needs and are created in the Groups module which is beneath the Users module in the Tree View Groups must be created before Users can be assigned Groups Access privileges are defined in the Groups selection from the optional User Group Module in the Tree View Th
298. mplates can be created and assigned to a shift template Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module 13 1 Part Time Shift NJ MFG Plant Part Time Shift Rounding Template Exception Template Meal Template Shift Overtime Outside Shift Overtime None Note Ifthe advanced meal module is not active the meal template will be grayed out but the exception template will stay selectable and meal template will not be accessible from the tree view Using the Advanced M eal M odule Meals are the deduction of hours taken from an employee or hours given to the employee for meals and breaks The meals are broken up into 3 categories meals breaks and coffee breaks There are two types of deduction fixed or flexible Note If you wish to duplicate the properties of an existing Meal template for another Meal Overtime template select the desired Meal template open it enter in a new name and As click on the EJ button The new Meal template will appear in the Main View e A fixed meal or break has to be taken ata set time of the day see Fixed Meal Template topic for details of Break Coffee Breaks Meals Assignments and Break Credit tabs for a Fixed Meal e A flexible meal is a meal that can be taken at any time of the day see Flexible Meal Template topic for details of Break Coffee Breaks Meals Assignments and Break Credit tabs for a Flexible Meal Fixed M eal Template A fixed meal or break has t
299. mplates s EER maan General Breaks Coffee Breaks Meals Assignments Break Credit Type r i Sequence Order Meal Break 2 Meal Coffee break 15 Assign sequence of Meal Template types To create a Flexible Window Meal Template 1 Click on the Meal Templates node within the Shifts module in the Tree View 2 Click on the a button and the Meal Templates window will appear Meal Templates General Breaks Coffee Breaks Meals Name New Jersey plant 1 st shift meals Description Meal template for 1st shift Default Position Start End Type v Flex Type Window Auto Meal Deduct meal when employee does not punch out for meal Must work at least 04 00 hours to have meal deducted Meal position to deduct from 00 00 from Stat End of Schedule 3 Entera name for the Meal Template in the name field 13 12 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module 4 Select the Default Punch Position Start or End that the break or meal will be based upon Select Flex as the Type and Window as the Flex Type 6 Place a check in the Auto Meal check box if you wish to have an automatic break deduction Enter in the required number of hours to work before the deduction Is applied and select the Meal Position of the shift to deduct from The Meal Position is used to determine where in the employee s worked hours the system will deduct the time for the flexible mea
300. mployees with available upgrade from 25 additional employee capacity to unlimited maximum see previous table Thirteen 13 Built In Payroll Interfaces Optional Payroll Module activation can supply additional Payroll Interfaces from 1 to 45 additional see Payroll Module section for additional information Fixed Template Schedule one schedule per day Optional Advanced Schedule Module activation unlimited number of schedules with auto schedules Template Schedules with Auto Schedule Individual Advanced Schedules Schedule Rotation and Employee Schedule Override One Labor level fixed to department Optional Advanced Labor Rate Module activation Can supply additional 5 labor levels see Advanced Labor Rate Module section for additional information Unlimited Number of Departments Time Rounding Capability Based on Company Defined Pay Class Customizable Rounding Optional Advanced Rounding Module activation can supply additional advanced Pay Class and or Daily Rules rounding schemes see Advanced Rounding Module section for additional information Nine 9 Predefined Pay Codes for Hours Allocation with Pay Code Multipliers Rates for Wages calculation Two 2 Pay Codes for Tips and Bonuses Optional Advanced Overtime Module activation adds TT triple time pay code Nine 9 Predefined Exception Flags for Employee Punch Tracking Nine 9 On Demand Reports Optional Advanced Pay Class Module activation adds 2 rep
301. n cinde tick Wil set the cell under the mouse arrow to the current cell and will pe allow changing the value Double click Will set the current cell into Edit Mode Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration 6 9 Hot Keys The table below lists hot keys for commands for the Timecard grid Some may also used throughout the Amano Time amp Attendance software family S Insert Row when a whole row is highlighted or Insert Punch when one ji cellis highlighted an ETD Delete Row when a whole row is highlighted or delete Punch when one cellis highlighted Will place current cell into Edit Mode Will undo the changes made in the cell while in Edit Mode Adding Editing and Deleting Employee Punches Adding Punches Punches are added by clicking on the desired IN or OUT punch field and or by clicking the Add Punch button in the toolbar and entering the time in the field Punches can be entered in either military or AM PM format For example 5 o clock PM can be entered as 500p AM PM or 1700 Military When entering in AM PM format AM is the default When 8 is entered it will be taken as 8 00 AM If 8 o clock PM Is intended the 8 must be followed by a P or 8P When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes 6 10 Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration E diting Punches To edit punches double click on the desired IN or OUT Punch field an
302. n Ee Timecar d 1002 Jackson Bill aj Rin os 1002 Jackson Bill A 572 09 8 8109 Gl R E ia z Punches Overrides Adjustments Sun EDT 2 Pl aa Ka L z Mon O EDT Mon 40 00 Mon 08 00 Mon 17 00 t a 9 Tue jco S Tue Tu a00 Tue 08 00 Tue 17 00 2009 Wed EDT Wed EEM 40 00 Wed 08 00 Wed 17 00 2009 Thu O EDT Thu Thu ao j Thu 08 00 Thu 17 00 Fi EDT Fri Fri 40 00 I Fri 08 00 Fri 17 00 2009 Sa FeO EDT Sat UNSCH Daily Totals Period Totals Category Hours oos Cost cost Total aega Hears balers Coot Cost Tata 43 00 a Total E Total 207 30 Paycode EG 203 00 Paycode REG vr Gla ha ave G 43 00 Labor The Punches Tab in the Timecard grid consists of the following displayed columns Field Description Date that punches schedule belong to Dates within Paypernod that have no punches or schedule Indicator Indicator symbol displayed to show timecard modified Time Zone used for punch Day IN Punch Day for IN Punch IN Punch indication of an edited punch with color Day OUT Punch Day for OUT Punch OUT Punch indication of an edited punch with color Pre calculation adjustment to only punches hours Time off i e meal break coffee break out off time Exceptions Exceptions listed for all punches Schedule Name forstart and end of schedule Authonzation requir
303. n Note when logged in on the Web this counts one concurrent user Therefore to simultaneously login on a PC would require anther concurrent user Supervisor W eb Access The Setup Daily Activities Output and Preferences menus from the Time amp Attendance software allow a supervisor to schedule edit time sheets run reports edit add employees and reset passwords The supervisor allowed menu items provide this user group with access to the following features e ie Template Schedules Adjustment columns W Auto Schedules Exception colors fw Schedules Miscellaneous colors TL Schedule Rotation Period Totals A Reset Password Punches Columns Jail Activities da Employees di Certifications i Individual scheduler Schedule W eb An employee s schedule is made up of template schedules and auto schedules Together these schedules form the weekly work pattern that can be applied to an employee 17 4 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module Template Schedules W eb A template schedule is a schedule that an employee has for a particular day Sun Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri or Sat For example Employee 1 will have a schedule setup as follows sun ost UD The template schedule consists of start and end times Fixed type only which may span across multiple days this is limited by maximum shift length Pay Code shift rules and the days to apply the schedule Open schedules do not
304. n Period Previous Open Period Current Week Previous Week Current Month Previous Month Last 2 Weeks Date Range Current Pay period or Previous Pay period From Date Enabled when Date Range is selected as the Date Selection Enter the date that the Date Range will begin or click on the button to select a date The Select Date dialog box will appear as shown in the following Year 3 ES l4 5 6 A amp 9 10 li 13 l4 15 16 17 13020 21 22 23 q 2h 27 28 29 30 a When you have finished click on the click on the Save button to enter the date Until Enabled when Date Range is selected as the Date Selection Enter the date that the Date Range will end or click on the button to select a date The Select Date dialog box will appear as shown in the following Year e 4 85 8 amp 8 FF amp 49 iD lg 13 id 15 ib 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 2 28 29 30 Fa When you have finished click on the click on the Save button to enter the date Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 13 e Forward and Backward Enabled when Date Range is selected as the Date Selection Allows the option of going forward or backward as many days weeks months or years from the From Date 6 Click on the Pay Class tab This tab allows you to select those employees that belong to particular Pay Classes By default all Pay Classes are selected Individual Schedule Cost Center SS Department JOBCLASS
305. n 08 00 Mon 17 00 Time Card Dala range Apr 19 2010 May 2 2010 Hours 40 00 Wed 0600 AM Wed 05000 PM As seen in the following example the Tips Report provides a complete and detailed account of employees punch tips with totals for a specified period of time Information will vary based on your company s Setup Wizard selections Aug 3 2009 DeAccrual Balance R eport Employee Number Tips Report Date range Jun 1 2009 Aug 17 2009 Badge Number Tip Amount Bill Jackson As seen in the following example the DeAccrual Balance Report provides a list of employees showing balance of remaining yearly benefits Requires Benefit Time module activation to be available 9 14 Time amp Attendance Software Output DeAccrual Balance Paycoda Amount Taken Current Last updated date BRV 00 00 00 00 i Apr 19 2010 HOL 00 10 00 Apr 19 2010 00 0 0 Apr 19 2010 Apr 19 2010 Apr 19 2010 Apr 79 2010 DeAccrual History Report As seen in the following example the DeAccrual History Report provides a list of employees showing history of benefit use Requires Benefit Time module activation to be available DeAccrual History Date range Apr 19 2010 May 2 2010 Current Old New Running a Report Profile To run a report from a Report Profile select the desired Report Profile from the list in the Table View of the Reports module and click on the Run Report a button The report will be ge
306. n example General Date Range Title Page Footer Sort Exception Paycode lass Depaitment Employee Date Selection Date Range v From Date Sooo M x Month EER Year 2009 a ICs Coa a Forward E Davis 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 26 27 28 29 30 31 ziz 16 In the Date Selection field select the date range for the report The choices are Today Yesterday Last Open Period Previous Open Period Current Week Previous Week Current Month Previous Month Last 2 Weeks Date Range Current Pay period and Previous Pay period Note When Current Pay period and Previous Pay period are selected the first Pay Class in the Selected List on the Pay Class tab will be used as the date range for the report 17 If Date Range was chosen as the Date Selection you must enter the From Date and Until Date using the Calendar icon You also have the option of going forward or backward as many days weeks months or years from the From Date using the Forward and Backward options 9 4 Time amp Attendance Software Output 18 Click on the Title Page Footer tab See the following illustration for an example General Date Range Title Page Footer Sort Exception Pay Code Employee Title IHistorical Hours Footer Text Historical Hours 19 In the Title field enter the title that you want to appear on the report If no title is entered the report name type wi
307. nal type you must have multiple Locations The window will open on the General Tab with a Location Name Itis recommended to use the default names for an MTX 15 or FPT 40 terminal Note Two default terminal locations have been setup and they are called MTX 15 Default and FPT 40 Default Direct connection serial for either terminal does not require any additional setup while Ethernet does require the IP Address for each terminal To create a new Location 1 Create a new Location and you will be required to enter a unique Name yellow required field that will be used to describe the area or site where a terminal or group of terminals is located 2 Inthe Description field enter in a brief description of the Location 3 Inthe Term Type field select the type of terminal you are using atthis location The choices are MTX 5 MTX 10 MTX 15 MTX 20 FPT 40 HandPunch 1000 2000 3000 or 4000 4 Inthe TZ Time Zone Offset field select the time zone difference if applicable between the physical location of your PC and the terminals 5 In the Output Path field enter the path of the output XML file If necessary press the Browse button to navigate to the location of the XML output file 6 If necessary check the Secondary Output File box and In the Output Path field enter the path of the secondary output file Press the Browse button to navigate to the location of the secondary output file 7 For DLS Dayl
308. nd Selected lists in ascending order by using the Sort field dropdown list The choices in this list are employee number badge number payroll number last name first name or comment field Additionally Employee s can be filtered in the Available or Selected lists by entering additional case sensitive characters in dedicated Criteria fields see above illustration The Criteria field located above the Available list filters only that list while the Criteria field above the Selected list filters that list Each list is filtered independently in ascending order Also employees can be filtered by checking the Show Active Employees Only box for each list independently Note By unselecting Pay Classes it will reduce the Employees that the user can have access to Note The Administrator and Support accounts cannot be deleted Time amp Attendance Software User Group Module 22 7 This page intentionally left blank 22 8 Time amp Attendance Software User Group Module Glossary 100 of hours Displays hours in the software in decimal format Example 8 hours 15 minutes will be displayed as 8 25 hours About Displays the version of the software and the Serial Number of the package ABS Absence When an employee is scheduled to work on a day and does not appear Add Employee Adds new employees to the Time and Attendance software Advanced Settings Allows the user to set a specific Da
309. nd which is the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break c Click on the Coffee Breaks tab Repeat steps 10 through 12 for the Coffee Breaks d Click on the Meals tab Repeat steps 10 through 12 for the Meals An example of how this would be used is to look at an employee who Is assigned a 1 00 hour meal size to be taken during the day When the employee actually takes his or her meal if he or she takes less than 1 00 hour the software will denote this as a Short Meal and if he or she takes more than 1 00 hour the software will denote this as a Long Meal Using the example above as the setup a short meal example would be if employee takes 00 45 minutes for meal the software will denote this as a Short Meal The employee will have a short meal of 00 15 minutes 01 00 00 45 Therefore the short meal of 00 15 minutes is less than the threshold and then the software will deduct the Allowed Meal of 1 00 hour If the employee takes 00 20 minutes for meal the software will denote this as a Short Meal The employee will have a short meal of 00 40 minutes 01 00 00 20 13 8 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module Therefore the short meal of 00 40 minutes is more than the threshold and then the software will deduct the Amount Taken of 00 20 minutes e If you have selected Interval as the Flex Type Click on the Assignments tab Meal Templates E Eg _ _
310. nder calculation When you have finished click on the click on the button To assign a User Defined Individual Schedule select a cell in the grid and select the desired schedule name from the Advanced Schedule pop up menu The selected schedule will appear in the grid When you have finished click on the click on the button to save your settings and exit the Individual Scheduler window Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 21 Schedule R otation Schedule Rotation is used to setup repeating schedule patterns For example some workers work at 7 day rotation of 4 days on and 3 days off schedule Rotating schedules are assigned to employees in the Assignments tab of the Employees module To create a Rotating Schedule Template 1 Click on the Schedule Rotation node within the Schedule module in the Tree View see the following figure A Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA RER File Edit Help 3 0 Today i Name GG Setup Name Description Relative Start Date PA Company Son 2ZOff Son 20ff weekly schedule for 8am 5pm Dec 4 2006 di Users NJ Flex 4on 3ofF new NJ Flex 10hr day Dec 17 2007 Bd Paycodes 4 3F Shifts 4 Daily Rules 5 Payclass ry Schedule Hi H Template Schedules Z Auto Schedules i E Schedule Coverage Schedule Rotation W Schedule Rotation 7 4 i 3 1 6 0 1 1 Name NJ Roseland Plant Engineering Schedule Description NJ Roseland Plant Engineering Sc
311. ne Number If your modem is not available from the list select a compatible model This information should be provided in the modem s documentation The telephone number entered must be the terminal s modem Include 1 Area Code 7 digit phone number when applicable Direct The terminal s are directly connected to the Host PC via Com Port If selected you must select the Com Port and Baud Rate 10 Click on the Terminals tab to add edit delete or find terminals Locations aa ES Gl 000 frronc oor O General Connection Terminals Name ober Serialo Active ae 11 To find terminals click on the Find Terminals button to search for terminals see figure 3 50 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Communicating with terminalis xj Find Terminals Processing 0 of 1 OM Gancel NS The Ethernet and directly connected terminals in this location will appear in the Terminals list See figure EEE E E ed front ooo General Connection Terminals Ie q cat Delete Ea Le 12 Double click on the found terminal or highlight the terminal and click on the Add button to add a new HandP unch Terminal to the Location and the Terminal window will appear for setup If adding a new FPT 40 or MTX Terminal you must first search for the Terminal g Terminal General Options Name Edison Location Number I3 Serial No Validation Yal
312. nerated and displayed on screen if Adobe Acrobat PDF Output format was selected If Excel Output was selected the report will be generated and an Excel worksheet created and saved in the Amano Time amp Attendance software directory i e Time Guardian in the Reports folder C Program Files Time Guardian reports Copying a Report Profile to Alternate Users To copy a report from a Report Profile to other users select the desired Report Profile from the list in the Table View of the Reports module and click on the Copy Report Settings Miz button The report profile settings will be copied to the selected Users Since report profiles when created are directly linked to the logged in User the function of being able to transfer copy report profile to another user s is very useful This function quickly creates the same report profile for alternate users Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 15 Payrolls M odule The Payrolls module provides a way of transferring data in the system to payroll software The data is usually transferred by means of a text file formatted to the payroll company s Specifications or directly into the payroll company database Note Activation of the Payroll Interface module can provide up to an additional 40 plus payroll interfaces See Payroll Interface module section for additional information Creating a Payroll Profile 1 Click on the Payrolls module within the Output group in the Tree View
313. ng Ssccess nbl syehen Click on the Next lial button to begin the Setup Wizard to configure the Time amp Attendance S oftware and the Setup Wizard Steps Summary screen will appear See Using the Setup Wizard Time amp Attendance Software Installation 2 9 This page intentionally left blank 2 10 Time amp Attendance Software Installation Chapter 3 Setup Wizard It is recommended that you utilize the Quick Start Guide and or reference this Installation amp Operation Guide as you proceed through the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard will help guide the user through a seamless step by step initial configuration of the Time amp Attendance software As data is entered in each step the Setup Wizard can be sequentially advanced to complete the next step Once initial Setup Wizard is complete and the Time amp Attendance software is logged into the Setup Wizard can be accessed from the Edit menu at any time to modify the software configuration i e add terminals and employees Using Time amp Attendance Software Buttons The following buttons are common to all the modules in the Time amp Attendance software Button Description Button Description Button Description CE The following buttons are module specific and as such some buttons for Time Guardian and Time Guardian Plus may not be active unless that module has been activated However Time Guardian Pro comes standard with all modules Button Descri
314. ntera name for the Outside Shift Overtime rule in the name field required field 4 Enter a description of the Outside Shift Overtime rule in the Description field 5 Select either Before Shift After Shift or both The Before and After tabs will be active only if they are checked Note If you wish to duplicate the properties of an existing Outside Shift Overtime template for another Shift Overtime template select the desired Outside Shift Overtime template from AS the Outside Shift Overtime window open it enter in a new name and click on the button The new Outside Shift Overtime template will appear in the Outside Shift Overtime 6 Click on the Before Shift tab Outside Shift Overtime General Before Shift after Shift A y Level Count from To Base 00 00 i 02 00 Schedule Level 1 02 00 j Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 7 Inthe Level table enter the threshold limits and assign a Pay Code to each level of overtime 8 Click on the Count tab Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 11 9 Outside Shift Overtime ER General Before Shift After Shift Level Count T oO Nm oe T lt v pa Paycode Base opo0p0000 0000 OOOO OOOO poopoo OOOO 9 In the Count table check the Pay Codes in each column that you want to be combined to achieve each level s threshold For example
315. nvert Friday January 18 2008 3 52 PM Conversion Summary Conversion File Format AutoCAD 2000 LT2000 Drawing Format Conversion package type Folder set of files Tanvercion ocak iam C Nacirente a d Sattinaclinavkan Mur Raciimante 4 Start Import At Raw 0 i Available Selected Country Social Security Number Phone Number Gender Management Level Work Phone Extension i I fs i Remove f Remove All Move Up Move Down 2 ead e The contents of your import file will be displayed line by line in the File Contents window This area allows you to assign fields to data elements in each line You can select to import a single line a selected group of lines or all lines SSA LEMME LY FAL CREAT ES iy a VHS SPIREN ER TAN EE Tea on TA A ET To set the row number of the import file that the import operation will begin at enter a number in the Start Import At Row field Each data element in the import file must be defined in the order that it appears Data elements can be separated by commas tabs and semicolons To assign a field select a data element in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all the fields click on the Add All button The field s will then be displayed in the Selected list Add additional fields until all data elements have been properly defined Use the Remove Fields button to un assign fields To skip a data element click on the button A chara
316. ny ID Enter a company code A max of 4 digits Enter none N Normal V Yacation H Holiday 5 Sick Payroll Settings Pay Codes Tab Time amp Attendance Software Output Payroll ID Enter a 2 character upper case code identifying the Select which area to categorize the hours Enter none 1 Regular Hours 2 OT Hours 1 30T Hours 2 407 Hours 3 Ceridian Power Pay Examples of export file fields for Ceridian Power Pay are shown in the following matrix table pe ee ae a ae Payroll idi taii Enter a 2 character upper case code identifying Payroll rayely the payroll batch no General Tab Specify the location and file name for the export h file E Example C ProgramFiles Time Guardian Plus filename Company Number Defaut 1 sss Defaut 1 sss 1 p Se Site Code Default 1 ayroll Settings 3 General Tab RUA Number Defaut 4 0 Period Number Default 1 Pass Dollars Check to transfer dollars through to payroll file TG Plus default Pay uae Code Power Pay Field ID Located in the PDM file Payroll field ID the number after the 15 comma on any line eae with 002 Example 1307 Pep Celie Ta p e Example 1304 9 22 Time amp Attendance Software Output EasyPay Examples of export file fields for EasyPay are shown in the following matrix table R Payroll 3 Payroll Payroll ID General Tab Specify the location and file name for the export file Output Path Example C ProgramFiles T
317. o be taken ata set time of the day To create a fixed Meal Template 1 Click on the Meal Templates node within the Shifts module in the Tree View and the list of meal templates will appear 13 2 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module A Time Guardian John Doe File Edit Help El Today s JA Setup Description Default Position Ph Company Coffee Breaks Breaks for NJ standard Zam 4pm shift Fixed 48 Users Groups Pay Codes Shifts i P Rounding Templates GS Exceptions Sa Shift Overtime Outside Shift Overtime Be Daily Rules Hi Pay Class E Fa Schedule H Locations f Daily Activities 64 Output 2 Click on the aa button and the Meal Templates window will appear Meal Templates General Breaks l Coffee Breaks Meals Break Credit Name Coffee Breaks Description Breaks for NJ standard 7am 4pm shift Default Position Start End Type eee Flex Type Deduct meal when employee does not punch out For meal Auto Meal Must work 03 00 into fixed meal period for automatic deduction Meal position to deduct From Start O End of Schedule E ka ta Enter a name for the Meal Template in the name field Enter a description of the Meal Template in the Description field Select the Default Punch Position that the meal would be deducted from should the employee take less time than the allotted time If Start is chosen the time w
318. ocal Service i Disk Management Apache Tomcat 6 Properties Local Computer 3 Manual Local System a Services and Applications omer Started Automatic Local System 2 Services General Log On Recovery Dependencies Manual Network S ey WMI Control Started Automatic Local System Indexing Service Service name Tomeat6 Manual Local System Display name Apache Tomcat 6 Manual Local System Started Automatic Local System Description Automatic Local System Automatic Local System Started Manual Local System Path D executable Started Automatic Local System C TimeGuardianapache tomeat 6 0 26 bin tomeat6 exe AS Tomeat6 Disabled Local System Started Manual Local System Startup type Manual d Manual Local System Sutomatic Started Automatic Local System Manual be Started Automatic Local System Disabled arred Started Automatic Local System Started Automatic Local System Started Automatic Local System Youcan specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service Started Automatic Local System from here Manual Network 5 Started Automatic Network 5 Started Automatic Local System Automatic Local System Service status Started Automatic Local System OK Cancel l Apply Manual Local System Started Automatic Local System L Extended A Standard Step 4 On the Properties screen under Startup type select Automatic from the dropdown menu and click on th
319. od Day of Week Start or by Pay Period e f Weekly Start is selected then you must select the day of the week the reset begins on Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday and Saturday e Ifthe user chooses Pay Period Day of Week Start then the overtime starts on the day of the week that the pay period actually stated on Note the overtime reset date Is configured in the Overtime Definition tab of the Pay Class e lf the user chooses Pay Period then the start date of each Pay Period is the start date for the overtime and the overtime will continue for the entire pay period The overtime reset date is configured in the Overtime Definition tab of the Pay Class For Range Overtime select the range template created previously 6 Click on Overtime Execution tab This tab determines the order in which overtime will be calculated DEAR ay Change Schedule Rounding Overtime Definition Overtime Execution Overtime Authorization Holiday Benefit Execution ol Order Priority of Overtime The execution order Priority of overtime can be set by selecting the desired overtime type and clicking on the up or LY down arrows to move the overtime up or down the list 11 4 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 7 Execution of Priority The list is calculated in order as they occur provided that the word Continue Is in the Action field of each overtime type
320. oduction 4 FJ License Agreement IE Choose Install Set ogi Choose Install Folder Ti me G ua rd tan F Get User Input aly Choose Database Option Micrasoft SQL information Installing Uninstall Time Guardian exe ireen Cancel 12 At this point the general install is complete and the installation utility will scan your PC for Adobe Acrobat Reader If itis not installed the installation utility will install it iua Guardian E Ed Searching EA Introduction Searching for Files Matching firebird conf License Agreement Looking In C Program Files Adobe ameMaker_Import dialogs JEA Choose Install Set EA Choose Install Folder fi FJ Get User Input fA Choose Database Option ii m Microson SQL information Cancel Previous Time amp Attendance Software Installation 2 5 13 The Firebird Database Server will be installed Time Guardian aS Please Wait Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Set Choose Install Folder Get User Input Choose Database Optia oT R Microsoft SQL informatic 7 Ghotse he Time Guan Executing Database installer igured for your system ent 14 If QuickBooks Integration was selected the QuickBooks drivers will be installed to exchange data between Time Guardian and QuickBooks Next QuickBooks utility will execute and the QuickBooks InstallShield Wizard for QBFC will appear Time Guardian 3 Executing QuickBooks utility
321. oft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Peachtree is a registered trademark of Sage Paychex Paylink and Paychex Preview are registered trademarks of Paychex Inc QuickBooks Pro are trademarks and service marks of Intuit Inc registered in the United States and other countries Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights in those marks Table of Contents Ee OF CONEDE eee cere EP ee erCeEerCR TELCO aa Tree errr reece rece rrr i Chanter LINGO GUC GON sriisaisensnisni n a aaa aE a 1 1 Welcome to Amano Time amp Attendance Software Suite ssssssrsesrrnerrnerrerrrerrrerrreerreerreerree 1 1 Amano Customer SOOO eesse E EE ENE EEEE 1 4 Chapter 2 INS talaton urica OE 2 1 Time amp Attendance Software Installation ccccccsssecssseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeeaeseeseeeerseeersesersesees 2 2 Cnapter 3 Senp Wiza vinscivcievtncinensnscescnnsannnnenis inns A R 3 1 Using Time amp Attendance Software ntciscusercaiaien ce ena 3 1 Using the Setup Wizard sriirser inai E E AE ER E EE 3 3 Chapter a Day US 6 orc E 4 1 MaoU a a E A E E E 4 1 LIYO UCADPE ANEC a eee A EE EEE ee 4 2 HOS FON r E E O A A E E A 4 7 Chapter 5 Employee Administration ssssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 5 1 Adding EMDPIOYEGS etcccrcteteancuerevecsurieequs RANEE EAEE AEAEE A S 5 1 Chapter
322. oliday Group that this holiday belongs to Using the Pay Code dropdown list assign the Pay Code that will be awarded for that holiday Select the Type for the Holiday The choices are Schedule or Hours If Hours is selected proceed to Step 8 If Schedule Is selected proceed to Step 9 Enter in the number of hours that will be awarded for the holiday Click on the Setting tab The Setting tab is used to enter the date that the holiday occurs on i Holiday i E General Setting Bate Definition Termi Term 25 Day Condition Temi Term ccurs On Move To oy Cccurs On Move To A formula is entered in the Date Definition and Condition tables to generate the holiday The Date Definition table consists of the following Creating a Holiday Group The Holiday Group is used to setup the requirements that an employee must meet in order to receive holiday pay Note If you wish to duplicate the properties of an existing Holiday Group for another Holiday 1 2 Group select the desired Holiday Group from the Holiday Group window open it enter in a new name and click on the L E button The new Holiday Group will appear in the Holiday Group window Click on the Holiday Group node within the Pay Class module in the Tree View Click on the button and the Holiday Group window will appear Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module 10 3 _ Holiday
323. olumn by clicking on the column heading Also you can select unselect all the Pay Codes by clicking on the Check Uncheck All Icon Daily Rules The Daily Rules module is used to set the rules which govern daily punches such as Rounding Break Lunch Rounding and Daily Overtime Daily Overtime Overtime is the time an employee works that extends beyond a certain level of time set by the company s policies Daily overtime is based on hours worked and is a way of rewarding the employee for working more hours than a set hour value in one day The hours that exceed the set hour value are normally paid at a higher wage or rate Up to 4 levels of Weekly Overtime can be used Each level can be assigned its own threshold limit that move the hours from one Pay Code to another The following table shows an example pally Overtime From To Pay Code teers oo o Oaie PPC Additionally you can set the Pay Codes that will count toward daily overtime level Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 11 11 To create a Daily Overtime template 1 Click on the Daily Overtime node within the Daily Rules module in the Tree View see figure E Time Guardian John_Smith LBR Fie Edit Help 5i 2 Setup an Company 48 Users n Pay Codes B S Shifts P Rounding Templates Oyertime after 10 hrs M F Employee receives HES Exceptions Af Meal Templates Ba Shift Overtime J Outside Shift Overtime O
324. optional expansion e The Nexus 220 Tag holder must be assigned to a Department e The Department that the Nexus 220 Tag holder is assigned to should exist as one of the Labor Names for the Department Labor Level in Time amp Attendance software e The Nexus 220 Tag holder must have a Tag with a Tag Number that does not equal a Time amp Attendance employee s Badge Number 3 Synchronize Transactions from Nexus 220 to the Time amp Attendance software This is the last step in the synchronization process This process brings in transactions from the Nexus 220 into the Time amp Attendance software as punches The following criteria must be successfully met to import the transactions e The transactions have not been processed e Under the Access Control Settings module when the Reason Code is set to the default value O then all valid transactions will be processed Otherwise only transactions with the set Reason Code value will be processed e The Nexus 220 Tag holder that has a transaction must have an Id No defined Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module 16 5 e The Nexus 220 Tag holder that has a transaction must have a corresponding Time amp Attendance employee where the Tag holder s Id No is equal to the Time amp Attendance Employee Number e lf there is an Employee match then a Punch record will be created in the Time amp Attendance software assigned to that employee e f No employee is foun
325. or overtime if they are selected see table The BONUS Pay Code is for dollars and cannot count towards overtime whereas the REG OT and DT Pay Codes are for hours count towards overtime See table If the Download to clock box is not selected then Pay Codes will not be sent to the MTX 15 and or FP T 40 terminal s to be used for labor transfer A maximum of 4 Pay Codes based on position number can be downloaded to the terminal s Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 11 9 After completing the entry selection of Pay Code information return to the Step 3 Pay Code Setup Does your company have paid holidays Answering Yes to this question and pressing the Holidays button will give you access to the Holiday General amp Setting setup screens see figures Each Holiday requires a unique Name Date Number of Hours and Pay Code Comments can also be entered if desired in the Description field The Name and Hours fields are highlighted in yellow must be filled 2 0 x Ea Gil T 144 g gt gt independence Day r General Setting Name independence Day Description Independence Day Paycode Hor Type Hours v Hours 08 00 1 Entera name for the Holiday in the Name field yellow required field E nter a description of the Holiday in the Description field 3 Using the Pay Code dropdown list assign the Pay Code that will be awarded for that holiday 4 Selectthe Type for the Hol
326. orts Unauthorized Hours report and Time Card Report O ptional Advanced Schedule Module activation adds 2 reports Schedule Posting and Schedule vs Actual Reports Optional Benefit Time Module activation adds 2 reports DeAccrual Balance and DeAccrual History Reports Optional Advanced Labor Rate Module activation adds up to 6 labor levels to reports and show billable rates on reports Optional Access Control integration with Amano Nexus 220 and AmanoNet systems See Access Control Module section for additional information Employee and department synchronization with auto sync on login Automatic Polling of Data Collection Terminal Bell Schedule Capabilities Firebird or MS SQL Database Several Built In Utilities for Maintenance of the System On Line Help Time amp Attendance Software Introduction R equirements e Windows 2000 XP VISTA Server 2000 2003 and 2008 and Mac OS support for MT X 15 terminal communication e CD ROM Drive e 1GB of Memory for Server and 512 MB of Memory for Client e 700 MB of Free Hard Disk Space for Server 100 MB for Client e Broadband Internet Access for Remote Support e Screen Display 800 x 600 Small Font e Optional Microsoft SQL Server 2000 2005 and 2008 e Firebird 2 0 Setup W izard The Time amp Attendance software Setup Wizard provides a seamless setup when used with the appropriate Wizard on line help The Setup Wizard is designed as a 9 step rapid installation and
327. ours 30 minutes 8 50 Access Control Auto Sync and Repunch Protection only enabled when Access Control module is activated Select the Time Format for Timecard and Reports This selection determines the time display format in Time Guardian Select either Standard AM PM 12 hour i e 3 00 PM 3 00 PM or Military 24 hour i e 3 00 PM 15 00 format Click the box to select Auto Poll on Login if desired Upon start up the Time amp Attendance software will automatically poll all connected terminals such as MTX s FPT 40 s and or HP s for the punch information The function to Close Pay Period is on automatically active when activated Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 5 Select Default Pay Code to use from the drop down list IM Settings Escalation Frequency only enabled when Events Notification module is activated 10 Benefit Tracking Type only enabled when the Benefit Time module is activated 11 After completing the entry selection of company information click on the Apply button to Save the company information and return to the Step 1 General Setup Click on the Close fe al button to close the Company window without saving Note The Apply and Close button function is universal for all Setup Wizard steps Do you want to integrate access control Module requires activation to use From Step 1 General Setup press the Access Control button to define the company s access control
328. ours Report This report displays all of the historical data of an employee for a defined length of time including exceptions absences and Pay Code information Exceptions must have at least one exception selected to be included in the report To include a tabulated summary of Exceptions for each day of the week select to Exceptions Per Day Historical Hours Report Date range Aug 9 2009 Aug 15 2009 Bill Jackson Employee Number 1002 Badge Number 1235 Payroll Number 13 Aug Sat Tue Thu Fri Sat Tus Wed Thu Fri Sat Mon Tue Thu Fa Sat Sun Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat of Hours im la slelelel7is e wm aula lm wl mlm loo oe arom oo ote To REG 09 00 17 00 09 00 09 00 09 00 5 53 00 00 00 53 00 00 00 00 00 1 02 00 Week 00 00 OF 02 00 Week 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 ms Code Exception s Per Day Exception Bi Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Total Total s 53 00 oT 02 00 Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 11 Hours Summary Report This report provides a one line total for each employee displaying pay codes wages and total hours This can also provide totals by department when the selected employee is sorted by department Hours Summary Report Date range Aug 9 2009 Aug 15 2009 Department PayCode Default Employee 1002 Badge 1235 Bill Jackson REG Marketing Employee 1002 1235 Bill Jackson OT NJ Engineering Employee 1002 Badge 1235 Bill Jackson RE
329. ow will appear 11 16 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module Weekly Overtime General Level Count Name Pvertime after 40 and DT after 48 Description Employee recieves OT after 40hrs land DT after 48 hrs All paycodes count HR 3 Entera name for the weekly OT template in the name field required field 4 Enter a description of the weekly OT template in the Description field 5 Click on the Level tab Weekly Overtime E 5R General Level Count from To Base 00 00 40 00 Schedule Level 40 00 48 00 OT Level2 48 00 DT Level 3 Level 4 E 6 Enter the threshold limits for each level of weekly overtime and assign a Pay Code to each level of weekly overtime 7 Click on the Count tab Weekly Overtime General Level Count m oO a lt a nN Paycode Base REG OT DT TT Level3 Level 4 O10 OOo 0o00000 ScK VAC PER HOL JURY BRY NJ REG ososno0cors peepee cree pppn aonn 8 Inthe Count table check the Pay Codes in each column that you want to be combined to achieve each level s threshold For example if you checked REG and HOL in the Level 1 column then the hours for REG and HOL Pay Codes will be combined to reach Level 1 s threshold value Note You can select all the Pay Codes in a given column by clicking on the
330. ow will appear for percent increase 15 4 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module iio x liofefzo0s i Click on the button to enter an effective date for the increase and enter in a percentage of the rate you wish to increase the rate by Click on the button when finished To delete a rate or rate operation select the desired row and click on the Delete button R ate Setup The Rate Setup module allows you to classify employee wages or rates in terms of cost or billable rates per employee or Labor Level s There are 2 types for each Standard or Combined Standard applies the rate based on the order set and Combined applies the rate based on the combination of items Employee and Labor Levels selected For multiple employees a Rate Setup template must be configured for each individual employee To define the criteria for Rate Setup templates 1 Select the Rate Setup module within the Company group in the Tree View A Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA MER Fie Edit Help Today h v Setup Option Type Employee Cost Center SS Department JOBCLASS fh Company Combined Wage Cost rate 0 Combined Wage _ Billable rate m Standard Wage _BBillable rate ht o if Standard Wage Cost rate 2 Paycodes Shifts Hae Daily Rules Pay Class PP Schedule Locations E A Daily Activities 69 Output 2 The top line can be used as a filte
331. own lists Default Assignment Assign a default Pay Class Daily Rule Time Zone Schedule and is or Same as Employee Number Zone using the dropdown lists Note The defaults will be used if the import file does not contain data for these fields 14 Click on the Import Field Map Settings tab This tab allows you to manually define the elements of the import file you are using DER Start Import At Row Available Country Gender Management Level Work Phone Extension City Pay Type Comment Badge Number Employee Number Payroll Number Selected Marital Status Add Hire Date Add All I Phone Number Social Security Number Remove Type Zip Code Remove All wi Move Up Move Down The contents of your import file will be displayed line by line in the File Contents window This area allows you to assign fields to data elements in each line You can select to import a single line a selected group of lines or all lines NOWACKI BROWN SCHOPPER BECKER JOHNSON ANDERSON CLEMERITS 4 JESSIE M CHARLES RAYMOND F JEFFREY T TINS M R BO C IRANTA 1433 BRIARCREEK DR 1120 SCHULTE RD 211 5 THIRD ST 7473 HARDSCRAPPLE DR B 45 TESGAOMHTIIS CT MO 63031 T 1 15 00 O C MO 63122 T 8 18 00 0 1 MO 63011 4 528336761 MO 63146 4 492762683 MO 63072 4 489722427 MO 63123 4 5213580 rae maa
332. oyee 1002 Bill J ackson is Bate Rate ping a 17 2009 i 6 16 2010 36 al M atio nal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Lev el Certific Wages ages Benefit Web Access Nexus220 EEbus 0 To assign a Cost Rate click on the Add button and a row will appear in the Rates box In the Date field enter a date when the rate for the employee will be in effect Enter a rate for the employee in the Rate field Rate is the employee s actual rate Percentage will increase the existing rate for the employee by the percentage on the date as defined in Rate Setup Rates can be increased using the Operation field or by clicking on the Percent Increase button and the following window will appear E 5 16 2010 2 Click on the button to enter an effective date for the increase and enter the percentage you wish to increase the rate Click on the ka button when finished and a new row will be created in the Rates box To delete a rate or rate operation select the desired row and click on the Delete button Fay Note Creating Cost rates can also be done with Global Assign L 4 from the main employee list See Global Apply 5 8 Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration Nexus 220 Tab Access Control module must be activated for this feature Use to setup access control integration with PIN numbers and or tags for each employee See Access Control Integration Module for details on the setup conf
333. p press the Company button to define the company s profile and the Company screen will appear The Company profile consists of two tabs General and Settings The General tab is used for the Company profile information while the Settings tab is used for the hours time format and auto poll on login 3 4 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Note The Company Name is the minimum requirement in this step to complete this portion of L ie the Setup Wizard All required fields will be highlighted in yellow From the General tab on the Company Setup window enter the Name Address City State Zip Code Country and Telephone Number of the company company TT General Settings Name Ub Your Company name here Address oe l BEE d State i iim Country UNITED STATES asti itd Phone I EH com pany r eo General Settings Hours Format Access Control Auto Sync Access Control Gn Login Hundredths Repunch Protection Time Format Misc Standard Auto Foll on Login Military C Close Pay Period Default Pay Code REG IM Settings Benefit Escalation Frequency 15S Tracking Type Mone k es Select the appropriate Hours Format for Timecard and Reports This selection determines how employees hour totals will be displayed Select Hours Format Hours Minutes 60th s 8 hours 30 minutes 8 30 or Hundredths 100th s 8 h
334. p show Close Pay period option Default Pay Code selection for un scheduled hours e Pay period Option in Daily Activities Provides the ability to Lock Pay Periods Provides the ability to Close Pay Periods e Holiday Group Holiday Eligibility Provides the ability to award holiday pay based on Seniority Eligibility Provides the ability to award holiday pay based on Schedule Eligibility Provides the ability to work on holiday and get paid based on Work on Holiday Eligibility e Pay code Template in Setup Provides the ability to create custom Pay Codes Template rather than just use standard Pay Code Template Software Setup amp Feature Software Configuration Location Pay Class General Main Application Tree View Setup Wizard Main Application Tree view Pay Period Setup Wizard Main Application Tree view Holiday Group Main Application Tree view Pay Code Template Main Application Tree view Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module 10 1 Using the Advanced Pay Class M odule Holidays The Holiday Group of the Pay Class Module allows you to add edit or delete company holidays and create Holiday Groups Individual Holidays are created in the Holiday window and a group of Holidays or rules are created in the Holiday Group A Holiday Pay Code should be created prior to adding your holidays If ithas not been selected you will be unable to assign holiday hours to a Pay Code until one has
335. password and keep in a safe place 6 Setthe password expiration options The choices are Must change password on next login The user will be prompted to enter a new password for this account at login e Never expires The password created will never expire Expires after This allows you to seta specific date for the password to expire After this date the user will be prompted to enter a new password Cannot change password The users will not be able to change their password Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 55 7 Click on the Pay Class tab This tab is used to set which Pay Class the user has access to The employee list will only show the employees belonging to the selected Pay Class Use the Pay Class Department and Employee tabs to filter employees by user For example certain users may only be allowed to view specific employees lt x AER m eee General Password Payclass Department lt Available Selected Add All Remove Remove All By default all Pay Classes are selected and will appear in the Selected list Pay Classes can be removed from the Group by selecting them in the Selected list and clicking on the Remove button All the Pay Classes can be removed from the Selected list by clicking on the Remove All button 8 Click on the Department tab This tab is used to set the labor categories within each department that the user has access to Note If a labor leve
336. ple shown above the configuration for the IN OUT rounding is as follows The configuration for the Break Meal rounding is as follows type Unit Point The 11 02 AM and 12 08 PM punches are assigned by the system to a break The 03 09 PM and 04 10 PM are not assigned to any break or meal Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module 14 11 This page intentionally left blank 14 12 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module Chapter 15 Advanced Labor Rate Module Advanced Labor Rate Module Introduction The Advanced Labor Rate Module when activated allows the user to define the rate of pay an employee receives for the hours worked to be set up in two ways Standard which applies the rate based on the order the user configures They can configure the system to look for the rate to apply The employee and 6 labor levels are available for the user to select This function allows the user to set up a combination of items that the employee s hours must be in order to receive that rate Below are sample screens of the setup and entry of the wage rate The employee wages will be used for both the employee standard rate setup and the labor rate setup This screen will be seen the same way in the labor levels module The sections of the Time amp Attendance Software affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Labor Levels up to 6 levels e Rate Setup e Rate Template e Co
337. ployee change must be updated in QuickBooks to maintain good synchronization Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 43 The Time amp Attendance software can accept the QuickBooks payperiod settings of Weekly Bi Weekly Semi Monthly and Monthly Any different payperiod setting in QuickBooks will automatically be defined as Weekly when transferred to the Time amp Attendance software Note QuickBooks Payroll integration can also be setup by selecting the Setup Wizard from the File Menu in the Time amp Attendance software Click on General amp Employee tabs to configure Select Payrolls module from the tree view and create the QuickBooks payroll profile Import M odule The Import module provides a way to import employee and schedule data from delimiter files into Time Guardian Creating an Import Profile 1 Click on the Import module within the Output group in the Tree View see the following figure Time Guardian Plus John_Smith aloj x File Edit Help El Today Daily Activities Description a Employees NJ Employee Records Imprort profile for NJ HQ personnel 5 Timecard aie Communications H Recalculate E 65 Output F Reports R Payrolls Import a Export Sb Auto Process lt X 2 Click on the button to create a new import profile and the following Import window will appear 9 44 Time amp Attendance Software Output Import Seles General Import File Format
338. ployee tabs see the figures Terminal Validation is used to assign employees and Labor Levels to selected terminals in the system When validation is used only employees assigned to a particular terminal with the selected Labor Levels can use the terminal Labor transfers at the terminal can only occur within the Labor Levels selected Terminal Validations are downloaded to the selected terminals by location in the Communications module To do so perform the following 1 Create a new Terminal Validation and you will be required to enter a Name for the Terminal Validation setting yellow required field In the Description field enter in a brief description of the Terminal Validation setting Click on the Department tab to select the Labor Level to be included in the Terminal Validation from the Department screen see figure The Department category has precedent over the Employees filter For example if employee numbers 1 20 where assigned to the Engineering Department and the Engineering Department was deselected the Employees tab would not list employees 1 20 Terminal Yalidation m T 44 K g g Pidation salary General Department Employees Sort Labor Number x Criteria i Criteria Available Selected 2 Engineering Ke Remove Remove All 3 46 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard e To adda Labor Level department category to the filter for Terminal Vali
339. port Options by selecting the desired e Export Type select from the dropdown list e Export Format the choices are Comma Separated Value CSV File Tab Separated Value TAB File Quoted Comma Separated and Quoted Tab Separated 7 To Export the file select the export profile from the list and click on the Run export icon 8 An export dialog box will appear as the Amano Time amp Attendance database records are exported and the export file is created see figure Click Ok to complete 9 48 Time amp Attendance Software Output Expori untied Processing oF Exporting records Processing L of 2 Auto Process M odule The Auto Process module provides a way to schedule time and attendance processes such as reports communications with terminals data import data export and synchronization with Amano Nexus 220 AmanoNet access control systems from the Amano Time amp Attendance software The Auto Process will run as a service in the background based upon the selections and the Recurrence settings that you have defined Note For client server setup the Auto Process will be executed on the server side Creating an Auto Process Profile 1 Click on the Auto Process module within the Output group in the Tree View see the following figure Hime Guardian Plus John_Smith File Edit Help El _ Today Daily Activities Description employers Fours Samary EIS O E Timecard p Commun
340. profile and the Access Control screen will appear See figure ge Access Control General Firebird eer Access Control Type Nexus 220 T Select your Access Database Firebird Re Punch Protection Ta W Auto Syne Access Contral Gn Login From the General tab on the Access Control window 1 Select the Access Control Type from the drop down menu of Nexus 220 AmanoNet 7 6 or None Select the Access Database Type of either Firebird or MSSQL Browse to and select the actual Database location path Set Re Punch Protection U A W N Select if you want Auto Sync Access Control on Login to be active by checking the box Answering Yes is recommended if you connect your terminal directly to the PC If you selected Access Control option during this Setup Wizard step you will also be asked to synchronize with the Access Control Nexus 220 or AmanoNet 7 6 at login 6 After completing the entry selection of company information click on the Apply ka button to save the company information and return to the Step 1 General Setup Click on the Close RF button close the Access Control window without saving 3 6 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Do you want to send employee hours to your payroll software From Step 1 General Setup select Yes if you want employees hours to be transferred to your payroll software You must then select the Payroll Software that you are using The following 13 payroll sof
341. ption Buton Description e Download validations and Run report settings to all terminals at the selected locations View and communicate with Timecard Specific terminals of a specific location Poll all terminals of the AFF E selected locations ne Run payroll file Set the time for all terminals p PRET at the selected locations g Add employee certification Show schedule timeline 3 Filter employee records Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 1 Button Description Buton Description Run Schedule Coverage report in the Schedule Define breaks in the Meal module or view assigned F Template option of the Schedule holiday calendar in the Pay module class module Allows the user to access the selection window in the Payperiods module to set lock and close payperiods properties Note Close Payperiods must be selected in the Company module for Allows the user to access the selection window to choose the payperiod for Recalculation this to be active Selects or de selects Check and Uncheck all Pay codes in the Weekly and Consecutive windows in the Pay class module and the various Overtime modules Perform Save Save As Allows you to copy the properties of one record into another by saving under ET Copy report to another using the record under a different name Run the Individual Schedule H Run the selected Import P rofile module Click to add employee image Sel
342. r as they appear in the import file use the Move UP amp Down buttons if necessary The contents of your import file will be displayed line by line in the File Contents window see figure for example This area allows you to assign fields to data elements in each line You can select to import a single line a selected group of lines or all lines EmpNumber BadgeNumber PayrollNumber FirstName MiddleName LastName HireDate Address City State Zipcode SSN BirthDate 501 601 701 Bob P Brady 1 3 1992 5 12 1972 502 602 702 Keyur 5 Patel 1 3 1992 8 20 1976 503 603 703 Piniti Bodjona 1 3 1992 1 18 1971 504 604 704 Romwell Manalo 1 3 1992 4 22 1973 To set the row number of the import file that the import operation will begin at enter a number in the Start Import At Row field Each data element in the import file must be defined in the order that it appears Data elements can be separated by commas tabs and semicolons To assign a field select a data element in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all the fields click 3 34 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard on the Add All button The field s will then be displayed in the Selected list Add additional fields until all data elements have been properly defined Use the Remove Fields button to un assign fields To skip a data element click on the JI button A character will appear in the Selected list to indicat
343. r the hours that you wish to override The Overrides Tab consists of the following displayed columns Field Description Date that punches schedule belong to Day within Pay penod punches hours belong to Schedule Schedule Name for start and end Department Departments assigned Pay Code Pay Code assigned to hours Total Hours for assigned Pay Code when changed displayed in red For example Bill J ackson worked 10 hours on Monday His Pay Class awards Daily Overtime after he has worked 8 hours and his boss scheduled him to work 10 hours on Monday to finish a rush project He used the override feature to change his REG hours from 8 to 10 and give him a total of 10 hours of REG fora post calculation after override of REG 10 and OT 2 Day Hours Daily Overtime Overrides After Worked After 8 Hours Hours Override Mon 10Hours REG 8 Change Reg 8 REG 10 OT 2 to Reg 10 OT 2 6 4 Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration Illustration of Bill ackson timecard before overrides Fe Timecard 1002 Jackson Bill F a4 E g r002 Jackson Bill z Ah 5723109 8 29709 z l 5 actual z Punches Overrides Adjustments Dae Day Indicator Tz Day IN Punch INPunch Day OUT Punch OUT Punch Total Hours Adjustment ug 23 2009 Sun EDT Aug 24 2009 Mon EDT Mon 08 00 AM B Mon Aug 25 2009 Tue EDT Aug 26 2009 Wed oT nam bre
344. r to select the desired row Also clicking on any column heading in the list will sort the list in ascending descending order based upon the column that was clicked on Select a row and click on the button to edit a Rate Setup 3 Inthe General tab select the number of decimal places 0 thru 5 that will be used for the rates Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module 15 5 Rate Setup General Standard Combined Decimal places For rate 4 Click on the Standard tab Rate Setup General Standard Combined Type Cost Rate Order Available Selected Employee Department Add LEWEL4 JOBCLASS Add All Remove Remove All Select either Cost Rate or Billable Rate Order in the Type field 6 To adda selection highlight the desired item in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all the listed items click on the Add All button To remove an item highlight the desired item in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all the listed items click on the Remove All button 7 Click on the Combined tab 15 6 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module Rate Setup General Standard Combined Type Cost Rate Order Cast Rate Order Billable Rate order Selected Employee Department Add aAddan JOBCLASS Remove Remove All Move Up 8
345. rance Pay Codes 0 Regular through 41 Severance Pay Codes 0 Regular through 41 Severance Pay Codes 0 Regular through 41 Severance Pay 9 28 Time amp Attendance Software Output PayWeb Examples of export file fields for PayWeb are shown in the following matrix table Se jj Se Payroll Select PayWeb Payroll Payroll ID PWE paye ID General Tab Specify the location and file name for the export file Output Path Example C ProgramFiles Time Guardian Plus ilename SSS eee SS ee ee Se Check to transfer zones through to payroll file Pass Rates Check to transfer rates through to payroll file Payroll Settings Check to transfer base rate through to payroll file General Tab Check to transfer dollars through to payroll file Check to transfer tips through to payroll file esc TipsID Enter TipslD default 06 TG Plus default Paycode Re ReguarPa Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 29 Peachtree Win Examples of export file fields for Peachtree Win are shown in the following matrix table ae Pa Payroll Select Peachtree Win oa tae Enter a 2 character upper case code identifying the Z Fayroll ID yi re Payroll payroll batch no General Tab Specify the location and file name for the export file Output Path Example C ProgramFiles Time Guardian Plus Time cvs Separate Payroll Settings Records By Day General Tab Check to transfer rates through to payroll file Check to separate records TG Plus default
346. rd E Days 7 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 at no e Date Selection select from the dropdown list The choices are Today Yesterday Last Open Period Previous Open Period Current Week Previous Week Current Month Previous Month Last 2 weeks Date Range Current Pay period or Previous Pay period e Check Excludes Today box to bypass editing today s Timecard with user configured global edits e lf Date Range is selected enter the From Date using the calendar dialog screen Also select either Until and enter the date using the calendar dialog screen or select F orward or Backward If using Forward or Backward pick an amount of time and type a fixed time from the dropdown lists The choices for time segments are Day s Week s Month s or Year s Time amp Attendance Software Timecard Administration 6 15 e Click onthe Next Mal button and the following is an example of the Pay Class Global Edit window that will appear EE 2 Payclass Available To add a Pay Class highlight the desired Pay Class in the Available list and click on the Add button To add all Pay Classes from the Available list click on the Add All button To remove a Pay Class highlight the desired Pay Class in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected Pay Classes click on the Remove All button e Click on the Next Mal button and the following is an example of the Global Edit
347. re Installation Note You must purchase Microsoft SQL separately have it already installed and properly 2 3 8 Time Guardian Te l Introduction License Agreement Select Firebird to install the Firebird database with Time Guardian Eok Choose Database Option Default Choose Install Set Choose Install Folder Get User Input D Choose Database Option l Select Microsoft SQL if you have Microsoft SQL Server database and already have it installed on a server or on the same PC that Time Guardian is being installed on Firebird SOL 3 z gt gt ci MAET gt gt Installing gt gt Insiall Corriplete ENEE Cancel If Microsoft SQL was selected as a database option you will be prompted to enter the SQL Server Name Administrator s User Name and Administrator s Password in the Microsoft SQL Information screen When you have finished entering the required information click on the Next button Eok Microsoft SQL information I Time Guardian Introduction License Agreement Choose Install Set Enter requested information SQL Server name Administrator s User Name Le esti Administrator s Password p gt tastalting gt lirstall Cormpilete i 7 E aa Cancel Previous Os 9 The Pre Installation Summary screen will appear Please review the displayed information 2 4 on the screen and click on the Next button to proceed EJo
348. re admitted for specific events such as a meeting or demonstration APB Override Enables the tag holder to override the APB constraint condition on the doors to which they have access Report Always When checked all transactions with this will be reported If you wish to assign another tag for the employee click on the Tag 2 thru Tag 4 Tag 8 buttons and follow a similar procedure performed for Tag 1 Configuring AmanoNet 7 6 The following paragraphs detail the steps involved in integrating data between the Time amp Attendance software and the AmanoNet 7 6 system Step A Configure AmanoNet 7 6 Settings with the following procedure 1 Login to the Time amp Attendance software select the Setup Wizard from the Edit menu and the Setup Wizard screen will appear 2 From the General Tab of the Setup Wizard select Yes to integrate Access Control then click on the Access Control button and the Access Control screen will appear 3 From the General tab on the Access Control screen 16 8 Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module e Select AmanoNet 7 6 for the Access Control type e Select Firebird or MSSQL as the Database type e lf you want to process all valid Transactions during synchronization leave the default value 0 in the Reason Code Otherwise set the Reason Code to a value to filter that is specific for those transactions that you want to process 4 lf Firebird was selected as the database clic
349. reating Cost rates can also be done with Global Assign from the main employee list Employees Nexus220 This is part of an optional Access Control Module which requires activation to utilize Use to setup access control integration with PIN numbers and or tags for each employee See the Access Control Integration section for additional configuration information 3 44 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard Employees AmanoNet This is part of an optional Access Control Module which requires activation to utilize Use to setup access control integration with PIN numbers and or tags for each employee See the Access Control Integration section for additional configuration information After completing the entry selection of information for Step 7 Employee Setup click on the Next button to continue to Step 8 Terminal Setup Step 8 Clock Setup W izard O ptional Step 8 Clock Setup Do you have terminal s other than Access Control terminalis C No Yes Do you want to configure Terminal Validation Note Send down Employee amp Deparment into to terminalis C No Yes Terminal Validation Do you want to configure Bell Schedule s Note Send down schedule to ring bell No fe Yes lt i Bell Schedule Do you want to configure MTX and or HP terminal s Note Configure location and discover terminals i No fe Yes gt Location Terminal RIO Next Note Prior to commencing this step it is reco
350. reset G 6 Time amp Attendance Software Glossary Pay Policy The rules used to calculate employee hours Pay Codes Used to allocate employees worked and non worked hours There are nine 9 predefined Pay Codes Pay Code Multiplier Used to provide a multiplier for employees worked hours from a specific date There are nine 9 predefined Pay Codes The multiplier can also be increased by a percentage from a specific date Pay Period The interval by which an employee is paid Industry standards are weekly bi weekly semi monthly and monthly Payroll Interface Payroll software packages that the Time and Attendance software can automatically interact with Personal Part of the employee profile This section is used to record information such as address phone DOB and more Point Used in rounding calculations the point is the place at which the punched time will be moved forward to the next Unit Poll A term used to describe the retrieving of information from the terminal by the software Presence Report A report that displays employees currently punched IN at the terminal Previous Indicates that the punch originates from the Previous day Time amp Attendance Software Glossary G 7 Profile Used throughout the software to indicate a summary of information Refresh Data Located under the File section of the Main menu this option is used to update the software with the mos
351. ressbiiaindemvetiwntsasonivensarnaninieomianaiavnieorarains 9 34 QuickBooks Auto Integration cesccssssesssseesseeesseeessseeeseeesseneessseessseeessneesseesssseeesseeeessnesesneesenees 9 40 DIG OTS NO GUNS enea E E er ancnenndnsvelaind 9 44 EDO PIC CUS aie pesere erste A E E E A 9 47 AUO PTOCESS MOGUIG a iniaspxstenniencrnsemanaemarr iota yetuing EE EEE EAAS 9 49 Chapter 10 Advanced Pay Class Module ssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnan 10 1 Introduction to Advanced Pay Class Moqdule sesssesnnesrnesrnesrresrnerrnrrnnrrrnrrresrresrrerrreerreere 10 1 Using the Advanced Pay Class Module cccccecccssseccseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeesaeeeraneseseeetaneees 10 2 HONOS erisa paar E Aa AEN ET rE EERE Ei 10 2 Chapter 11 Advanced Overtime Module ss sssssusssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 11 1 Advanced Overtime Module Introduction cccccccsseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeraeeeeseeeeaeesesaeseranss 11 1 Using the Advanced Overtime MOdule cccccsssccssseccsseeeseeeeasecseseeeeeeerseseeeaseerssersseerseses 11 2 Day RUIG eee E E E E E N 11 11 PGA n E E E nena 11 16 Chapter 12 Advanced Schedule Module ssssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 12 1 Advanced Schedule Module Introduction ssesssesrnerrnerrnerrnsrresrrnsrrnerrnerrenrrrerresrreerresrree 12 1 Using the Advanced Schedule Module cccccccccsseecceee
352. rid Web 1 To view an employee s Timecard grid click on the Employees menu selection from the Daily Activities menu see the following figure Time Guardian t O Setup Daily Activities Output Preferences Welcome SYSDBA Employees gt Certifications Employees E Individual Scheduler Employee Status Exception Filter EL Badge Search User Filter None Exceptions Ne cats ss ete Oe rites 123455 1007 08752 a Rames Payclass schedule 123456 1133 1100 Watson Amano Corporate Hq 4 e a E5 4 P 123457 1002 08742 Smith John Payclass sched ule 123458 1003 08744 jLee Howard Payclass jschedu le 123459 1004 08746 Abbate Jon Payclass ischedule ma ea csata i ae ac pars r 123468 1113 08753 James William Payclass 1123469 1117 108757 Paxton Jeffrey Payclass p gt gt t 10 rows viewing 10 rows rows 1 to 10 page 1 of 1 2 Click on the button alongside the selected employee to view edit the employee s Timecard grid The appropriate Timecard window will appear showing punches overrides and adjustments see the following figure 17 12 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module Punches T ab W eb 1 Click on the Punches tab to view and or edit an employee s punches in the Timecard grid i ff Tene Guardian fob Cady Activites O upat Preece Timecard Ema tare Dakia kmi Bariban ar
353. rofile in the Description field Enter the name and path of the import file in the File Name field or click on the browse button to the right of the field to browse for the file you wish to import Select the Import Type from Employee Individual Schedule or Advanced Schedule Select whether or not you want to Override Existing employee data Click on the Import File Format Settings tab This tab helps to define the format of your import profile If these parameters are not set to properly match the import file the import process might fail The file contents window on the Import Field Map Settings tab screen will help to indicate the file format Pay attention when you select the following for an example 3 32 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard TEs Ea E T aal 4 i g new Jersey Bldg 35 employees General Import File Format Settings Import Default Settings Import Field Map Settings Delimiter Comma Text qualifier None Date Format Month 01 l Day 01 Y lj vear 1990 v Hour Format Hour 8 00 Full Name Format stats ergs i Dla e Delimiter Select a Delimiter from the dropdown list The Delimiter is the character which separates the data elements from one another The choices are Tab Comma Pipe Semicolon Backslash Forward slash or User Defined If User Defined is selected you must enter the character in the field provided e Text Qualifier Selecta Te
354. rom the Report List The information in the Personal and Contact Tabs see the following figures is for reference purpose only Employees can be added to the system at any time by accessing the Setup Wizard from the Edit menu Note Use the inactive field to remove an employee from being calculated but still leave the employee information in the system for historical records and or in case you want to reactive the employee ata later date i e may be a seasonal employee Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 37 Select from the dropdown the Management Type of Access Control amp Time Attendance Time Attendance or Access Control The following Special Note only applies if the Access Control module is active Special Note Must change employee and department information in the Time amp Attendance software for changes to be reflected in both the Time amp Attendance software and the Nexus or AmanoNet databases When a Time Attendance amp Access Control employee is deleted in the Time amp Attendance software that employee will be marked Access only in the Access Control database This type of person will not have their transactions transferred to the Time amp Attendance software E mployees Personal Use this tab as Human Resources function to record the following employee personal information Gender Male or Female Birth Date use calendar to select Marital Status Education Level None specified Element
355. ropdown list in the Sort field Then enter data in the Criteria field s above either or both lists Only employees matching the data entered will appear in both lists Step 4 Save the Payroll Settings you just created and then select the Run Payroll to generate the payroll export file from the Time amp Attendance software Step 5 From the File menu in the Time amp Attendance software select Synchronize Employee s with Payroll The Please make sure that QuickBooks is running before proceeding to synchronize message will appear gt click OK to proceed The Synchronizing Payrolls message will appear followed by the message Successfully synchronized employees with QuickBooks gt click OK to finish The synchronization will be performed depending on what was selected for the method of synchronization in the Wizard Employee Setup for how to Sync Employee s with QuickBooks with the choices of e Import from QuickBooks QuickBooks acts as the master Suggested for scenario where you already have the QuickBooks as the payroll software and the Time amp Attendance software is being added e Export to QuickBooks Suggested for scenario where you already have the Time amp Attendance software and QuickBooks is being added as the payroll software e Both ways Employee information will bi directional transfer but QuickBooks remains as the master If employee is changed in the Time amp Attendance software the em
356. rough to payroll file Check to transfer rates through to payroll file Pass Dollars Check to transfer dollars through to payroll file 2 default TG Plus default Select none 012 Regular 013 Overtime 016 Hours 3 017 Hours 3 018 Hours 4 019 Hours 4 Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 19 ADP PC Payroll For Windows Examples of export file fields for ADP PC Payroll for Windows are shown in the following matrix table Se Payroll Select ADP PC Payroll for Windows Payroll ID Enter a 2 character upper case code identifying the Payroll Jk payroll batch no General Tab Specify the drive and directory where ADP for Output Path Windows is installed The file name will be Extpay99 Example C ADP ADPDATA Extpay99 Enter a 3 character upper case code identifying the company A Te ee Enter a 1 numeric code to identify the PC Payroll and Payroll Settings personnel version number General Tab ee Pass Dollars Hours 3 Payroll Settings 5 Ba St a HOL paw e li SOSA BONUS Earnings Code 3 020 021 JURY H a e 016 V O16VA 017 V 9 20 Time amp Attendance Software Output CBS Payroll Examples of exportfile fields for CBS Payroll are shown in the following matrix table ae or e Payroll Select CBS Payroll Payroll payroll batch no General Tab Specify the location and file name for the export file Output Fath Example C ProgramFiles Time Guardian Plus Vilename _ a a a Compa
357. roup for Time Guardian at NJ HQ Name Time Guardian Support 3 Inthe General Tab enter a name and a description for the Group in the fields provided 4 Click on the Modules tab and the following type of window will appear Time amp Attendance Software User Group Module 22 3 Groups EEE aes General Modules Available Selected Auto Process all Communications Auto Schedules Add Employees Bell Schedules Payrolls Combined Billable Rates Add All ecalculate Combined Cost Rates Reports Company Remove Timecard Cor rt ime Lonsecutive Over t a BE Remove All Daily Overtime a 1 Read Write Delete wu By default all modules are selected for each new group and will appear in the Selected List When a module is highlighted or selected from within this list the privileges or rights options for that module will be enabled in the checkboxes below the Selected list They are e Read Read only e Write Modify records in the module e Add Add records in the module e Delete Delete records in the module Placing or removing a check in each checkbox can modify the privileges or rights options If you disable the Write Edit Add or Delete functions for the Group the corresponding buttons Sica and I will be disabled when a user assigned to the Group Is using the software Modules can be removed from the Group by selecting them in the Selected list
358. rt Time Enter the time of day HH MM that you want the process to run d Run Every Check this option if you wish to run the process on an hourly basis Y ou must enter the number of hours HH MM that you want the process to repeat Weekly The service for the auto process can be run every set number of weeks on specific days of the week See the following example REE General Settings Recurrence C Daily Recurr every 1 week s on Sunday V Monday Tuesday Wednesday C Monthly Thursday Friday I Satur C Yearly Start Date i 27 2009 Start Time 08 00 Enter the following a Recur Every Enter the number of recurring weeks that the process will run For example to run the process every week enter 1 Place a check next to the day s of the week that you want the process to run on b Start Date Enter a start date manually in MMDDYYYY format or click on the t button c Start Time Enter the time of day HH MM that you want the process to run Monthly The service for the auto process can be set to run on a Specific day of each month for a set number of months See the following example 9 52 Time amp Attendance Software Output SB Auto Process General Settings Recurrence C Daily Day 1 of ev 1 months C Weekly Start Date f Select Date Start Time Monthly Month ERE x Year 2009 Yearly ia E i 4 amp 6 g 10 11 12 13 Gis 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 2
359. rugnarr Overview D amp m LP Poje C tak gt A AMANO a i i OCATOR ntact Amano PRODUCTS FOR DEALERS SHOPPING COMPANY INFO MARKETS Time Management System Product Registration Why regester yow product e t teeters Protection Regstering your ime Clock wii insure you in case of maifunchon 2 Product Not icabon Regstering pour Eme clock or Eme A afterxiance systern Can help us contact you m he event an imer ovement to ihe equpmernt 3 Improved product Gevekomenl Regetenng your fee Chock or Gre afhendance sy stern well hain us Contre Gesireng products Mat meet your needs Last tiame treet Promotional Code a OB been Ajos 22 After the Time amp Attendance Software has been installed activated and registered the Setup Wizard Welcome screen will appear See figure for example See Setup Wizard for detailed setup instructions Amano GIncinnan me WRCTMeES yout Time camian Pius Seeding mi Minny maaa iS recom aw he Cuiris Stent Guide to kake yau theg ie 0 Sira io papae ne Saip Woa Once insien the Ul Uie Operati ae bs ae In e SOA Ja a Ferenc This Wizard provides cormphite iribeg albin wails Wie Miwa 2 amd Amanghet secesg control systems The Winrar sen Agades captaus Setup for Dt and aitenoance scheauies Tom badic Dut punching wilh rounding ae holidays bo amanen pay policy miles fos meerime mealsybreaks and mAN TE Serup WAILERS anais you Loe Cuore Ferminals wre PVA TUN mpate CaP SDI With your ama
360. s J Pattern Sun Mon 12 4 Tue Wed Thu Fri Sun 07 00 AM Tue 07 00 AM Ved 07 00 AM Thu 07 00 AM Mon 04 00 PM Wed 04 00 PM Thu 04 00 PM Fri 04 00 PM f X 7 Schedules and Labor Levels are assigned to each day of the rotation by any one of the following methods Existing Template Schedule and Labor Reference To add a template or auto schedule and labor category to a particular day a Select the desired day in the Pattern box b Select desired schedule from the Schedule list c Select desired Labor Level subcategory from the Labor list or click on the button The Labor References window will appear Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 23 S Labor References Labor Level 1 3 CC3 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 6 0 1 1 Labor Level 2 4 Department Lab Fol fod of SS 2 4 6 0 1 1 Labor Level 3 6 JOBCLASS Labor Labor Level4 TBs g 2 4 7 0 1 1 Add d To adda labor category select a subcategory from each of the dropdown lists and click on the Add button The selected labor category will appear in the Selected window To remove a labor category select the desired category in the Selected window and click on the Delete button See above example screen When you have finished click on the button to save your settings and return to the Schedule Rotation window Click on the button The displayed schedule in the Schedule list and labor category in the Labor Re
361. s TRun Payroll during the Initial Wizard Payroll Quickbooks Pro Payroll ID Payroll Number s Specific Payroll Settings o Step 3 From the File menu in the Time amp Attendance software select Synchronize Employee s with Payroll The Please make sure that QuickBooks is running before proceeding to synchronize message will appear gt click OK to proceed The Synchronizing Payrolls message will appear followed by the message Successfully synchronized employees with QuickBooks gt click OK to finish Step 1 Click on the Specific Payroll Settings button to perform Pay Code mapping QuickBooks should be configured for your company From the General tab select if you want to Overwrite duplicate payroll entries for Direct Integration If this box is not checked the hours sent will be duplicated each time hours are transferred to QuickBooks Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 41 Payroll Settings General Paycodes QuickBooks File Export QuickBooks Direct Integration Overwrite duplicate payroll entries Step 2 Click on the Pay codes tab to perform Pay codes mapping with QuickBooks from the QuickBooks Pay Code s screen Select the Mapping browse button alongside the Time amp Attendance Pay Code listed on the left side to map the QuickBooks Pay Code The QuickBooks Pay Code will appear in the Value column Payroll Settings General Paycodes i Qui
362. s been activated This tab allows you to adjust Benefit time for an employee It also allows you to view Benefit balances This tab will only be visible if the Tracking Type on the Company module Is select as DeAccrual or Import Balances If None was selected in this field no Benefit tab will appear on the Employees screen Time amp Attendance Software Benefit Time Module 21 1 Note If Import Balances has been selected from Setup gt Company gt Settings for Benefit Tracking Type then the Add and Delete buttons to Adjust Benefit Time will be grayed out because cannot adjust benefit time When you import benefit balances you can only keep track of how the imported amounts are used by showing Benefit Balance From the Employees screen click on the Benefit tab and the following type of screen will appear FA Employees CBR BAT o ogg 25 Moro Tom v General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Certification Benefit web Access AmanoNet Adjust Benefit Time Benefit Balance Pay Code PER Date Amount Reset Pay Code Date Amount Taken Available Current 5 SCK Apr 23 2010 00 00 00 00 Ad VAC Apr 23 2010 i 00 00 00 00 PER Apr 23 2010 00 00 00 00 Delete e L HOL Apr 23 2010 i 00 00 00 00 JURY Apr 23 2010 00 00 00 z ae 00 00 BRV Apr 23 2010 00 00 00 _ 00 00 E A E ea e Selecta Pay Code from
363. s can be filtered in both the Available and Selected lists by selecting a sort category in the dropdown list in the sort field Then enter secondary filter data into the Criteria fields above each list Only Departments matching the data entered will appear in both lists 5 Repeat the previous Step to further filter employees 6 Click on the Employee tab C Show Active Employees Only C Show Active Employees Only bes leg Employees can be filtered in both the Available and Selected lists by selecting a sort category in the dropdown list in the sort field Then enter secondary filter data into the Criteria fields above each list Only employees matching the data entered will appear in both lists To select an employee highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all employees listed click on the Add All button To remove employees highlight the desired employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected employees click on the Remove All button 7 Click on the ai button to recalculate the selected employees hours and exit Verify the selected employee hours using the Timecard or Reports module 8 2 Time amp Attendance Software Recalculate Chapter 9 Output Group Reports M odule Reports are the largest and most important output from the system Below Is a list of the reports available from Time Guardian The general format of each report t
364. s form the weekly work pattern that can be applied to an employee The screen below shows an example of the template schedule and auto schedule assignments into a schedule To create a Schedule 1 Click on the Schedules menu selection from the Setup menu see figure Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 7 w a 2 Schedules a amp fe v i Page TF Tools A Time Guardian RO E Setup Daily Activities Output Preferences Welcome SYSDBA H Template Schedules W Auto Schedules Schedules F Schedules _ Schedule Rotation _Name _ 4 Reset Password onan Standard schedule New Schedule NJ Schedule Fle Foe Ves Faveriint Task Hah Oe i z e asrih Sp Fevers eG D n Ekren E bie O32 168 lA Tiie ahedue Feces a So ll HO a Time Guardian Selup Dalh Acteites Guljpul Preferences Welcome SYSORA Schedule Mame Template Schedules Samda 560 Auto Schedules Schoal Bus Schedulal Assignments Name Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun cont Cancer AMANO ininnabr he a0 tienen ee Rine lard MI OTTER i240 Onn G26 sHpynghh S006 Armano Cincinsaly lee All eghta reaaend 3 Enter a name for the schedule in the Name field required field 4 To assign a template or auto schedule to a particular day select the desired template or auto schedule from the dropdown lists and click on the appropriate button Next check the desired day of
365. s of the shift and the number of breaks for that shift To enter the Break size based on shift length click on the Add button A row will appear Enter the From and To times of the shift and the size of each break for that shift Click on the Combine multiple employee breaks to one check box if you wish to have all employee breaks combined together as one break When you have finished the number of breaks and break sizes click on the button to Save your Settings 10 In the Deduction for Short Break box set how the break will be deducted if the employee uses a shorter period of time than allocated for the break a Inthe Threshold field enter the amount of time HH MM that will be used in the determination Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module 13 7 b Inthe Less and More Than Threshold fields set the conditions if the time taken for the break is either less or more than the threshold in the fields provided They choices are e Allowed break Which ts the amount of time the employee Is allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break e Amount taken Which is the amount of time the employee actual punched out for the Regular break or Coffee break e Amount under or over Equals the amount of time that exceeds or is under the time allocated for the Regular break or Coffee break e Nothing Means to deduct no time from the employee e Allowed break and taken time Which will deduct the time allocated for Regular br
366. schedule consists of changing an employee s schedule for a given day within another existing schedule To do so click on the schedule cell in the employee Timecard grid for the day that you wish to change A dropdown list will appear with existing schedules Tue U 00 AM Wed FOU F my Wed 07 00 AM Thu 04 00 F Thu 07 00 AM Fri 04 00 PM x Click on the desired template schedule you wish to use as a replacement The selected schedule will appear in the Schedule cell When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes Note If this schedule does not meet the schedule assignment rules set in the Pay Class of the employee the employee will be unscheduled for this shift Note You can also select to Clear Individual Schedule to switch the employee to unscheduled status Overtime Authorization If overtime authorization was selected in the Overtime Authorization tab of the Pay Class module you must place a check in the corresponding overtime column B Sch A Sch or U Sch for the employee to be awarded overtime hours see the figure Schechule Hours Auth B Set Auth A Sth Aath U Seh Ath a E won 08 00 AM Mon E Feats 09 00 AM Wed Thu 02 00 AM Thu 0 E Ei 0S00 AM Fri 05 0 x C Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 25 Authorizing Payroll Export To authorize hours for an employee to be included in the payroll export file place a check in the
367. see Pay Class module in tree view Configure your Pay Class rules Press the Pay Class button to define the employees pay rules The system will allow unlimited pay policy templates When you press the Pay Class button the following screen will appear Pay Class Blala malelo General Overtime Rules Rounding Rules Meal Rules Holidays Name Weekly Payclass Description Weekly Salaried NJ Pay Period Interval Settings This Pay Class will be paid Weekly Start Day Sunday v C Bi Weekly C Semi Monthly C Monthly J Do employees of this Pay Class work past 2 00 am Day Change Settings Day change occurs at 02 00 4M Before midnight After midnight Enter the maximum shift length an employee can work For 12 59 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 15 1 To create a new Pay Class you will be required to enter a Name 2 Enter a brief description of the Pay Class in the Description field 3 Select the desired Pay Period Interval Setting from the following choices e Weekly Employees are paid every week e Bi Weekly Employees are paid every two weeks e Semi Monthly Employees are paid twice a month e Monthly Employees are paid once a month 4 For Weekly select Day of the Week from the dropdown list For Bi Weekly click the down arrow to display the calendar and double click on the desired date to populate the field For semi monthly enter the 1 and 2 day of the month select
368. select Payroll Number Employee Number Social Security Number or Badge Number Find Step 3 In the Output Path field enter in the directory path of the payroll file or click on the Browse button to set the path An Open dialog will appear Select the path and directory and enter in the filename The filename of the payroll file is usually set by the payroll company you are using Step 4 Click on the Specific Payroll Settings button to see the Payroll Settings window which are payroll company specific The following are examples for QuickBooks Pro Payroll Settings General and Pay Codes tab screens Configure the General and Pay Codes settings tabs as per the QuickBooks Pro requirements and click on the ka button 9 36 Time amp Attendance Software Output Payroll Settings Department Name Department Number v Separate Records By Day QuickBooks Direct Integration Step 5 Enter the version number of the QuickBooks package you are using This information can be obtained from QuickBooks iif file opened with Notepad see figure Step 6 Enter the release number of the QuickBooks package you are using This information can be obtained from QuickBooks iif file opened with Notepad in see figure Step 7 Enter the Company Name from QuickBooks This information can be obtained from QuickBooks iif file opened with Notepad see figure Step 8 Enter the Create Time number from the QuickBooks package you
369. selected date to be awarded holiday hours e Meet Seniority Date Eligibility and Hours Requirement The employee must work the required amount of days and hours from the date set Hire or selected date to be awarded holiday hours e Meet Seniority Date Eligibility or Hours Requirement The employee must work the required amount of days or hours which ever comes first from the date set Hire or selected date to be awarded holiday hours 6 If the eligibility requirement chosen requires a date enter the number of days in the Days field and select the desired From Date Hire Date or Selected For Selected use the Calendar icon to select the From Date 10 4 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module 7 If the eligibility requirement chosen requires hours enter the number of hours in the Hours field and select the desired From Date Hire Date or Selected For Selected use the Calendar icon to select the From Date 8 If the eligibility requirement chosen requires hours you also must specify the Pay Code s for the hours worked In the Pay Code Selection field The choices are Worked Hours Non Worked Hours All Hours or Selected Pay Codes For Selected Pay Codes click on the Browse button and the Select Pay Codes window will appear Select Pay Codes Available Selected NJ REG OT r REG o ad ee a i Add All DT HOL Remove JURY Remove All v BRY
370. settings 7 Ifa reportis desired select the Report profile from the list in the Report Name field and the printer from the Printer field If Keep file is selected enter the Output Path use the browse button If Communications is selected you must select the operation to be performed and the Location for the Operation See the following figure for an example ox General Settings Recurrence Process Type C Report Communications Import Export Synchronize Access Control Operation Poll M Poll before Location Sepma Set time Terminal Selection Front Door Iv All a Operation Select Poll Set Time or Download When Download Is selected the Poll before option will be enabled Check this option if you want to poll the selected terminals before downloading 9 50 Time amp Attendance Software Output b Location Setting The Location Setting lists all Locations that are configured in the Time amp Attendance software To enable the use of a Location for Auto Process check the Active box To use all the terminals in the Location select All from the dropdown Terminal Selection column and the browse indicator will be displayed Click on the Browse button in the Terminal column to you choose terminals from the terminal selection screen Note Setup terminals from Setup Wizard Terminals Setup amp amp Terminal Selection Available Selected Terminal selection is as follows q
371. sired employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected employees click on the Remove All button e Select the desired sort criteria from the dropdown list Both the Available and Selected lists of employees can be sorted by typing in the Criteria fields above each list e Click on the Pay Class tab to utilize available Pay Classes as a filter for employee reports and follow the same preceding procedure e Click on a Department tab to utilize available departments as a filter for employee reports and follow the same preceding procedure From Setup Wizard in Step7 Employee Setup check the box to Sync Employee s with QuickBooks and select the method of synchronization from the dropdown choices of Import from QuickBooks Export to QuickBooks or Both ways bi directional The synchronization will be performed depending on what was selected for the method of synchronization in the Wizard Employee Setup for how to Sync Employee s with QuickBooks with the choices of e Import from QuickBooks QuickBooks acts as the master Suggested for scenario where you already have the QuickBooks as the payroll software and the Time amp Attendance software is being added e Export to QuickBooks Suggested for scenario where you already have the Time amp Attendance software and QuickBooks is being added as the payroll software e Both ways Employee information will bi directional transfer but QuickBooks r
372. ssaging Profile Notification base on Pay Code Threshold Notification Exception selection Absence notification by Threshold e Company Escalation frequency in minutes is set on the Company Settings Tab screen see figure eT DENR General Settings Hours Format Access Control Auto Sync Access Control On Login Hundredths Repunch Protection Om Time Format Misc Standard Auto Poll on Login O Military Close Pay Period Default Pay Code REG IM Settings Benefit Escalation Frequency a BE Tracking Type Deaccruals Kd 6 e Employee M password is set on the Employees Personal Tab screen see figure Employees Ez E a no g 125 Moro Tom eee General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Certification Benefit Web Access Nexus220 Gender Male C Female Soc Sec No Birth Date 1 1 1970 Marital Status Not Specified Education Level None specified IM Password Confirm IM Password Hanau o Using E vents Notification M odule The IM Profile module is used to configure profiles for the Instant Messaging J ive Messenger system Profiles are created to inform the supervisor of exceptions absences warnings etc in real time when they occur instead of after the fact Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module 20 3 Creating an IM Profile 1 Click on the IM Profile node within the Output module in the Tree
373. st Cenker 55 Department JOBCLASS I LEVEL4 Employee Sort Number Criteria Criteria le Available Selected A004 Abbate Jon 1002 Smith John Add 1003 Lee Howard 1006 Romwell Manuel add all 1007 Patel Ramesh 1008 Parikh Vijay CL 9 wilson Karl Remove 1113 James Willian 1117 Paxton Jeffrey Remove All Employees can be sorted by Employee Number Badge Number Payroll ID Last Name First Name or Comment using the Sort field Employees can be filtered in both the Available and Selected lists by entering data into the Criteria field above each list Only employees matching the data entered will appear in both lists e Toselect an employee highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the button e To select all employees click on the button e Toremove an employee from the Selected list highlight the employee in the Selected list and click on the button Remove all e Toremove all selected employees click on the Remove all button 9 When you have finished click on the click on the button Assigning Individual Schedules Individual Schedules are template schedules assigned to employees in the Individual Scheduler To launch the Individual Scheduler select an Individual Schedule Profile in the Main View and click on the athe Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 15 A individual Scheduler a o gt eo
374. synchronize Access Control Use these arrows to expand or collapse the tree view panel time Guardian Plus John_Doe Daily Activities Employees E Timecard i WA Communications H Recalculate 69 Output 3 Reports I Payralls Import i pA Export gt Auto Process See the next section for a more detailed description of Tree View activity Time amp Attendance Software How To Use 4 5 T able View The Table View displays the currently selected highlighted module in the Tree View The items listed in the Table View can be sorted by double clicking on the table header for that column See example figure Ke Time Guardian Plus John_Abbate File Edit Help Bw TtiFree View Gr Daily Activities jw WL Employees Fa Conmmunications fda F Recalculate A G4 Output nA Reports ow Payrolls ow Inport swell Export hol Auto Process Timecard Colors Click on table headings to sort by the column x iojx Number l Number Badge Number Payrall Lask Name First Marne 111 64692760199 111 Kovacs Jim 6 123 64692760203 123 Dominici Carmen 10 3333 Ti 1033 Paxton Jeff 5555 64692760202 5555 Moore Johnathan 9 5999 537134359 5999 Poulton alan 5 Table View The following figure shows the colors displayed in the timecard to indicate various employee exceptions that have occurred if they have been configured to be tra
375. t To add an employee highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all the listed Available employees click on the Add All button To remove an employee from the Selected list highlight the desired employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all the listed employees click on the Remove All button Payclass Department Employee Sort Number gt i Criteria u er Selected 1004 Newman Alice 1005 Johnson Susan 1034 22 22 Remove All Show Active Employees Only I Show Active Employees Only Note This function can also be done with Global Assign from the main employee list See Global A Schedule T ab From the Employees screen click on the Schedule tab and the following type of screen will appear 5 6 Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration A Employees p Ema MEAN Poto aen OOO vA General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Certification Benefit Web Access Nexus220 Schedule weekly Gam 5Spm Lock In Schedule Grace Before Schedule Start 15 00 Grace After Schedule End 15 00 V Override Schedule Rotation Weekly Mon O8 00Tue 08 OOMieteesiale Mon O5 00Tue 05 OOM SE AIRE F This tab is used to assign a Schedule to an employee Schedules can be created in the Setup Wizard from the Schedule tab Selecta Schedule by clicking on the dropdown lis
376. t be deducted twice To prevent meal punches from being deducted twice check the box next to the question Do employees punch at meal time The concepts for meal rounding are the same as those used in the Rounding Rules tab If rounding is to be used for meal punches enter the desired Unit and Point You must also enter the number of hours an employee must work before the meal period in the Hours to work before start of meal window field For example if the scheduled start time is 9 00 AM and the Hours to work is set to 3 00 then the meal window for this employee would start at 12 00 PM If the scheduled start time is 7 00 AM and the hours to work Is set to 3 00 then the meal window for this employee would start at 10 00 AM Enter the Length of Meal window This is the length of time between an employee s meal punches that will be applied toward the meal rule Enter in the Meal Grace This is the number of minutes that an employee can return late from a meal before additional time is deducted Note If you wish to uate the properties of Rounding view the Rounding Demo by clicking on the button on the Pay Class Rounding Rules and Meal Rules screens from Setup Wizard for Pay Class The following Rounding Demo view will appear Hour EH Minute EE Unit fis Paint 7 Actual Rounded Clicking in the dropdown boxes for Hour and Minute will set the actual time clock display while clicking in the dropdown boxes in Unit
377. t of Schedules When using a Lock in Schedule at the terminal you can define the grace time allowed before schedule start time and after schedule end time When selecting to override a schedule you can select to use a template from Schedule Rotation or Weekly Advanced Schedule module must be activated for this feature Labor Level Tab From the Employees screen click on the Labor Level tab and the following type of screen will appear Tj Employees ioj xj E E a E E f1002 son sa A General Personal Contact Assignments Schedule Labor Level Wages Nexus 220 Home Labor Level Assignments Department Time Support This tab allows you to assign Home Labor Level to each employee from the user defined dropdown Department list Only predefined Departments will appear under Home Labor Level Assignments Note This function can also be done with Global Assign from the main employee list See Global A Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration 5 7 W ages T ab This tab allows you to assign wages to employees The Wages tab will only be enabled if you are logged into Time amp Attendance software as an administrator See the Users Module for more detailed description about read write privileges From the Employees screen click on the Wages tab and the following type of screen will appear For example as illustrated in the following table and figures the Cost Rate for empl
378. t recent information available Regular The most common Pay Code used to identify hours worked by an employee Relay A circuit located on the terminal that will allow for controlled door access or the ringing of bells at assigned times and days Relay Name List A list of available schedules that may be assigned to a terminal and only one schedule can be assigned per terminal Report A format for presenting employee and system information to the user in a predefined format Rounding A formula used to adjust employees punched time based on a defined Unit and Point Rounding Rules The specific Unit and Point that determines how employee s punches will be rounded Salary One of two types of employee designations used by the Time and Attendance software Employees who are salaried do not to have to punch in but they must have an assigned schedule If a salaried employee works on a holiday they will only receive holiday pay Save Used to store updates made to the system Schedules Work patterns with fixed start and end times that can then be assigned to employees to track IN and OUT punches G 8 Time amp Attendance Software Glossary Sick The Pay Code used for employee illness Short Meal SM An exception used to identify a short meal SS The abbreviation used for the Social Security Number TG An abbreviation for the words Time Guardian Terminal Number List A listing of all terminals currentl
379. t rules apply to a given shift or schedule A Shift is the set of rules for a given shift or schedule A Shift consists of the following elements Rounding Template Determines how an employee s punches will be rounded Exceptions Codes used to track employee s time deviations from assigned schedules Note Meal Penalty has been added to provide feature to penalize a company when an employee does not take lunch break or takes the lunch break late In this instance penalty hours are generated in the Pay Code plus the MPNT exception code will be generated Meal Templates Defines employee breaks and meal breaks Shift Overtime Defines the overtime rules for the schedule Outside Shift Overtime Defines a finite set of overtime rules for employees that work before or after their scheduled Shift or Schedule Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 11 5 iy Time Guardian John_Smith Seles File Edit Help Sl Today 3 Setup i Company did Users Pay Codes si P Rounding Templates ES Exceptions I Meal Templates sf Shift Overtime 5 Outside Shift Overtime BE Daily Rules Pay Class a f Schedule PD Locations f Daily Activities 69 Output Description Shift O vertime Overtime is the time an employee works that extends beyond a certain level of time set by the company s policies Shift overtime is based on hours worked and is a way of rewarding the employee for working more hours t
380. tain preset windows of time are assigned to breaks or meals To create a Flexible Interval or Terminal Meal Template 1 Click on the Meal Templates node within the Shifts module in the Tree View 2 Click on the button and the Meal Templates window will appear Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Meal Module 13 5 Meal Templates BIR g _ a a ag a General Breaks Coffee Breaks Meals Assignments Break Credit Name New jersey Plant ist shift meals Description Meal template for 1st shift Default Position Start End Type Flex 4 Flex Type Interval Auto Meal Deduct meal when employee does not punch out for meal Must work at least 04 00 hour s to have meal deducted Meal position to deduct fram 15 00 from Start End of Schedule Enter a name for the Meal Template in the name field required field 4 Enter a description of the Meal Template in the Description field Select the Default Punch Position that the meal would be deducted from should the employee take less than the allotted time If Start is chosen the time will be deducted Starting from the start of the break or meal and moving forward For End the time will be deducted starting from the end time of the break or meal and moving forward 6 Select Flex as the Type and Interval or Terminal as the Flex Type Place a check in the Auto Meal check box if you wish to have an automatic break deduction
381. tartup Type A SRy Distributed Link Tra Maintains links between NTFS files withi Started Sy Distributed Transac Coordinates transactions that span mult 4 DNS Client Resolves and caches Domain Name Syst Error Reporting Ser Allows error reporting For services and 4 Escalation Server TG Escalation Server Time Guardian Sy Event Log Enables event log messages issued b r P Sy Fast User Switching Provides management for applications t Manual ie Ser Sy Firebird Guardiani Firebird Server Guardian www firebird Started Automatic z Services Sa Firebird Server De Firebird Database Server www firebird Started Manual WMI Control lt Ni r Automatic Manual Automatic Automatic Manual Automatic Start the service Started Started a Device Manager S Storage Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Description Escalation Server Time Guardian Started Disk Management vices and Applications Extended A Standard Step 3 Find Escalation Services TG or Escalation Service TG Plus and select it Then double click on it to display properties Compulct Mahegerrent By File e 8H FAB e gt Computer Management Local bm i System Tools gal Event Viewer 4 Shared Folders Local Users and Groups 3 Performance Logs and Alerts Action view Window Help Status Started Name Description SRy Distributed Link Tra Maintains
382. te Schedules 1 Click on the Template Schedules node within the Schedule module in the Tree View see the following figure Time Guardian Pro SYSDBA File Edit Help Today Ma Setup Start Day Start End Day End Type Paycode Shift Hp Company Fixed f Users fu Paycodes Standard schedule 1257 Current Day 07 00 M Current Day 04 00 PM Fixed REC Son Zoff 7a NJ Flex 10hr day Schedule Current Day 07 00 4M Current Day 07 00 PM Fixed REG ishiFt 7 4 1 days before 07 00 AM Current Day o4 00 PM Fixed REG NI Corporat p Shifts be Daily Rules z i Payclass fal Schedule EETemplate Schedules uA Auto Schedules Schedule Coverage I Schedule Rotation S Locations HL Daily Activities H 6 output 2 Click on the kaa button and the Template Schedules window will appear Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 3 48 Template Schedules oS aasia Current Day S ime 05 00 PM Enter a name for the template schedule in the Name field required field In the Type field select either Fixed Off or Open If Open is selected Start and End Times will be disabled Assign a Pay Code to the schedule using the dropdown list in the Pay Code field Assign a Shift to the schedule using the dropdown list in the Shift field In the Start box select the Day that the schedule will start and the time of the day that the schedule is to be
383. the Available list and click on the Add button To select all labor categories from the Available list click on the Add All button To remove a labor category from the Selected list highlight the desired labor category in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected labor categories click on the Remove All button 11 Repeat the above step for all applicable Labor Level tabs 20 6 Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module 12 Click on the Employee tab This tab enables you to receive an IM notification for the selected Employees IM Profile General Pay Code Threshold Exception Pay Class Department Employee Criteria Selected 111 Kovacs Jim 6 123 Dominicci Carmen 10 125 Moro Tom Add all 987 Davidson Dan 1000 Smith John 234 Smith John Remove 5555 Moore Johnathan 9 5999 Poulton Alan Remove All 8888 James Bill Show Active Employees Only Show Active Employees Only ca bd Employees can be sorted by Employee Number Badge Number Payroll ID Last Name First Name or Comment using the Sort field Employees can be filtered in both the Available and Selected lists by entering data into the Criteria field above each list Only employees matching the data entered will appear in both lists Also employees can be filtered by clicking alongside Show Active Employees Only e Toselect an employee highlight the desired employee
384. the following figure will be the 2 to appear This corresponds to the Assignments tab found on the Employees screen See Assignments tab 5 10 Time amp Attendance Software Employee Administration Fl Global Apply Assignments Pay Class Setting Schedule NJ MFG Time Zone Setting Time Zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada DLS Daily Rule Setting Daily Rule 555_daily_rules Supervised By Setting Supervised By 5999 Poulton Alan Validation Setting Validation Pe Eae a From this window the user can choose to apply a specific setting by clicking on the box next to the selection If no checkmark Is placed in the box then the selection will not be applied to the employee s In the example figure above the user choose to apply all the selections to the employee s When the Global Apply Wizard is completed all these settings will be applied to all the employees selected on the list Scheduling Global Apply If selected the Scheduling window for the Global Apply Wizard see the following figure will be the 3 to appear This corresponds to the Schedule tab found on the Employees screen see Schedule Tab Fl Global Apply Scheduling Schedule Settings Schedule weekly Bam Spm n Lock In Schedule Grace Before Schedule Start 00 00 Grace After Schedule End 00 00 Schedule Pattern Settings O Schedule Rotation Weekly Override E weeky Sam 5pm EJ Home Labor
385. time Consecutive Day Overtime lv Spply advanced Weekly Overtime rules Overtime Level 1 40 00 assign to jor v Overtime Level 2 50 00 assign to or v 11 Click the Apply advanced Weekly Overtime rules box enter the hour amount to work before applying and assign to a Pay Code of OT or DT If DT is selected for Overtime Level 1 OT Level 2 will be disabled 12 From the Pay Class Advanced Overtime Rules click on the Weekend Overtime tab to define the Weekend Overtime see figure TM E JAHKLCOCILCIIIEE General Overtime Rules Rounding Rules Meal Rules Holidays Does overtime apply For this Pay Class C No Yes I Hours for payroll require authorization Hours worked before an assigned schedule require authorization I Hours worked beyond an assigned schedule require authorization Tl Hours worked on an unassigned schedule require authorization Basic Overtime Rules Advanced Overtime Rules Daily Overtime Weekly Overtime Weekend Overtime Consecutive Day Overtime V Apply Weekend Overtime rules WV Saturday Overtime Level 1 08 00 assign to OT v Overtime Level 2 10 00 assign to DT v Vv Sunday Overtime Level 1 08 00 assign to DT v Overtime Level 2 10 00 assign to or v 13 Click the Apply Weekend Overtime rules box enter the Saturday amp Sunday hour amount to work before applying and assign to a Pay Code of OT or DT If DT is selected for Overtime Level 1 OT
386. time level and pay codes selection for specific day of week or holiday Weekly Overtime Template Consecutive and Non Consecutive Overtime Template Range Overtime Template Overtime Execution Order of execution for multiple Overtimes e Daily Rules Daily Overtime Template Custom overtime level and pay codes selection for specific day of week or holiday Period Overtine Template User Interface From Daily Rules link in tree view only Daily overtime templates and Period overtime can be created and assigned to a Daily Rule template Daily Rules General Rounding Break Meal Name 550_daily_rules Description Daily Overtime None Period Overtime None Zone Differential None Note Ifthe advanced overtime module is not active daily overtime and period overtime will be grayed theses nodes will not be accessible from the tree view Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 11 1 e Shift Rules Exception Template Shift Overtime Template Outside Shift Overtime Template User Interface From shift link in tree view only exception templates shift overtime and outside shift overtime can be created and assigned to a shift template a Shifts Name 550_shift Description Rounding Template Exception Template Meal Template Shift Overtime None Outside Shift Overtime None Note If the advanced overtime module is not active the shift overtime and outside shi
387. tings Pay Codes Tab Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 25 Paychex Paylink Examples of export file fields for Paychex Paylink are shown in the following matrix table ss at eS MI Payroll Select Payche Payroll PayrolllD Enter a payroll ID General Tab Outout Path Specify the location and file name for the export file pr Example C PaylinkVmport Chent Number Enter 4 character number Office Number Enter 0001 to 1295 Site Number xamople 007 EEE E E General Tab Separate ER ee an Records By Day Check to separate records Pass Rates Check to transfer rates through to payroll file Fass Dollars Check to transfer dollars through to payroll file TG Plus default ee ear ae TT at Rate 1 Regular Hours REG Rate 2 Regular Hours ee PENNA eae Rate 3 Regular Hours Rate 1 Overtime Hours N E OT Rate 2 Overtime Hours grey tye we Rate 3 Overtime Hours a Sd Payroll Settings Vacation Regular Hours Example VAOA es ae Qualified Sick Regular SCK Hours Non Qualified Sick Example QS0A NSOA Regular Hours Holiday Regular Hours Example HOOA 9 26 Time amp Attendance Software Output Paychex Preview Examples of export file fields for Paychex Preview are shown in the following matrix table Payroll si x Prev Payroll ID Enter a 2 character code with the 1 character an E Payroll General Tab Specify the location and file name forthe export file Example C ProgramFiles Time Guardian
388. tion Position Primary Type Hours Type Attendance Split Eh Company Regular Hours Worked Hours 88 Users Overtime Hours Worked Hours Groups Double Time Hours Worked Hours Triple Time Hours Worked Hours aaa om Sick Hours Non Worked Hours gg Shifts Wacation Hours Non worked Hours E be Daily Rules Personal Hours Non Worked Hours a Payclass Holiday 8 Hours Non Worked Hours Bonus Dollars Worked Hours 7 EA Schedule J Jury Duty OlHours INon Wworked Hours HS Locations F Bereavement Hours iNon Worked Hours Daily Activities REG NJ Corporate MFG Worked Hours H 69 output SHC SSIES ORM RRR Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module 10 11 2 10 ine 12 13 Click on the Add aa button and the Pay Codes window will appear tj Paycodes BIR Cost Multiplier Billable Multiplier _ Split Hours Counts Towards Attendance In the Name field enter in a name for the Pay Code Duplicate names are not allowed In the Description field enter in a brief description of the Pay Code Enter the Position number A Position number is assigned automatically but can be changed This number is used for display order on reports and the Timecard grid Select the Primary Type how the hours awarded to a specific Pay Code will be classified Hours corresponds to worked hours REG OT and non worked hours SI
389. to simultaneously vary from company to company and is therefore part of the software configuration Labor Levels can be created through the Setup Wizard or by selecting the Labor Levels module within the Company module Fl Time Guardian John_Smith File Edit Help Today Level Setup Level Name Ph Company 1 Department roaLabor Levels B Rate Setup SELS amp Rate Template SEE S LEVELS Combined Cost Rates 6 LEVELG F Combined Billable Rates i AA Users n Pay Codes i Sy Shifts if BP Daily Rules g Pay Class m f Schedule oo000E i Locations f Daily Activities 6 output To create Labor Levels you must specify how many of them you wish to use and then enter a name for each in the desired level in the General Tab and check Active for each Labor Level used By default Level 1 is always active Level 1 LEVELI Mames Level2 LEvEL2 iV Active E Names Level3 LEVELS Active EQ Names Level 4 LEVEL4 7 active E Names Level5 LEVELS IV Active Mames Level 6 LEVEL6 7 Active ES Names Once entered the main Labor Level name will appear in the desired field number To add levels within each Labor Level click on the Edit Names button in the desired row 15 2 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module The Labor Names window for the selected Labor Level will appear as shown in the following example Labor Names LEVEL1 Nam
390. to the Time amp Attendance software will be automatically added to the Access Control system using the same command Once the Access Control Module is activated the Time amp Attendance software can be configured to use the punches stored in the Nexus220 and AmanoNet 7 6 database for time and attendance This can be accomplished automatically when polling is performed or manually when the Synchronize Access Control command is selected from the Settings tab in the Auto Process module see figure The Auto Process will run as a Service in the background based upon the Reccurrence settings that you have defined i ox General Settings Recurrence Process Type Note The terminals must be set up for Time and Attendance in Nexus220 or AmanoNet 7 6 The sections of the Time amp Attendance Software affected and or features added from the activation of this module include e Access Control Integration provided for Nexus220 AmanoNet 7 6 e Employee synchronization provided for On application startup Manual synchronization New employee synchronization between the Time amp Attendance software amp Access e Department synchronization New Department synchronization between the Time amp Attendance software amp Access Time amp Attendance Software Access Control Module 16 1 Using Access C ontrol M odule Nexus 220 Integration Wizard Setup for Nexus 220 The following paragraphs detail
391. ton Click on the button when finished To edit a Certification highlight the desired item in the list The selected Certification will appear in the Name and Description fields After making your changes click on the button when finished Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 41 To update a Certification highlight the desired item in the list The selected Certification will appear in the Name and Description fields After making your changes click on the update button when finished To delete a Certification highlight the desired item in the list The selected Certification will appear in the Name and Description fields Click on the button To add a Certification to an employee s record highlight the desired Certification in the Available list and click on the button To select all the listed Certifications click on the Add All button To document the date the Certification was achieved enter the date in the Date Achieved field or use the Calendar icon provided To remove a Certification from an employee s record highlight the desired Certification in the Selected list and click on the button To remove all the listed Certifications click on the button Note This function can also be done with Global Assign from the main employee list E mployees B enefit This tab allows you to adjust Benefit time for an employee It also allows you to view Benefit balances This tab will only be visible if the Tracking T
392. ttings of this machine woar Senge Domati wowed Hersttvetree IP address of this server 980 Port number for the wabsbased admin console defuit ii 090 Admin accore Secure Admin Console Port amay Port number fer the wei Dased smin console Whrough SEL default ie 2093 we O Mo Enabler or digables secure XMEP connectors Continue H lve Messer Selop Micros lier Ejler fe Edt Wen Frae Took fe Q D A Lave ero Que S SG BS Agde tate s 27 0 0 haeun jo jc ie Jive Messenger Setup Dataseurce Sellings Choose how you would like fo connect fo the Jive Messenger database Standard Database Connection Use an eeternal database Wih the buih im conection poal Embedded Database Uee an embedded dalabase powered by Hague This Optian requires mo external database comigurahion ard if an essy way fo get muri quickly Mowers this f not recarirrversied for large restallatiorns Dali oe Saltire amin Aoin Canin 20 8 Time amp Attendance Software Events Notification Module 5 The Administrator Account screen will appear Bb pdi mea Foaie Tok bib GO us E ig H P Jj merth Se Favorites Wi E bde Aan gas PL Ss Rc a a pa Administrator Account Enter settings for the system administrator account usemame of admin below ft is important fo choose a password for the account that cannot be easly guessed for mampi at least six characters long and containing a mi of l
393. tware Communications Chapter 8 Recalculate The Recalculate module is used to recalculate employee hours for the selected Pay periods within a given Pay Class The Pay period must be open for hours to be recalculated R ecalculate M odule To Recalculate employee hours 1 Click on the Recalculate module within the Daily Activities group in the Tree View 2 Click on the Recalculate Department Employee 3 Inthe Pay Class tab select the Pay Class for the employee s hours you are going to recalculate and select the Pay period that the hours belong to from the Pay period list or In the Pay Class tab select All for Pay Class and select the Pay period that the hours belong to from the Pay period list This list consists of Last Open Period Previous Open Period Current Pay period and Previous Pay period 4 Click the Department tab to sort or filter employees Recalculate lass Department Employee To recalculate the hours of employees that belong to a particular Department highlight the desired Department in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all Departments listed click on the Add All button Time amp Attendance Software Recalculate 8 1 To remove employees that belong to a particular Department highlight the desired Department in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all selected Departments click on the Remove All button Department
394. tware options are available see figure e ADP forDOS e ADP PC Payroll for Windows e CBS Payroll e Ceridian Power Pay e EasyPay e Excel e Gevity HR e PayDay e PayChex Paylink e PayChex Preview e PayWeb e PeachTree Win e QuickBooks Pro Do vou wantto send employee hours to your payroll software Wo Yes Quickbooks Pro ki Faychex Paylink Faychex Preview Fayweb PeachTree Win Note The Apply and Close button function is universal for all Setup Wizard steps QuickBooks Pro Procedure 1 Select Yes to send employee hours to payroll software and select QuickBooks from the dropdown menu 2 Select Yes if QuickBooks is installed on the same PC with the Time amp Attendance software or No to connect across network to QuickBooks See Step 7 Employee Setup for integration synchronization with QuickBooks Note 40 plus additional payroll interfaces are available with Payroll Interface module upgrade activation See Payroll Interface Module for a list of Payroll Interfaces After saving the information for Step 1 General Setup click on the Next lj button to advance to Step 2 Department Setup If no General Setup is desired skip all of Step 1 and just click on the laj button to advance to Step2 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard 3 7 Note You can close at any time to end the Setup Wizard but you must complete the Setup Wizard before you can Log into the Amano Time amp
395. uide the MTX 15 Terminal Time Guardian Quick Start Guide the MTX 15 Installation amp Operation Guide and the FPT 40 Installation amp Operation Guide All these documents can be accessed and printed from the Time amp Attendance software CD An overview of the software installation steps is as follows Step 1 Insert the Time amp Attendance CD into your CD ROM drive and the InstallS hield W izard will automatically launch If the installation Stalls browse on CD to Disk1 InstData W indows V M install exe Full integration with QuickBooks Pro can require QuickBooks to be installed on the host PC and open during Installation merere Acipaition Pagal atian Product Serial haphe a digits mamahe j Step 2 After the initial software installation the Sees Bieter Amano Software Activation screen will ae appear Enter the 9 digit serial number and click the Activate button Upon successful activation perform on line registration Next the user will be prompted SIERO to proceed through the 9 Step Setup Wizard Sep i j seer Oppo Comparey rule aed payed interface Gag i q ipri Bpi Ee Pay Cede Opera Step 3 Login to the Time amp Attendance software and perform daily activities such as Timecard Administration and Payroll etc The software by default will support 100 employees If you have more than 100 employees contact Amano Support to obtain an incremental upgrade from 125 to an unli
396. ule The MTX 15 lock in schedule can restrict an employee from punching outside the authorized time range without supervisor help Also the function buttons activation on the MTX 15 display are controlled by the communication download with the Time amp Attendance software Communications Module From the tree view click on the Communications module within the Daily Activities group and the following type of screen should appear D Time Guardian John_Doe File Edit Help JA Today ie SG Setup Description Term Type TZ Offset Connection IP Daily Activities NJ Front Entrance biometric FPT 40 0 Ethernet 192 168 00 AD Employees FPT 40 RD Lab Entrance to R amp D lab 0 Ethernet 192168 001 E Timecard MTX 15 Terminal 2_ Front Employee Door gsis Djpirect ____ 192 168 00 EP Individual Schedule Communications E Recalculate E Payperiods gt amp 8 outpu rr gt ez kd Output E ae iS BOME Locations are selected by clicking on the desired row You can select multiple locations by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking on other locations Also you can sort the displayed Locations list by clicking on the dropdown list in the upper left hand corner and selecting on Name Description Term Type TZ Offset Connection IP Port COM Port Baud Rate Modem and Phone Once the location is selected use the following commands found at the bottom of the screen to communicate with the terminal s at that lo
397. ule Import Advanced Schedule Import e Time card Schedule Override e Web Schedules Template Auto Schedule Rotation Individual Schedule Software Setup amp Feature Software Configuration Location Schedule Main Application Tree View Advanced Pay Class Main Application Tree View Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Schedule Module 12 1 Using the Advanced Schedule M odule An employee s schedule is made up of template schedules and auto schedules Together these schedules form the weekly work pattern that can be applied to an employee Note You must have activated the Advanced Schedule Module to see Schedule and the four 4 nodes Templates Schedules Auto Schedules Schedule Coverage and Schedule Rotation in the tree view Note If the Web Interface Module is activated you can perform Templates Schedules Auto Schedules Schedule Coverage and Schedule Rotation utilizing the Web See the Web Interface Module for procedural steps Note See Timecard Administration for procedural steps for Schedule Overrides utilizing the Overrides Tab from an employee Timecard Pay Class Schedule 1 Click on the Schedule tab This tab will assign an employee to a schedule based on their Start and end times 24 Pay Class Eor General Day Change Schedule Rounding Overtime Definition Overtime Execution Overtime Authorization Holiday Benefit Execution Assignment based on schedule start time 30 15 Before schedule
398. ult color settings of the Exceptions click on the button To save new settings for the Exception Colors click on the button The desktop side of Time Guardian Pro has one set of colors while the Web side has a different set of colors Note Web safe selection in the Color Palette means these colors are guaranteed to be the same in all browsers The following is an example of the Timecard grid using colors i ged Time Guardian abp Cay Achieve ipat Prokerercoan Sarva tance Dakia haat BersBibaleccas dre Sched BE 1 k H 12 rih ben 17 22 Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module Black punches on the Timecard grid means the punches are from the employee while red indicates the punches have been performed by a supervisor Miscellaneous C olors M enu Selection W eb The Miscellaneous Colors submenu is used to change the colors for items listed on the Timecard grid Select the Miscellaneous Colors and the following User Preferences Miscellaneous Colors window will appear Time Guardian Setup Daily Activies Output Preference User Preferences Miscellaneous Colors Punches Holiday Punches Schedale Group Punches Edited In punch font Punches Edited Out punch fant Punches Auto Fant swiches OLS Font Punches Adjustment Font Adjustment Edited hours lunt Adjustment Sundoy Adjustmont Monday E 8 gigi w l esecoeso Adjustment Saturday Work Hours Awaed Ilaurs A
399. umber of hours that when exceeded will cause an employee s hours to be calculated as overtime Wizard The installation program created specifically for the Time and Attendance software which can also be accessed from the Setup menu G 10 Time amp Attendance Software Glossary AMANO Corporate Headquarters 140 Harrison Avenue Roseland NJ 07068 1239 800 526 2559 www amano com AMX 406700A Copyright 2010 Amano Cincinnati Inc 10 10
400. umns Adjustment columns Exception colors Miscellaneous colors Period Totals Punches Columns Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 19 Punches C olumns M enu Selection W eb The Punches Columns selection is used to set the properties of each of the columns in the Punch tab view of the Timecard grid Select the Punches Columns and the following User Preferences Punches Columns window will appear Time Guardian Setup Daily Actvibies Output Preferences Ai Bin iperna SYSDBA r User Preferences Punches Columns obum Color Webath ate 75 Day BETE ladicator FFFFFF TF EP PPPPE ay 1M Punch FFFFFF im Pinch fF PPP BAP CIM Paint FFFFFF OLS iN Punch F FPFFFF SHI Currie IN bunch AFER oration 18 Pinth PF PPPFE Fernald 1M F hi FFFFFF Cay CUT Pun FPP PPE OMT Bunch FFFFFF PAP OUT Pinth j BF PPP WS OUT p h FFFFFF Shift Override OUT Punch FFFFFF Loratinn OUT Punch FFFFFF we 40 EEE amp m 10n 8B M EEEEREEEEEEEEEEE E Terminal CMT Punch e Color Color of the Column The default is white The color can be changed by clicking on the desired color palette icon alongside the desired column field and selecting a color from the Pick A Color palette from a palette of 3 choices The choices are Windows Safe Palette Web Safe Palette or Grey Scale Palette e Width Width of the Column To change the width of the desired Column enter in a number e Show T
401. unding e Daily Rules Rounding Template Daily Rounding Meal Break Rounding Hours Rounding or Punch Rounding Specific Day of Week Holiday Rounding Daily Rules ss ES General Rounding Break Meal 550_daily_rules f e Shift Rules Exception Template Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Rounding Module 14 1 a Shifts OER 550_shift Rounding Template Exception Template Meal Template Shift Overtime Outside Shift Overtime None Using the Advanced Rounding M odule 1 Click on the Pay Class module in the tree view 2 Click on the Rounding tab This tab is used to set the rounding rules for the Pay Class rtime Execution Overtime Authorization Holiday Benefit Execution Day of week 24 Punch Rounding Unit Break OUT 15 BreakIN 15 Meal OUT 15 Meal IN 15 Hours Enter the following to set the Hours rounding rules for the Pay Class e Type Select the period in which the hours will be rounded The choices are None Weekly or Pay period If None is selected Time Guardian Pro checks the Daily Rules and then the Shift rules for rounding If Weekly is selected you must specify the Day of the Week that the workweek begins in the Day of week field e Unit The numeric value used to adjust an employee punch time to a consistent measurement of time Common Units are 1 3 6 15 and 30 A Point divides each Unit 14 2 Time amp Attendance Software Advan
402. vertime after 10hrs M F Description Employee recieves OT for all hours after 10hrs in a day Monday thru Friday All Paycodes count Remove 3 Enter a name for the Daily Overtime template in the name field required field 4 Enter a description of the Daily Overtime template in the Description field 5 Click on the Settings tab and the following window will appear Daily Overtime PER ies EIFE r M aeon General Settings Day of week Holiday s BET E Level Count To Base 00 00 08 00 Schedule Level 08 00 Level 2 12 00 Level 3 li Level 4 11 12 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Overtime Module 6 Inthe Level tab select the day of the week that this overtime rule will apply to using the Day of the Week Holiday s field The choices are Sunday through Saturday Default or Holiday Group The Default setting will be used for any day s or Holiday s not defined explicitly Enter the threshold limits and assign a Pay Code to each level of overtime 7 Click on the Count tab and the following window will appear n Daily Overtime General Settings Day of week Holiday s Default Fy 6 Level Count Level2 Levels Level 4 g9 lt v m Paycode Base REG oo0o000 SSOO0OK lt lt lt lt _ IIIs hn 2m Be an Bs OOO OoORs Doo oDoooo DOD
403. ward Hours Override To define colors for miscellaneous columns click on the button on the desired color column and select a color from the Pick A Color palette To restore the default color settings of the listed items click on the button To save new Settings for the Miscellaneous Colors click on the button Adding Editing and Deleting Employee Punches Adding Punches W eb Punches are added by clicking on the desired IN or OUT punch field in the Timecard grid and entering the time in the field Punches can be entered in either military or AM PM format For example 5 o clock PM can be entered as 500p AM PM or 1700 Military When entering in AM PM format AM is the default When 8 Is entered it will be taken as 8 00 AM If 8 o clock PM is intended the 8 must be followed by a P or 8P When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes and update the Timecard grid screen view Time amp Attendance Software Web Interface Module 17 23 E diting Punches W eb To edit punches click on the desired IN or OUT Punch field and enter the desired time When you have finished click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes Deleting Punches W eb To delete a punch click on the desired IN or OUT Punch field highlight the punch right click and select Delete Also you can click to toggle row selection and press the Delete button see figure When you have finished click on th
404. well Manuel 123468 James William Remove All 123469 Paxton Jeffrey MA lel e To addan employee to the report highlight the desired employee in the Available list and click on the Add button e To select all employees to the report click on the Add All button e To remove an employee from the report highlight the desired employee in the Selected list and click on the Remove button e Toremove all selected employees click on the Remove All button e Tosort both Available and Selected employee lists select a category from the dropdown list in the Sort field Also enter filter characters in the Criteria field above the Selected list to show employees filtered based upon that information Do the Same thing above the Selected list to filter those employees Employees can be simultaneously filtered in both the Available and Selected lists in ascending order by using the Sort field dropdown list The choices in this list are employee number badge number payroll number last name first name or comment field Additionally Employee s can be filtered in the Available or Selected lists by entering additional case sensitive characters in dedicated Criteria fields see above illustration The Criteria field located above the Available list filters only that list while the Criteria field above the Selected list filters that list Each list is filtered independently in ascending order 1
405. will appear Atthis point you have a trial period of up to 14 days to use the software Click the OK button to launch the software and continue using the Time amp Attendance software under the trial period Amano Activation Software Activation Registration Product Serial Number 9 digits number 3 activate f3 Your Software is not activated __ Phone In Activation Trial Period a You have 14 trial davisi remaining before this software expires Please activate your software TAR Note If the Activation error dialog appears e g the serial number is incorrect or the Same serial number was previously installed At this point contact Amano customer Support at 1 800 896 7035 lig fi 2 8 Time amp Attendance Software Installation x Failed to activate please call customer support at 1 800 896 7035 21 Upon successful activation the registration screen will appear See figure Perform on line registration by entering the appropriate information in the Product Registration fields red error messages will appear alongside incomplete fields Amano recommends you complete the registration to ensure notification of all important software updates etc P AG Amano Time Managereent Overview Microsof imermet Explorer provided by AMANO Cincianati ine b IO x G p Mipi mo o hm Tmora om MPT Regeber Cocke Rage ator chm v X Fle Eat Wee Faverfes Toos Heb Picormet PO Seer r gt WS Bh sean Tre Mi
406. wish to track 4 To adda rate based on a Rate Template check the Use Rate Template option and select a Rate Template from the dropdown list in the Rate field Combined Billable Rates an General Employee 1002 Smith John Cost Center 55 3 C03 Department 1 Default JOBCLASS 1 Default LEVEL4 1 Default Rate Standard Rate If you do not wish to use a Rate Template click on the Add button and a row will appear in the Rates box see the following figure Combined Billable Rates General C Use Rate Template Employee li uo Patel Ramesh Cost Center 55 3 CE3 Department 1 Default 7 JOBCLASS 1 Default LEVEL4 1 Default Rates Date Rate aA aa R 12 3 2007 212 25 0 Delete o 5 Click on the button in the Date field to enter the date that the rate will be in effect When you have finished click on the button to save the date and return to the Rate Template window 6 Enter a rate in the Rate field see previous figure 15 12 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Labor Rate Module 7 Repeat Steps 3 thru 6 to add additional Rates to this template 8 To delete a rate select the desired row and click on the button 9 To automatically increase the rate by click on the Percent Increase button on bi hed Billable Rates General Use Rate Template Employee 1007
407. with the Tree View see Time Guardian Plus example figure time Guardian Plus John_Doe File Edit Help El Today a P Daily Activities nploy pe Communications H Recalculate 69 output 4 Reports du g Payrolls su Import Export i Auto Process Time amp Attendance Software How To Use 4 1 Note The software will always open to the tree view in the last module opened If necessary Simply click on the signs to expand the Daily Activities and or Output Group to view the modules Setup with subordinate modules will be present if Advanced modules are activated Some modules may not be active depending upon what selections were made using the Setup Wizard i e selecting No on Step 8 Clock for terminals other than Access Control Also the User type login will control which modules are active i e a Payroll user logged in will not be able to see the Import Export and Auto Process modules Several modules such as Pay Class and Shift Rules will not be visible unless the Advanced Pay Class and Advanced Meal modules are activated Note Time Guardian Pro contains all modules L ayout Appearance The following is an overview of the screens for standard Time Guardian Plus with no activated optional Advanced modules menus and buttons used throughout the system i Username j re Title B ar Daily Activities Modules W Time Guardian Plus John_Doe Joj x Menu
408. wn list Enter info inthis to filter all field to filter the Available employees Selected saected list 1235 Jackson Bill Add 1237 Newman Alfred Enter info in the field Add all to filter the Available list Remove Remove All MV Show Active Employees Only 11 By default all employee records are selected and will appear in the Selected list Employees can be removed from the Group by selecting them in the Selected list and clicking on the Remove button All the employees can be removed from the Selected list by clicking on the Remove All button Employees can be simultaneously filtered in both the Available and Selected lists in ascending order by using the Sort field dropdown list The choices in this list are employee number badge number payroll number last name first name or comment field Additionally Employee s can be filtered in the Available or Selected lists by entering additional case sensitive characters in dedicated Criteria fields see above illustration The Criteria field located above the Available list filters only that list while the Criteria field above the Selected list filters that list Each list is filtered independently in ascending order Note By unselecting Pay Classes it will reduce the Employees that the user can have access to Note The Administrator cannot be deleted 12 After completing the entry selection of information for Step 9 Login
409. x if this employee manages any other employee This will allow the employee to show up in the supervisor list box on the assignment tab Authority Level The choices are None Service Setup Management Enrollment and Special These choices are only utilized for Hand Punch Terminals Reject Threshold The choices are Default and 30 strictest setting 250 least strict Management Type Available when using Access Control The choices are a Access Control and Time Attendance The employee will be written to both the access system and the Time Guardian databases b Time Attendance The employee will be written to the Time Guardian database only c Access Control The employee will be written to the access system database only Employee Type Available when using Access Control and the management Type Is set to Access Control and Time Attendance or Access Control The choices are Employee or Visitor Different access rights can be given to employees and visitors Type There are two options to identify your employees Select either Salary or Hourly Pay Type Select either Hours or Schedule Note A salaried employee can be paid by hours or by schedule An employee does not have to punch to get credit for hours A salaried employee can either be paid by Hours fixed hours to pay for each schedule s and all un scheduled punches will be grouped and not count as hours no hours Exceptions will be generated when employees punch
410. xt Qualifier from the dropdown list The choices are None Single Quote or Double Quote The Text Qualifier is the character which encapsulates a data element i e California e Date Format Select the date format from the dropdown lists The choices are Month 1 Month 01 Month J an Month J anuary Year 90 Year 1990 Day 1 Day 01 and Day Mon e Hour Format Select the hour format The choices are Hour 8 00 Hour 08 00 Hour 08 00 or Minutes 480 e Full Name Format Select the Full Name Format from the dropdown list The choices are FirstName LastName FirstName Middle LastName FirstName Middle LastName LastName FirstName LastName FirstName and LastName F irstName Middle Note This field will be available for assignment in the Import Field Map Settings tab 7 Click on the Import Default Settings tab This tab allows you set the defaults for data being imported Select the following Import Bt goo v General Import File Format Settings Import Default Settings Import Field Map Settings Employee Number Badge Payroll Number As itis As itis As itis Same As Badge Same As Employee Number Same As Employee Number Manual Increment From O Manual Increment From Default Labor Default Assignment Department Default Pay Class NJMFG Schedule None Time Zone GMT 1 1 00 West Samoa e ummer Time Daily Rule None Zone N ZONE1 Buu a
411. y Change Time and Override After Midnight The Day Change Time set in the software occurs on or after midnight Example a Day Change Time of 1 00 a m occurs after midnight AM PM Used to indicate day or night when using a 12 hour format for displaying time Audit Report A report that displays all changes made in the Time and Attendance software which Is listed by user date time and the change made Auto Update Automatically locates the terminal and sets the time Badge Number The number of the card assigned to each employee Time amp Attendance Software Glossary G 1 Before Midnight The Day Change Time set in the software occurs on or before midnight Example a Day Change Time of 10 00 p m occurs before midnight Bell One of two types of relay schedules a bell is a device used to produce a tone at an assigned time and day Bereavement The Pay Code used for grievance Bonus Used to give an employee a monetary award for a given day By Actual Time Displays actual punch times in the editing screen By Rounded Time Displays Rounded punches configured by the pay policy in the editing screen Clear Transaction Will clear all punches recorded in the terminal Comments Used to add text to describe certain areas for reference only Current Indicates the Current day Custom Toolbar Allows the user to add edit or delete buttons from the toolbar located on the Main screen Daily Overtime
412. y Code highlight the desired Pay Code in the Selected list and click on the Remove button To remove all the listed Pay Codes click on the Remove All button 12 If the employee works on an unscheduled day before the holiday you have the option of using that day for the previous day requirement To do so place a check in the checkbox 13 If the employee works on an unscheduled day after the holiday you have the option of using that day for the next day requirement To do so place a check in the checkbox 14 Click on the Holiday Selection tab By default all Holidays will be selected 10 6 Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module My Holiday Group General Seniority Eligibility schedule Eligibility Holiday Selection Available 1219 Wizard Simkhat Torah 1223 Wizard Tu B Shevat 1274 Wizard Chanukah 1228 Wizard Passover President s Day Washington Birthday Selected New Year 5 Day Flag Day i 1217 Wizard Shemini Atzeret at f Martin Luther King Birthday EA Day Add All oeiee Day Columbus Day Remove Remove Labor Day Penove All akeh oain Taw SA r __ Move Up Mowe Bown To add a Holiday to the group highlight the desired Holiday in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all Holidays to the group click on the Add All button To remove a Holiday from the group highlight the desired Holiday in the Se
413. y after the holiday Time amp Attendance Software Advanced Pay Class Module 10 5 e Must work next and previous scheduled day To be awarded holiday hours the employee must work a required minimum amount of hours in the designated Pay Code s on the previously scheduled day before and the next scheduled day after the holiday e Must work next or previous scheduled day To be awarded holiday hours the employee must work a required minimum amount of hours in the designated Pay Code s on the previously scheduled day before or the next scheduled day after the holiday 11 For each eligibility requirement you must select the minimum number of hours to be worked in a specific Pay Code and the maximum number of days that Time Guardian Pro will look back or forward 1 20 to see if the Pay Code requirement was met After entering the minimum number of hours to be worked you must specify the Pay Code for the hours worked The choices are Worked Hours Non Worked Hours All Hours Selected Pay Codes or Within Schedule For Selected Pay Codes click on the Browse e button The Select Pay Codes window will appear Select Pay Codes Available Selected NI REG A OT REG C ma DT Lenin JOCK Add All Remove Remove All v Move Down Les To add a Pay Code highlight the desired Pay Code in the Available list and click on the Add button To select all Pay Codes click on the Add All button To remove a Pa
414. y available in the Time and Attendance software Used to assign Relay Schedules Time Display The format used to display time either AM PM or Military Time Time from Start of Schedule A setting used when employees are punching IN and OUT for meals This number defines the window of time before a meal can be taken Tips Used to record tip earnings Also one of two pay codes used to assign dollar amounts Tools Located under the Help section of the Main menu Tools are internal utilities used to assist in the understanding of the Time and Attendance software calculations Type of Employee Used to indicate how employee hours will be displayed in the Time and Attendance software The options are Hourly or Salary Time amp Attendance Software Glossary G 9 Undefined Data Data that cannot be processed by the Time and Attendance software will be noted in the Audit Trail Report Undefined data is usually caused when an employee is punching prior to being entered in the software The Time and Attendance software will automatically process undefined data Unit Identifies how an hour will be divided into smaller pieces for rounding purposes Vacation The Pay Code used for scheduled time off Wages An assigned dollar amount per hour which is applied to the hours worked plus any authorized overtime with pay code multiplier tips and or bonuses to create an employee s calculated earnings Weekly Overtime An assigned n
415. ype is fixed but some content can be hidden Report Name Audit Report Lists by user and date parameter changes made to the system with old and new values shown Portrait format list of employees with showing employee Employee Report information such as address phone numbers hire date E mail schedule type Pay Class pay type 55 etc Lists all employees exceptions by day with IN OUT punches Exceptions Report Usedto make corrections Landscape calendar like view of selected exceptions Historical Hours Report generated by an employee and the hours worked by day Exception number with minutes for exceptions are also listed Lists employees total minutes hours worked by Pay Code with total dollars and signature lines Grouping of hours worked by employees in labor categones from each labor level showing wages and billable rates Hours Summary Report Labor Analysis Report shows by day all employees who were present and absent and at what time they punched in and out ri ee Lists daily employee punches hours exceptions and ARES ENE schedules in a landscape style format Tips Report report by employee showing all paid tips for a period of time Time amp Attendance Software Output 9 1 The following is a list of the additional reports available when optional modules are activated equivalent to Time Guardian Pro Report Name Unauthorized Hours Report Lists by employee and date hours that are not
416. ype on the Company module Is select as Deaccrual or Import Balances If None was selected in this field no Benefit tab will appear on the Employees screen Note If Import Balances has been selected from Setup gt Company gt Settings for Benefit Tracking Type then the Add and Delete buttons to Adjust Benefit Time will be grayed out because cannot adjust benefit time When you import benefit balances you can only keep track of how the imported amounts are used by showing Benefit Balance From the Employees screen click on the Benefit tab and the following type of screen will appear General Personal Contact Assignments Scheduling Labor Level Certification Wages Benefit web Access Adjust Benefit Time Benefit Balance Amount Taken Available Current 00 00 0 00 10 00 Sep 29 2006 00 00 Sep 29 2006 00 00 Sep 29 2006 00 00 Sep 29 2006 00 00 Sep 29 2006 00 00 BAr Selecta Pay code from the dropdown list The choices are all non work hours type pay codes SCK VAC PER HOL JURY and BRV 3 42 Time amp Attendance Software Setup Wizard To adjust the benefit time for an employee click on the Add button Setup gt Company gt Settings Tracking Type must be set to Deaccruals for Add to be enabled Click on the calendar icon to enter the date Click in the Amount field and enter the amount To reset the available amount to the entered value check the

Time Guardian Plus User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents